REESE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. J/ Received. Accessions No.Z-^TQ? Shelf No.. GREEK GRAMMAR, FOR THE USE LEARNERS. BY E. A. SOPHOCLES, A. M. SECOND EDITION. HARTFORD: H. HUNTINGTON, JUN. NEW YORK: F. J. HUNTINGTON AND COMPANY, 174 PEARL STREET. 1840. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by H. HUNTINGTON, Jun. ; in the Clerk's office of the District Court of the District of Connecticut, CAMBRIDGE : POLSOM, WELLS, AND THURSTON, PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY. fasg PREFACE. THE materials, of which this compendious Grammar is composed, have been drawn from the best sources. The examples given in the Syntax are taken from the following classic authors : Homer, Hesiod, Pindar, jiEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, Theocritus; Herodotus, Thucydides, Xenophon, Lysias, Isocrates, ^Eschines, Demos- thenes, Plato, Aristotle. Those rules, which should be first read and which should be committed to memory, are print- ed in the largest type (as ^ 136. 1). E. A. S. NEW HAVEN, October 20*A, 1839. CONTENTS. PART 1. LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. Page The Greek Alphabet - Accent - p, f . Vo%vels . - 4 Enclitics 16 Diphthongs ... 5 Breathings - - - 6 Conn action - Crasis .... 17 18 Consonants - Elision .... 19 Euphonic Changes - - 7 Syncope, Metathesis, and Apheeresis 19 Movable Consonants 11 Punctuation .... 20 Syllables - - - - 12 Pronunciation ... 20 Quantity of Syllables - - 13 PART II. INFLECTION OF WORDS. Parts of Speech ... 23 Augment .... 84 Noun - - - - 23 First Declension - - - Syllabic Augment Temporal Augment ... 84 86 Second Declension - - - 27 Third Declension Augment of Compound Verb* Verbal Roots and Terminations 87 83 Syncopated Nouns of the Third Declension 36 Contracts of the Third Declension - 37 Indicative Mood - Subjunctive Mood - - ' 59 92 Indeclinable Nouns - Optative Mood - 93 Defective Nouns 45 Infinitive Mood - 95 Adjectives - - - - 45 Participle - 96 Adjectives in o? - Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and Middle 96 Adjectives in oo? - - 48 Adjectives in vg . _ 48 Aorist Passive Accent of Verbs - Formation of the Tenses 99 100 101 Adjectives in ^ and s . . 49 Present Active ... Imperfect Active 101 105 Compound Adjectives - - 54 Anomalous and Defective Adjectives 55 First and Second Perfect Active First and Second Pluperfect Active First and Second Future Active 106 108 108 Degrees of Comparison - - First and Second Aorist Active 110 112 Comparison by jcov, nrrog - 58 Anomalous and Defective Comparison 59 Numerals - - . 61 Cat dinal Numbers - . - 61 Ordinal Numbers - - 63 Numeral Substantives, Adjectives, and Ad- Pluperfect Passive First and Second Aorist Passive First, Second, and Third Future Passive Present, Imperfect, Perfected Pluperfect Middle First and Second Future Middle 112 113 114 115 ' 116 116 Article - - " - 64 First and Second Aorist Middle Contract Verbs - 117 118 Pronoun ... 65 Personal Pronoun - - 65 Verbs in ^. ... 124 Reflexive Pronoun - - 67 Anomalous Verbs 135 Possessive Pronoun - - .68 Adverb .... 168 Interrogative Pronoun 68 Indefinite Pronoun - 69 Comparison of Adverbs Derivation of Words 171 172 Demonstrative Pronoun 69 Relative Pronoun - - -70 Derivation of Substantives Derivation of Adjectives - 172 175 Reciprocal Pronoun 71 Pronominal Adjectives - - 71 Derivation of Verbs - Composition of Words 176 177 Verb - - - 73 PART III. SYNTAX. Substantive - - - 179 Passive - 229 Adjective 180 Middle 230 Article - - - -181 Deponent Verbs ... 232 Pronoun 185 Tenses 232 Personal Pronoun - - 185 Present, Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future 232 Reflexive Pronoun - - 187 Imperfect 234 Possessive Pronoun - - - 188 Third Future ... 234 Interrogative Pronoun 188 Aorist 234 Moods .... 235 Demonstrative Pronoun - 189 Indicative ... 235 Relative Pronoun ... 190 Subjunctive ... 237 Reciprocal Pronoun 194 Optative 239 Subject and Predicate - - 194 Imperative 242 Object -..- 201 Infinitive ... 242 Accusative .... 202 Participle 248 248 Dathe - - - .221 Vocative 227 Preposition - , 250 252 Voice* - - . -227 Interjection 255 Active ... 227 Irregular Construction 257 PART IV. VERSIFICATION. Feet - - . 259 Dactylic Verse ... 264 Trochaic Verse 261 Anapestic Verse ... 266 Iambic Verse - . - . -262 GREEK INDEX - 267 I ABBREVIATIONS 284 KNGUSU INDEX - . 276 J or THE {JWI7ERSITY| LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. THE GREEK ALPHABET. 1. 1. The Greek alphabet consists of the following twenty-four letters : Figure. Representative. Name. A a Jl a "AX(pa, Jllpha B j8 6 B b Srftot, Beta r 7 r G g rappa, Gamma // 3 D d ^/f'Ara Delta E s E e "EylXov Epsilon z : Z z ZrJTa, Zeta H j? E e ^Hra Eta e & e TH th 0fJTa Theta i i I i 'Icorot, Iota K x K k Kdmta, Kappa A A L I AdfuflSa. Lambda M ft M m Mv J\lu or My N v JV n Nv J\u or J\Ty S | X x SI Xi o . *O pixgovOmicron n n w p P Hi Pi P 9 R r 'P Rho 2 a s final S s 2fyfia Sigma T r 1 T t Tav Tau T v Uor Y u or y r Ti/yAoV Upsilon y PH ph 0i Phi x x CH ch XI Chi *P y PS ps Tl Psi SI a, 1 r J2 fisya Omega 2 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 1. 2. These letters are divided into vowels and consonants. The vowels are a, f, ??, e, o, v, o the consonants are /J, y, 5, , #, *, A, ^, i/ 5 1, TT, p, NOTE 1. E was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It was qualified by the adjective v/'/Xov, smooth (not aspirated), only when it was used as a vowel. Anciently this vowel stood also for n and the diphthong u. E. g. utSfy was written AI0EP. H was originally equivalent to the rough breathing. E. g. %VTKP was writ- ten HEIIAP, tep. E. g. Koiff%u was written IIA- 2XO, g%ovirt, EXO2I. It seems, that there was a time when O and H were distinguished from each other only by their size : hence the epithets ^/*gv, anall, and p'tya., large. X also was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It was called ^/iX.ev only when it was used as a vowel. As a breathing, or rather as a consonant, it was probably equivalent to the obsolete letter digamma. The modern Greeks still pronounce it like v orf, in the diphthongs &v and a.v. NOTE 2. Before the introduction of and X, the Greeks wrote IIH for <, and KH for X. E. g. they wrote EKELHANTOI 'E*0v<, EnET- KHOMENO2 lviu%op,svos. Here H is equivalent to the rough breathing. TH was probably never used for 0. They wrote also K2 or X2 for 3, and 3>2 for T. E. g. AEK2AI for &*/, THEAEX2ATO for $3iiT, O2TXA2 for -v/^*. NOTE 3. The most ancient Greek alphabet had three other letters, which disappeared from it in later times, and then were called lar/V^a, numeral marks. These are F or g 9 O or fa, and *^. F or s, Easy, VaU) or A/ya^a, Digamma, (that is, double gamma, so called on account of its form F, ) corresponds to the Latin F or V. It is still to be seen in some ancient inscriptions. V or ^/, Ktfircra, Jbppa, corresponds to the Latin Q. It was probably a deep guttural. ^^ , 2av or 2a^?rr, San or Sampi, was perhaps sounded like the Eng- lish sh. REMARK. The mark g representing trr must not be confounded with the digamma. NOTE 4. We observe, that o is used only at the beginning or middle, and g at the end of a word. E. g. afcrwa^fiVo?, not Some editors unnecessarily put g at the end of a word com- pounded with another. E. g. 'slsiqxopai for for dv0TV%i)g t ogxig for NOTE 5. The letters of the Greek alphabet are employed also as numeral f-gures. The first eight letters denote units 9 THE GREEK ALPHABET. the next eight, tens, and the last eight, hundreds. The obso- lete letters $-, /^ 97^ denote 6, 90, 900, respectively. Observe, that the letters denoting units, tens, or hundreds, have an accent above. Thousands commence the alphabet again, with a stroke underneath. Here follows a table of numerals. a 1 M 11 A' 30 ft 2 iff 12 1* 40 / 3 I/ 13 V 50 4 # 14 f 60 8 5 IS 15 r 70 g 6 19 16 71 80 t 7 17 h' 90 n 8 IT)' 18 Q 100 & 9 Off 19 200 i 10 X 20 r T 300 Examples, t ctuA.ri = 1838, ^ / 1776, ,r 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 2000 3000 &c. f = 1821. NOTE 6. There is another method of writing numerals, in which /, n, A, J2, II, ]n[, X, jf , M, respectively denote, "loq, one t UevTs, Jive, 4exa, ten, JJevTaxtg Jwa, Jive times ten, or fifty, 'EXGITOV (anciently IIEKATON), hundred, nevrdxig C jBxa- TOV, Jive hundred, Xlhoi, thousand, Hwiaxig Xl).ioi,Jive thousand, MVQIOI, ten thousand. (^ 60.) Here follows a table. I 1 Ann 17 MH 600 II 2 A nn i 18 IH[ IIII 700 III 3 An in i 19 'M. Him 800 mi 4 AA 20 ]H[ II II II n 900 n 5 AAA 30 X 1000 ni 6 AAAA 40 XX 2000 nn 7 TK 50 XXX 3000 mil 8 J^IA 60 xxxx 4000 nun 9 I^LAA 70 M 5000 j 10 ItfAAA 80 MX 6000 AI 11 "M.AAAA 90 7*r xx 7000 An 12 // 100 JSTxxx 8000 AIII 13 HH 200 ST xxxx 9000 Ann 14 HIIPI 300 M 10000 An 15 IIIIIIII 400 MX 11000 Am 16 M 500 &c. 4 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 2. VOWELS. 2. There are five short vowels, and five cor- responding long ones. The short vowels are a, f, A, o, # the long vowels are a, ??, e, w, v. The mark (~) is placed over a short vowel, and the mark (-), over a long one. These marks, however, are necessary only in the case of , i, and v, since the letters 77 and w repre- sent long E and respectively. NOTE 1. The vowels s and o are often called the short vow- els, V) and w, the long vowels, and a, i, v, the doubtful vowels. REMARK. By the term, doubtful, we are not to understand that the quantity of , i, v, is uncertain in any given syllable, but that in some syllables these vowels are always long, and in others always short. E. g. v in the words dvpog, nvgog wheat, is always long; in the words nvkr], vno, always short. There are, indeed, instances where the quantity of these let- ters is variable, as in "Ayy?, i in (jtvywrj, and v in XOQVVT) ' but we should recollect, that the sounds E and O also are, in certain instances, variable, as fyyog and &$6g, i'wpsv and lo per. NOTE 2. In strictness, the Greek alphabet has but five vowels, A, E, I, O, T. The long vowels differ from the short ones in quantity, but not in quality. NOTE 3. COMMUTATION OF VOWELS. (1) When from any cause the vowels s and o are to be lengthened, they are gen- erally changed into the diphthongs and ov, rather than into their corresponding long ones 77 and w. E. g. &lvog for &vog, fiovvog for povog. (2) In some instances o is lengthened into 01. E. g. nolct for Tioa. (3) The vowel often passes into ai or y. E. g. aid from act, T^?jA from tfw'AAw. (4) The vowels and s are frequently interchanged. E. g. Ionic isaaegsg for TsaatxQfg, Doric 7r/w for mi^w. (5) The syllables o and o> are often changed into w. E. g. Attic Afw's for huog, Ionic Eyern&cw for e^pgr^wwy. (6) The vowels a and r\ are interchanged. E. g. Doric for ^, Ionic n^y^n for VOWELS. 3.] The use of for ^ is one of the leading peculiarities of the Doric dialect. The use of 77 for d is peculiar to the Ionic. (7) The vowels and w are sometimes interchanged. E. g. and x>w'w. (8) The vowels e and o are often interchanged. E. g. rhgocpoi from T^STTW. (9) The vowels ?? and w are, in some instances, inter- changed. E. g. TTTJjoraw and DIPHTHONGS. ^3. 1. There are fourteen diphthongs, of which seven, CM, av, si, sv, 01, ov, and vi, begin with a short vowel, and seven, ol, at>, #, qv, cp, av. and tfc, with a long one. The former are called proper diphthongs, and the latter, improper diphthongs. The i is written under the long vowel, and is called iota subscript. In capitals it is written as a regular letter. E. g. THI *AriAI y jjj a/la' TJII 20fLl, TM aoyw ' ^ 7.] CONSONANTS. 7 NOTE 1. The preposition & in composition never coalesces with the following , just as e is compounded of a and i, o of a and M, and b of m and p. With respect to its making position ( 17. 2), this was probably owing to its strong vocal hissing. ' 3. The consonants TT, /3, , p, palatals x, y, %. The labials are pronounced chiefly with the tips; the tin- y with the tongue; and the palatals, with the palate. NOTE. COMMUTATION OF CONSONANTS. (1) The Dorians generally use ad for f. E. g. xo^w'odw for xw^u^w. This takes place in the middle of a word. (2) The Attics use TT for aa. E. g. TIQUTTO) for nQciaaw. (3) In some instances ^ is used for ^a. E. g. ugyyv for EUPHONIC CHANGES. y. When a labial (n, /?, . So in Latin, nuptum for nubtum, actus for agtus, vectum for NOTE. Except x in the preposition ex. E. g. cx^^w, e j x- , not ey 8. 1. A labial (n^^cp) before ^ is always changed into ^ E.g. ai for U'tem-iai en-ai for 2. A labial (/?, for ji^-aw. So in Latin, ^ea:z for tegsi, traxi for trahsi. 1O. 1. A lingual (T, d, &, f) before ^ is often changed into a. E. g. fia-^iai for ffi-iiai ninuG-\ivu for nKda-^a " 7tld&-fia (pgovTiG-fta 2. A lingual (T, 5, &, ) is always dropped before #. E. g. ns-o(o for TUT-OW TiAa-aw for nldfr-aw CC-OW ' (fd-OW Q01>Tl-XCl. NOTE 1. The omission of a lingual before tr or x does not affect the quantity of the preceding vowel. NOTE 2. In the Epic language the r of the preposition xxrex, is changed into the following consonant. E. g. xuyyovv for xctry'ovu for xetrat ybvu t xtUXXtvov for xarXtvov for xxri^t-rov. Before two consonants the r of this preposition is dropped. E. g. for XKr ,i r au/-Af/o; lor ovv-Aeyb) tfi-^usvoj lor tv-fisvat So in Latin, colligo for conligo, commolus for conmotus, cor- ruptus for conruptus. 4. Before a or f, y is dropped. E. g. dalpo-ai for dalpov-ai, :for 5. In many instances, after y has been dropped before a, the preceding short vowel is lengthened. E and o are changed into and ov respectively ( 2. N. 3). E. g. for pikav-g "ti&ii-ai, for n&sv-ai, vyu-ai, " itjvcpoft-oi, TVHTOV-OI " TV7nov-ai. 10 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 13, 14. This lengthening almost always takes place when *>r, vti, v&> are dropped before a ( 10. 2 : 12. 4). E. g. yQaya-q for ygayavi-g Acov-crt for keorr-at, ivcp&u-g " rv(p&8)'T-g onsl-att) dtixvv-g ''' detxvvi'T-g nu-aopat NOTE 1. We must not suppose that the omission of the lingual has any thing to do with the lengthening of the vowel before 0- ( 10. 2, N. 1). NOTE 2. In some instances, v before a is changed into a. E. g. ovoaojftog for a NOTE 3. The preposition iv remains unaltered before g, o, f. E. g. iigaTnw, cVawriw, iv&vyvvpi. NOTE 4. In the following words v is not dropped before a xivaai (from Ktrtfoi), nintxvatg, ntgxxraai (from qpmYw). Also in the ending rg of the third declension ( 36. J), as &pw$. Also in the word nuhv, in composition, as 13. At the beginning of a word Q is generally doubled, when, in the formation of a word, it happens to stand between two vowels. E. g. from ntgl and yew egyevxa for t'^ffxa. 14. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, a smooth consonant (TT, x, T) happens to stand before a vowel hav- ing the rough breathing, that smooth consonant and the rough breathing form a corresponding rough consonant (g),^, #). E. g, ucp-lriit for an-ii]i y.a&-aitaig for ttcrt NOTE 1. In the words TZ&QITITIOV (ihTaQfg, tnnog), cpQovdog O, odog), &Qi[jiariov (TO IIAUTIOV), tfarsgov (TOV fic-QOv), the rough breathing affects the smooth mute, although it does not immediately come in contact with it. 2. The same change takes place when, of two successive words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the next begins with a vowel having the rough breathing. E. g. qp' ov for ULTI ov fietf rjfiwv for fiei ^MV * SUVTOV " xai saviov ov% vpwv u o NOTE 2. The Ionic dialect violates these rules. E. g. am- for wyixtG&ou, xTtu^w for xa&tvdw, ovx olog for ov% oiog. 3. If two successive syllables would each have a rough con- 15.] CONSONANTS. 11 sonant (, fyvfryv, not a7i&&r)r, Except eTd&yv from i/th^*, and hv^v from &vco. NOTE 4. The termination &i of the imperative active ( 88. 1) is changed into n, if the preceding syllable has a rough consonant. E. g. rvcptfyw for ivqptf-ifvh, ild-m for rl&s&i. Except the imperatives yd&i from cpr^l, and ti&va&i from NOTE 5. In the verb *EXSl, of which the future is I'lw, the rough breathing is changed into the smooth breathing, ^w, on account of ^ in the following syllable. 4. A rough consonant ( 1 . All datives plural in i, and all fo"rc? persons in i and , are written both with and without a final v. They are generally written with it when the next word begins with a vowel. E. g. &i]Qa\v nygloig aiiTOvg rvnTovai rovrovg isya taieySs fiiyce. 2. Also, all adverbs of place in GI ( 121. 1). E. g. Also, the particles vv and xs, the adverbs negvat, and voayi,, and the numeral el'xoai. NOTE. In some Grammars, v movable is written parentheti- cally. E. g. &r t Q(jl (v}. 3. The words OVTx before a vowel. E. g. ov (pqai, ovx tins, ov% tinsxo (^ 14. 2). 12 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 16. SYLLABLES. 16. 1. There are as many syllables in a Greek word as there are vowels and diphthongs in it. 2. Words of one syllable are called monosyllables ; of two, dissyllables ; and of more than two, polysyllables. 3. The last syllable except one is called the penult ; the last except two, the antepenult. E. g. in tv-anhay-xvoq, xvog is the last syllable, onlay, the penult, and #, the antepenult. NOTE 1. (1) Any single consonant may commence a Greek word. (2) The following combinations of consonants may com- mence a Greek word or a syllable : /?, /5A, 0g, /A, yv, yg, dp, 8v, dg, #A, xh>, &Q, xA, %[A, y.v, XQ, XT, fiv, ?rA, nv, TIQ, m, ofi, cr#, ax, ax 1) ofi, on, onl, , ox, ih> ?p> fQ, q>& f 9^ X*> XQ- (3) The following combinations also may commence a syl- lable : yd, yp, & t u, TV, (pv, %[i. (4) Further, any three consonants may begin a syllable, provided the first and the last pair may each begin a syllable. E - g- ?TT NOTE 2. Greek words are divided into syllables in the fol- lowing manner : (1) A single consonant standing between two vowels, or a combination of consonants capable of commencing a syllable 16. N. 1), is placed at the beginning of the syllable. E. g. (2) When the combination cannot commence a syllable, its first consonant belongs to the preceding syllable. E. g. !'A (3) A compound word is resolved into its component parts, if the first part ends with a consonant. E. g. na-ilv-og-oog. But if the first part ends with a vowel, the compound is divided like a simple word, even when that vowel has been cut Off ( 135. 3). E. g. na-gi-la-pov. 4. A syllable is called pure, when its vowel or diphthong is immediately preceded by the vowel of the preceding syllable. E. g. the following words end in , *, ctg, og, pure : aynl-a, O1J7U-CU, or}ni-ag t viygi-og. $ 17.] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 13 QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. ^ 17. In any Greek word, every syllable is either long or short. 1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a long vowel or diphthong. E. g. in the following words the penult is long by nature : oixog, oiv&QG)7iog, 11^77, naaot. 2. A syllable is said to be long by position, when its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by two or more consonants, or by a double consonant (T,f,T/>). E. g. in the following words the penult is long by position: IOTS, ogxog, uankcty%vog, qo^afa). 3. When a short vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid, the syllable is common. E. g. in the following words the penult is either long or short: tixvov, 4. But the syllable is almost always long, when its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by the following combina- tions : /5A, /A, yfi, yv } dp, dv. E. g. the antepenult of Zfl NOTE 1. In the Epic language the syllable is generally long when its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by a mute and a liquid. NOTE 2. In Homer and Hesiod, ax and f, at the beginning of a word, do not always affect the preceding short vowel. E. g. (II. 6, 402 : 2, 634.) 5. Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be long, must be assumed to be short. NOTE 3. The quantity of , i y v, must be learned by obser- vation. The following remarks, however, may be of some use to the learner : 2 14 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 18, 19. (1) Every circumflexed , i t v, is long by nature. ( 21.) E. g. noiv, vfuVf dgvg. (2) Every , i, v, arising from contraction is long by nature. 23.) E. g. T^MW, noteg, ^oTQvg f from rlpae, 7roA*, (3) Every cr, t/ro*Tovo$, TIITTTIU, are, according to them, uvS-^^oxrovos, ruyrru. It seems, then, that the grave accent is no accent at all. 2. A word is called oxytone, when it has the acute accent on the last syllable. E. g. Tiiaiog, tins, uyadol. Paroxytojie, when it has the acute accent on the penult. E. g. #/., psiieQla&ai,. Proparoxytone, when it has the acute on the antepenult. E. g. av&QOJTiog, tx^ioi, ncfawg. 3. A word is called perispomenon, when it has the circum- flex on the last syllable. E. g. tm&w, diansQav, nobolv. Properispomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult. E. g. TOVTOV, pziivriQ&ai, fia^ov. 4. A word is called barytone, when its last syllable has no accent at all. ( 19. N. 2.) E. g. TVTITW, tomov, nsgifQXOfiwog. 5. When the accented syllable has a diphthong, the accent is placed over the second vowel of that diphthong. E. g. ca^ara, dwvfia. Except the improper diphthongs a, r/, vg, of the third declension, permit the accent to be on the antepenult. ( 33 : 43. 3.) E. g. yw^cw, nofowg, 16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [21,22. NOTE 3. Also the Ionic termination w of the genitive sin- gular of the first declension permits the accent to stand on the antepenult. E. g. Tvdddsu. ( 31. N. 3.) 3. The penult, if accented, takes the acute when it is short by nature, or when the last syllable is long by nature. E. g. loyog, ftovayg. 4. When a word, which has the acute on the last syllable, stands before other words belonging to the same sentence, this acute becomes grave ('). E. g. Tovg novygovg xal tovg ay not jovg novrjQOvg y.u.1 jovg aya&ovg av&gwnovg. 91. 1. The CIRCUMFLEX can be placed only on a syl- ble lable long by nature. E. g. i^g npyg, 2. A penult long by nature, if accented, takes the circum- flex only when the vowel of the last syllable is short by nature. E. g. iiiiMov, nlvs, xonouTvS. So tivai, olxot, ( 20. N. 1.) ENCLITICS. 2xJ. 1. Enclitics are words which throw their accent back upon the last syllable of the preceding word. The fol- lowing words are enclitics : (1) The personal pronouns pov, pol, (tl, aov, ool, as, ov, ol, e, o(pw, Gcpw'i'v, (j, and the insepar- able particle ds, to. 2. If the word before the enclitic has the acute on the ante- penult, or the circumflex on the penult, the enclitic throws back an acute on the last syllable of that word. E. g. aV#0w- nog rig, for av&Qwnog rig ' del%6v poi, for deifrv pol. . 3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the last syllable, the accent of the enclitic disappears. In this case the acute does not become grave ( 20. 4). E. g. /w t, for ^w (pijfi / * noMoig iiai, for noMoi$ iial* 23.] CONTRACTION. 17 Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent also when the pre- ceding word has the acute on the penult. E. g. toi/rou ys. 4. An enclitic of two syllables retains its accent, (1) When the preceding word has the acute on the penult. E. g. ardgsg tivsg. (2) When the syllable upon which its accent would have been thrown back has been elided ( 25). E. g. Tio'U' cW, for Tro/ia' am. NOTE 1. Enclitics, which stand at the beginning of a sen- tence, retain their accent. E. g. a o v yccg xgdiog am REMARK. The abovementioned personal pronouns retain their accent, when they depend upon a preposition. E. g. snl aol, not inl ooi. Except ^g in the formula ngog ps* NOTE 2. When several enclitics succeed each other, the preceding takes the accent of the following. E. g. ovdsnois am ocpioiv, for ovSsnors tail acplaiv. NOTE 3. Frequently the indefinite pronouns and the par- ticles are not separated by a space from the attracting word. E. g. OVTS, fi^Tig, oarig, oioTiaiVj ware. CONTRACTION. ) 23. A pure syllable (^ 16. 4) and the one immediately preceding it are often united into one long syllable. This is called contraction. It takes places generally as follows : are contracted into a, as into , as ^QVGSCX xgvaci, vyila ftvoiot \JLVU. v/ici. aa a, as [Avaa fiva. fa 77, as xgvasot %gvaij. nai at, as ^.vaoa (JLVdeig. ai a, as ai'ooM aaaw. sy 77, as cpdst]TS y ao M, as Ttfuxoptt ri^wfisv. sy ij, as (pd aoi w, as Ttpatotfisv Tipwjisy. si si, as noJi aov w, as ri^tdovai iip&ji. so ov, as ydsoftsv 0) - CO, aS TlflOKO TIH&. SOL - Ot, aS q)lheOl(*SV i sa 7], as yea yq. Sometimes sov ov, as cpiUovai ydovai. 2* 18 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 24. as (pdsw (f Jw. times into ^, as din^oy 6V as ii^Baaa Tipyatjot- Tivli}. as Ti^sis Ti t uys. oy 01, as dqAoi?? c^Ao^. This as Ogyivaa Ogyaau. contraction occurs only in as ndhe$ nottg. verbs in ow. Verbs in wp as nolu noti. ( 117) contract 0/7 into w. o w or #, as ^oa ^#w, oV -^ ot, as r^oi ol. union, unla. oo ov, as dykoof oa* at, as dinloat, dinlui. oo* ot, oe ov, as dqAo'sTC ^^OVTC. oov ov, as OM ov, as ^^Aoiv drjkovv. ow w, as Verbs in ow ( 116) con- ow w, as tract the endings oet and vc -5, as l%&wg i% otig into 01 and otf, as 5^>lof^ vi - vi, as nhrj&w drilot t dr^ofig $T}koHg< wi' y, as ^w'/'wv AwW. OTJ w, as drjhorjTe o^Awrf. Some- NOTE 1. (1) The Doric dialect contracts us and vaUw uvdgsicpovTy, to be read 'EvvaMwvdQsi- (fOVTTj. ELISION. 25. When the first of two contiguous words ends with a short vowel, and the other begins with a vowel, the former often drops its final vowel, and the apostrophe (' ) is put over the vacant place. This is called elision. E. g. di* f^iov for dta ffiov in otVTw tf en I OCVTM eqp' yfuv (^ 14. 2) for int rjfuv. REMARK. The prepositions ntgl and ngo never lose their final vowel. E. g. negl uvior, nyb 'Adrjiwr. NOTE 1. The diphthong v.i is sometimes elided by the poets, but only in the passive terminations ^ut, aou, -ecu, and a&ai. E.g. /SovAo^w' fyto, for /5oi'Ao/it f/w' nalilo& 3 unaylaL^7iv t for NOTE 2. The epic poets, in some instances, reject the final vowel even when the following word begins with a consonant. E. g. av v&xvng, for ava vdxvag ' nag Zyvi, for naqa Zv\vi. NOTE 3. ACCENT. (1) In prepositions and conjunctions, if the elided vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut off with the vowel. E. g. dpy airiw, U' dni. (2) In all other words the accent is thrown back upon the preceding syllable. E. g. y^ tyw, for (f^l fyw. SYNCOPE, METATHESIS, AND APH^RESIS. 2G. 1. Syncope is an omission of a vowel from the middle of a word. E. g. naigog, for nonsgog. 2. Metathesis is an interchange of place between two con- tiguous letters in the same word. E. g. x<5/a, for 20 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 27, 28. 3. Apharesis is the taking of a letter from the beginning of a word. E. g. nov 'any, for nov NOTE. The combinations ^A, fig, VQ, arising from a syncope or from a metathesis, are changed into ^u t $l, ^fig, vdg t respec- tively. E. g. ya^Qog for yaptgog, uvdgog for PUNCTUATION. . The Greek has the following punctuation marks : Comma, Colon, Period, Interrogation, Apostrophe ( 25), Coronis ( 24), Marks of quantity ( 2), Marks of parenthesis, Mark of diaeresis, Mark of admiration, and [ ~ NOTE 1. The mark of di&resis is placed over t, or v to prevent its forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel. E. g. yrgui, au'rif, are trissyllables, but yrigdi, uvTy, are dissyl- lables. NOTE 2. The mark of admiration is not much used. PRONUNCIATION. 28. 1. It is supposed by many that the ancient pronun- ciation, that is, the pronunciation of the ancient Athenians and of the well educated in general, is in a great measure lost. The best expedient, according to some, is, to observe how the Romans expressed Greek, and the Greeks Roman names. This would be a very good expedient, if the ancient pronun- ciation of the Latin language was not as uncertain as that of the Greek. According to others, the best rule is, to observe how the ancient Greeks expressed the sounds made by particular ani- mals. This rule is, to say the least, very ridiculous, because dogs and sheep are hardly teachers of articulate sounds, and because there are as many ways of expressing the sound made 28.] PRONUNCIATION. 21 by any animal, as there are nations upon the face of the earth. The frog, for example, in ancient Greek sings /5xxx xo, xo|, in modern Greek, ^jra'x xa'xa, in English, croak croak. 2. Others maintain that the modern Greek language is the only source from which any definite notions concerning the ancient pronunciation can be derived. First, because this language is immediately derived from the ancient ; a circum- stance of no small importance. Secondly, because its pro- nunciation is remarkably uniform ; and uniformity in matters of this sort cannot be attributed to mere chance. Further, the modern Greek method is founded on tradition, while all other methods hang on conjecture. For the benefit of the curious we proceed to describe it. a and a are pronounced like a in father. After the sound / (i, rj] Uy 01, v, vi) it is pronounced like a in peculiarity, cu like e. av, tv, yv, wv, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute (l#, /, d) are pronounced like av, ev, cev, ov, respectively. In all other cases, like af, ef y eef, off. ft like v. y before the sounds E and I is pronounced nearly like y in yes, York. In all other cases it is guttural, like the German g in Tag. yy and /x like ng in strongest. y$ like nx. yx like ng-h, nearly. d like th in that, s like 6 in fellow, nearly. si like i. tv, see av. C like z. i] and rj like t. i}v, see u. & like th in thin, i like i in machine. x like lc. I like /. Before the sound /, like II in William, p like m. pn like mb, as I'pnQoa&sv pronounced embrosthen. pip (|U7ra) like mbs. v like n. Before the sound /, like n in oNion. The words iov, rrjv, ev, avv, before a word beginning with x or 5, are pronounced like TO/, T?)/, fy, av/ before x or . (See /x, /) E. g. tbv xaigov, iv |i;Aow, pronounced TO- LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 28. . Before n or y, they are pronounced TO/*, E. g. iov novrjgov, avv yvxfi, pronounced vi like nd } as IVr^og pronounced tndimos. like x or ks. like o in porter. 01 like i. ov like oo in moon. TT, , like p, r. fiaaifalg Trjg y^g, pronounced Tov^fiotaifals rftyiig* i like in e//. v like t. v* like i. V. ?? # av wy >yv y a a 77 or a JD. P. 4- If. N. a G. D. A. V. aiv aiv P. F. % M. N. G. D. A. V. cat, (OV ctig at 2. Nouns in r\ or a or d are feminine. E. g. ??, honor, fj ^ovaa, muse, f/ ooytd, wisdom. Nouns in r(s or as are masculine. E. g. 6 publican, b ra^cas, steward. S. y (honor) N. nri G. D. A. V. S. y (muse) N. povaa & uovcfng D. povarj A. uovaav V. D. (two honors) P. (honors) N. T/jU N. rifial G. TILKUV G. T/UWV D. T^CUJ/ D. T^wTff A. Ti/ud A. ttpag V. Ttjia V. Ti/^at 1>. (^o muses) P. (muses) N. f.iovon N. ^o^a^ G. uovaaiv G. povawv D. ,uou(m'f '}' 5 f-' ' ' og. \^ 4y. 1. j 1^. g. aziog, a&ot, w^iwv Except also the following nouns : alai, sTyaluv ' acpvri, cupvcav. NOTE 3. DIALECTS. (1) The following table exhibits the dialectic peculiarities of the first declension. Sing. N. Old a for yg, as ITITTOTM. G. Old o, Ionic *a>, Doric a, for ov, as 3 ATQfl3rjg, *AigsL- dao, 'ATQsldtw, 'ATgsldti. Before a vowel *w drops c, *B c QtUlaf, c EQftet& for 'Egptlst*. The Attics sometimes use the Doric genitive, es- pecially in proper names. Plur. G. Old wv, Ionic ewv, Doric av } for cov, as ^oOff, V. avxsa avxi], Plural N. ovxzoti, avxou, G. auxwy, CFI>XWJ', D. avxtcxig avxtxig t A. avxeag ovxag, V. avxiai avxcil. ay/vga, of silver, G. agyvQKag agyvgag, &C. i^g, Hermes, G/Jfyfiiov 'ityfwv, D. e unhrj, simple, G. 7rAo^? ?rA^, &c. NOTE 1. The vowels t are contracted into 17. But when they are preceded by a vowel or by ^, they are contracted into a. In the accusative plural they are always contracted into & NOTE 2. The contracted forms of fiogsag generally double the Q. Thus, pogcug SECOND DECLENSION. 33. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the second declension. S. M. Sf F. Neut. N. og (ag ov wv G. OV ft) OV ft) D. &) w A. OV ft)V OV 0)V V. s wg ov 6)V D. All genders. N. CO G. OLV OJV D. oiv wv A. ft) V. w P. M. $ F. Neut. N. 01 w a w G. cay ft)i/ D. oig wg oig tag A. ovg ft)? a CD V. ot w w 2. Nouns in o? or as are masculine or feminine. E. g. 6 Ao'/os, word, TJ vrjoos, island, 6 vsas, temple. Nouns in ov or ov are neuter. E. g. TO avxov, fig, TO dvayeav, hall. INFLECTION OF WORDS. [33. 8. o (word) D. (two words) P. (words) N. loyog N. loyw N. loyoi G. Ad/ov G. loyow G. loywv D. Ad/w D. loyoiv D. loyoig A. loyov A. loyw A. loyovg V. Ao'/fi V. tiy* V. boy 01 8. TO (fig) D. (two figs) P. (figs) N. ovxov N. ovxto N. ovxa G. avxov G. OVXOLV G. avxwv D. OVXM D. avxoiv D. avxoig A. avxov A. OVXCt) A. avxa V. avxov V. avxto V. avxa 8. o (temple) D. (two temples) P. (temples) N. Vftog N. Vttt N. VSM G. vsw G vtwv G. vewv D. VIM D. vtwv D. vsMg A. VIWV A. vsw A. Vto)g V. vwg V. rtflf V. vtw 8. TO (hall) D. (two halls) P. (halls) N. arwytwv N. 3 t otvtoytw N. ccrwysw G. etvtfytu G. avwyswv G. avuyswv D. i-6>/

f A&wg, ace. *l4#w for NOTE 2. QUANTITY. A of the neuter plural is always short. NOTE 3. ACCENT. (1) The accent remains on the same syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it : if not, it is removed to the next syllable. ( 20. 1,2,3.) E. g. av&gunog, UV&QWTIOV, ar&QViroi ' av&ftiny, av&gwnwv. (2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num- bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent on the last syllable. E. g. &eog, &sov, 34.] SECOND DECLENSION. 29 Except the genitive singular of nouns in wg. E. g. gen. ygcJ. REMARK 2. For the accent of proparoxy tones in us, v, see above ( 20. N.2). NOTE 4. DIALECTS. The following table exhibits the dia- lectic peculiarities of the second declension. Sing. G. Old oio, Doric w, for ov, as Ao^oc, Xo/oto, Aa Nouns in wg have wo instead of oto, as " Dual.G. D. Epic ouv for on/, as tWos, 'innouv. Plur. D. Old ottft for ot, as &Qiyxog, -frQiyxoiai. A. Doric o>? or o$ for oi', as Avxo?, Auxw^, ". fy Plur. G. D. Epic oqpt or oytv for ov, w, wv, o^, as 34* Nouns in o?, oo?, eov, oov, are contracted. (23.) Kg. & 6 (mind) D. (two minds) P. (minds) N. voog vovg N. vo-w-y D. root J'O^ D. VOOiV voiv D. vooig yo^ A. voov A. v6(o Vto A. voovg yovi, V. voe vov V. vou vu V. root vol & TO (bone) D. (two bones) P. (bones) N. OCfT&OV OOTOVP N. 00"T0 j OtfTW N. > , 3 M OOTSOt 00~TOt G. OVTSOV OJTOV G. J 3 w OdTfOtV OGTOlV G. oaif'cuv officSy D. OtfTEftl OUT to D. OUT SOW 0(JTOiV D. ouidoig ooTolg A. o CFTC OP OOIOVV A. C(JTS(0 OVTCO A. oaisa oara V. V. o oaiw V. oaida oara NOTE 1. The vowels ta in the neuter plural are always con- tracted into u. NOTE 2. (1) The contracted nominative, accusative, and vocative, dual, take the acute ACCENT, contrary to the rule ( 23. N. 3). (2) The contracted genitive and dative of polysyllabic com- pounds in oo?, oor, are accented contrary to the rule (ibid.). E. g. (xvilnroog anlxrovg, G. avxinvoov avrlnvov. (3) Some of the contracted forms of adjectives in tog take the circumflex on the last syllable, contrary to the rule (ibid.). 3* INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$85. THIRD DECLENSION. 35. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of the third declension. F. Neut. S. All genders. D. All genders. P. ^f. N. 9 N. N. G. og G. otv G. D. J D. oiv D. A. , v A. 6 A. V. g V. * V. a cov (,) a 2. In the third declension the gender must be determined by observation. & o (crow) N. xo?a G. xoguxxo; D. A. V. N. G. D. A. V. 8. o (giant) Ni - yiyotg G. ylyotVToq D. A. V. N. G. D. A. V. yiyaviot ylyav 6 (weevil) Xi/ x/v D. N. G. D. A. V. D. N. G. D. A. V. two crows) XOQtXXS XOQUXOIV two hopes) iknlboiv e In Id o iv P. (croics) N. G. D. A. V. P. N. G. D. A. V. clntdag ylyavrsg Z). (/wo giants) P. (giants) N. G. D. yiyaai(y) A. V. N. yiyavi* G. yiydnoiv D. yr/iivcoiv A. ylyavTS V. ylyctvis D. (two weevils) N. X/8 G. xtoTv D. xioTv A. X/8 V. ff/8 P. (weevils) N. X/fff G. D. A. V. xtwv xfor/(i>) 35.] THIRD DECLENSION. 31 8. o (age) D. (two ages) P. (ages) N. alan' N. ctiwvs N. aiwvsg G. otiwvog G. alwvotv G. alwrwv D. atotn D. atiwvow D. otlwai(v) A. ctiwva A. cclwvs A. alwvag V. aiwv V. alwvs V. altaveg S. o (god) D. (two gods) P. (gods) N. diXlflMV N. 8(XlflOVS N. dalfiovsg G. dixlpovog G. dixipovoiv G. daipovwv D. dat\uovt D. d(xifAOVoiv D. dttl[ioai(v) A. dixlpova A. dixi'^iovs A. dotlpovug V. dvilftov V. dutpovt V. dalpovtg S. o (lion) D. (two lions) P. (lions) N. Mwv N. Moris N. Moviig G. Movrog G. Moviow G. Moviwv D. Movii, D. MOVIOLV D. Movoi(v) A. Mona A. Movis A. Movictg V. Mov V. Movie V. Movisg 8. 10 (thing) D. (two things) P. (things) N. ngutyiict N. TlQOC/flCCIS N. iiQuy^aia G. 7tQ f ??i ro^s. or fern. yg ipog, n&og, tog, mas. or fern. i toe, nog, neut. w ivog, mas. or fern. ig - iog, nog, idug, i&og, ivog, mas. or fern. If log. vg v&og. I xe>, yog, %og, XTOJ, mas. or fern. ov orog, orrog, neut. OQ ogog, neut. og . OTOC, fog, neut. ovv odog, neut. ov ovTog, oog, odog, mas. or fern. v vog, neut. vv vvog, vvwg, mas. or neut. VQ vQog, mas. or neut. vg vog, vdog, v&og, vvog, vv- Tog, mas. or fern. y TIO?, /5oc, qpo,mas. or fern, w oo?, fem. (av wrog, ovog, oviog, mas. or fem. wo MQog, ooog, generally mas. or fem. ag woe, ooc, (*nog, orog, wdog, generally mas. or fem. . Most nouns of the third declension form their NOMINA- 36.] THIIID DECLENSION. 33 TIVE SINGULAR by dropping the termination og of the genitive, and annexing g. E. g. gen. xo^wxos, ( 5. 2) " n&onog, (ibid.) " ttTildog, ( 10. 2) " ylyavTog, ( 12. 5.) So qp^> ( 8. 2), <^oV $'* (^9. 2), $ay6 s - jfcjt (ibid.), S' X<*gig ( 10. 2), xngnog* oqvig (ibid.), oQvi&og' qlg 12. 4), m)V* XT/ ( 12. 5), xT'oV rvyOelg (ibid.), TV^- " dovg (ibid.), doviog. (1) Most masculines and feminities lengthen tg into ^^, and og into . E. g. TQirigrjg, jQiygeog ' Tervyxag, rsivcpoTog* (2) Many masculines lengthen sg into evg. E. g. fiaadwg, ftaadeog. (3) All neuter substantives change fg into o^. E. g. itij *u%tog. ( 2. N. 3.) (4) Some neuters change g into ^. E. g. ar^, aiea-iog. (5) The following nouns lengthen o? into 01;^ ftovg, fioog ' novg, nodog' %ovq, %oot;. ( 2. N. 3.) (6) The following change $ into avg ' yguvg, ygaog' vavg, vaog. (7) !^7T??|, xo?, changes the radical letter s into ^ in the nominative. NOTE 1. >f Av(x$, 'mxro, and ri'|, rrxroV, are the only nouns in | that have XTOC in the genitive. Originally they had gen. Vxo, viyog. (Compare ^/mxfs, Dioscuri, and vv^iog, noctur- nal) "dig, AoV, is the only noun in A?. 3. Many form their nominative singular by dropping the termination og of the genitive, with such consonants as cannot stand at the end of a Greek word ( 5. N. 3). Masculines and feminities lengthen c and o, in the final syllable, into r\ and CD respectively. E. g. alwv gen. aiMvog " dutlpovog So xn v t Xyvo?' At^u^V, linivog' 3iv t living' OMTJQ, oo? ' $ v t Swiog ' TiAwxofrTog nhuwovviog* REMARK 2. Proper names in wy are generally contracted. E. g. Iloaeiduwv Iloattdur. NOTE 5. The QUANTITY of the last syllable of the nomina- tive, and of the penult of the genitive, must be learned by observation. Nevertheless we remark here, that (1) Monosyllabic nominatives are long. E. g. nav, gig, d()v$. Except the pronouns T/S, tl, ilg^ T, (2) The vowels , i, v, in the penult of the genitive are short, when this case ends in og pure. E. g. yr^ag^ uog ' nofag, tog ' duxov, vog. Except yqavg, dog ' vavg, dog. (3) The penult of the genitive of substantives is long, when this case terminates in avog, wog, vvog. E. g. T*TV, avog ' JTaAa- (Aig, Ivog ' &6f)xvg, vvog* 3T. 1. The ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR of masculine and feminine nouns is formed by dropping og of the genitive, and annexing . E. g. xo, xoQCtxog ace. XOQOMM. 2. Nouns in ig, vg, rc, ovg> of which the genitive is in og pure (^ 16. 4), form their accusative by dropping g of the nominative and annexing v. E. g. 7io>Uc, Tiohng ace. vg, i%dvog " 38.] THIRD DECLENSION. 35 If the genitive is not in og pure, they can have v in the accusative only when the last syllable of the nominative is not accented. E. g. oQvig, oQrl&og ace. oqvi&ct or bgviv xogvg, xoQV&og " xoyv&a or xogvv. NOTE I. In the Epic language, the following nouns often have in the accusative singular, contrary to the preceding rule : (iovg, fiou * tvyvg, EVQSU ' ix&vg, tx&va ' vavg, vea. REMARK. The accusative singular of the obsolete JI2 is always 4lu. NOTE 2. These three nouns, *AJi6tttav 9 Iloaeidwv, xvxewV, have ace. 'AnoMcova and l^Tio'AAw, Jloastdwva and Hoaeidw, xu- and . 1. In many instances the VOCATIVE SINGULAR of masculine and feminine nouns is like the nominative singular. 2. Nouns in ?, 1^, wv, oj^, and some others, form their vocative singular by dropping og of the genitive, with such consonants as cannot stand at the end of a Greek word (5.N.3). E.g. ylytxg, ylyavxog voc. ylyav Vr dixlporog tf 3. Nouns in ig, vg, tvg, avg, and ovg gen. oog, and the com- pounds of novg, drop the g of the nominative. The ending v is always circumflexed. E. g. llnlg voc. f fotadtvg 4. Nous in ijg gen. to?, shorten ^g into eg. E. g. ^ voc. 2 5. Feminines in w, wg, gen. oo?, have ol in the vocative singular. E. g. i^w, ijjfoo?, voc. ^ol. NOTE 1. A few proper names in ag gen. aviog, have a in the vocative singular. E. g. sJaodupotg, avTog, voc. NOTE 2. The following nouns shorten the final syllable in the vocative singular: ^TroAAwy, "Anottov J7oai(5wy, 36 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 39, 40. NOTE 3. (1) The following nouns throw the ACCENT back on the penult in the vocative : avyg, aveg ' Swfig, dutg (2) Polysyllabic vocatives, which end in a short syllable, often throw the accent back on the antepenult. E. g. NOTE 4. *Ava$ t king, when employed to invoke a god has voc. V. Elsewhere its vocative is like the nominative. 30. 1. The DATIVE PLURAL is formed by dropping o$ of the genitive singular, and annexing at. E. g. xo, xogaxog dat. plur. x6ga$i, ( 5. 2) &ni$, ftnidos " ilnlai ( 10. 2) ylyag, ylyaviog ylyviai ( 12. 5). 2. Nouns in tvg, avg, and ovq gen. oog, form their dative plural by dropping g of the nominative singular, and annexing a*. E. g. ($aai)itvg, fiaadtvai' povg, (loval* NOTE. The omission of v before ft ( 12. 4) in this case does not lengthen the preceding short vowel. E. g. SYNCOPATED NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 4O. 1. The following nouns in ^ generally drop the c in the genitive and dative singular. In the dative plural they change the s into , and place it after the Q. (^ 26. 2 : 2. N. 3.) raarijQ, ^, belly, G. ynoTtQog yaoiQog, D. yaaxigt, yuaigi, D. Plur. yaargrxai and yaaiijgai. drjurjiiiQ, r), Oeres y G. dyiJirjTSQog 4r) t urjTQog t D. ^Jrjfji^TfQt 4qpr)TQi. This noun is syncopated also in the accusative singular, dyprjifQct drmrfigot. Ovydrrjo, ^, daughter, G. dvyprsgog &vymg6g y D. -frvyaregi &vyatgl, D. Plur. dvyargdai. M^rrjg, r), mother, G. wcegog prjTgog, D. [tyTegi [irjTgl, D. Plur. iQ, o, father, G. nctTsgog natgog 9 D. nonigi nongl, D. Plur. 2. l^'p, o, mw, is syncopated in all the cases except the nominative and vocative singular, and dative plural : 41, 42.] THIRD DECLENSION. ardgog, D. arl^i avdgl, A. ars^a V^^, V. arty, I)ualN. A. V. avigs uVd^e, G. D. avigoiv urdgotv, Plur. N. uviqtg avdQt$ t G. avd/ppv avdoaw. D. avdgaoi, A. ttvdgctg, V. ayc'^g ardgtg. For the insertion of 5, see above ( 26. N/). 3. APIIN) o, lamb, and xt;wy, o ^, (7o^, are declined as fol- lows . APIIN, G. ^>'oc, D. >>*, A. tt^va, Z>z// N. A. liyrs, G. D. vtQvoiv, Plur. N. oQVtg, G. agvwv, L). ccQvdai, A. ugvaq. Kiwi', G. xtW?, D. xf*'/, A. xi/va, V. xvov, Dual N. A. V. xtW, G. D. xv>'oly, Plur. N. xvvfg, G. xvywy, D. xua/, A. a?, V. NOTE 1. The poets in some instances drop the t also in the accusative singular, and in the nominative and genitive plural. E. g. NOTE 2. *AairiQ, sgog, o, 5#r, imitates TTT?^ only in the dative plural, aa NOTE 3. (1) The ACCENT of the full forms of av^g f APHN, yauTTiQ, /JrjiUrjTrjg, xvwr, ntt&jfc f is regular ( 35. N. 2). For the accent of the vocative of avyo and nairjo, see above (38. N. 3). The accent of the full forms of -fry/diiio and pjr?^ is ir- regular in the cases which end in a short syllable. (2) In the syncopated genitive and dative the accent is placed on the last syllable. Except CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 41. 1. Many nouns of the third declension, of which the genitive ends in og pure ( 16. 4), are contracted. 2. The contracted accusative plural is always like the con- tracted nominative plural. 49. Nouns in r t g, s$, og, gen. tog, nouns in Kg gen. ctog, and nouns in w, we, gen. ooc, are contracted in those cases, in which the termination ( 35. 1) begins with a vowel. E. g. 4 38 rgiigsct 8. le'*;, Hercules, has voc. also "ifguxleg. NOTE 2. The ending , when preceded by a vowel, is generally contracted into . E. g. vyirjg, vyisa vyia" xhsog, NOTE 3. Kegag and zs^rcc, gen. otTog, often drop the i and are contracted like yegag. E. g. xtgag, xtgotTog xsQaog xW. Kgiag, in the later Greek, has aiog in the genitive. NOTE 4. The dual and plural of nouns in w, to?, follow the analogy of the second declension. The uncontracted forms of these nouns are not used. NOTE 5. The Epic language often contracts hog inio yog or tlog, dsl into %'i or eli, and dsa into ya or !. E. g. ^E -xAfi'so? -xX^o?, - xAfc'f i' -xA?jt, -xAo -xA^o* ' OJitog, GTidfog onset Gni\i or NOTE 6. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of nouns in co, co, ends in ovv. E. g. NOTE 7. The ACCENT of the contracted accusative singu- lar of nouns in w is contrary to the rule ( 23. N. 3). 43. 1. Nouns in ig, vg, gen. ioc, vo?, are contracted in the dative singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative, plural. E. g. S. 6 (serpent) S. o (fish) N. oyig N. fa&vg G. ocptog G.. l%&vog D. oqpu oqpr D. i%\}m l%&vl A. oqcty A. i%&vv V. fyt V. j^^iJ X). (two serpents) D. (two fishes) N.A.V. $q>is N.A.V. ^^s G. D. ocpiotv G. D. IX&VQIV P. (serpents) P. (fishes') N. oqptc? o(jpi$ N. G. o, Plur. N. ^ O 'e /Sove, G. /SowV, D. /SoiW, A. fiovg, V. vs, G. yg&og, D. ^' A. yaavv, V. p/^wv, Dual N. A. V. , G. D. ygaolv, Plur. N. ygass yotvg t G. ygawv, D. , A. ygaag ygavg, V. ^? ^wi5?. is regularly declined like ^^{5^. The Attics decline it as follows : G. yew's, D. r?/, A. vw, V. rav, Plur. N. yijf^ G. vt&v, D. ravaiT'A. vaug, V. y^f^. The lonians change into 77, as y^{l ? . They have also G. veog, A. vya and yf'a, Dual D. ysoty, P/z/r. N. ygf^, A. vsccg. o'ig oig, G. 6'i'o? oiog, D. 6'iV ol/, A. o'iv oiv, Plur. N. oi'fj olfg oig, D. osfft, A. o'iag oiag o'ig. 3. Most nouns in ig, i, vg> v, change i and v into , in all the cases, except the nominative, accusative, and vocative, singu- lar. Substantives in ig and vg generally change og into tog. E.g. S. rj (state) S. jo (mustard) N. nohg N. Givt]ni G. Tiofawg G. airrjnsog D. TioAsi' TioAst D. aivTjTis'l aivrjnst A. TToAty A. GLVl]ni V. 710 At V. QLVY\Tll D. (tioo states) D. N.A.V. 7roA N.A.V. G. D. noUoiV G. D. P. (states) P. N. TTo'taes nohig N. atvrinm G. TroAswy G. Givr\niwv D. 7ioAea(y) D. A. TrcUetfs TioAef? A. V. TroAees TioAets V. vivynsot 44.] THIIID DECLENSION. 41 8. o (cubit) S. TO (city) N. nnxvg N. G. nfoug G. D. nrixtl Ti'W* 1 ' ^ (tarsi A. nfjxw A. aoTV V. nfav V. Z>. (two cubits) D. (two cities) N.A.V. 7k N.A.V. &w G. D. nrixioiv G. D. aaieoiv P. (cubits) P. (cities) N' ' TVT ntgttf nrix^i? J-N- G. 7Ik*OIV G. D. 7ir>x^Oi(v) D. V. nrjx Sl s ^nx^ l( 9 V. NOTE 1. In some instances the genitive of nouns in vg and v is contracted. E. g. TIT^VS, nv\%itov HT^MV ' ypiav, Such contractions belong to the later Greek. NOTE 2. The genitive singular of neuters in / and v very seldom ends in us. NOTE 3. According to the old grammarians, the Attic genitive and dative, dual, of nouns in t$ and v; end in &v. E. g. D. finviUl fao dg* D. (Jaailevot A. fiavilia A. (JtxviJieag v. ; fiaaikBV V. ftaadses D. , (two kings) N. A.V. /5(Ji>LS6 G. D. QotGikioii i 42 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 45, 46, NOTE 1. The genitive and accusative, singular, are some* times contracted. E. g. IleiQouevg, neigoutwg IluQui&g' ovy- yaoicptvg, ovyy^acpdct ovyygctcpr). NOTE 2. The vowels so, are contracted into a, when they are preceded by a vowel. E. g. %oEvg, #o'a %oa. NOTE 3. The ending esg of the nominative plural is some- times contracted into rjg. E. g. Innsvg, Imtseg Innr^g. NOTE 4. The lonians very often change e into 77, except when it is in the diphthong v. E. g. fitwdsvg, fiotadriog. INDECLINABLE NOUNS. 45. Indeclinable nouns are those which have only one form for all the genders, numbers, and cases. Such are, 1. The names of the letters of the alphabet. E. g. TO, TOV, T%, woman. The rest is avogdnooov, ov, TO, slave, regu- from TTNAIZ (oxytone), lar. From ANAPAUOT2, yvvawoQ, yvvtuxl, yvvcuxa, D. Plur. avdQttnodtao-i, (Epic). yvvtxi, Dual yvrdixf, yvvcti- yovv, TO, knee. The rest is xolv, Plur. ywcuxtg, yvv&i- 46.] ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 43 yvvuL^i, yvvaiy.otg, yvvai- xsg. The genitive and dative of all the numbers take the accent on the last syllable, contrary to the rule (^ 35. N. 2). dat'g, 'idog, %, fight, regular. From dA2, D. da'i'. JI2, see Zsvg. doQV, TO, spear. The rest is from 4OPA2, doQuiog, do- QQITL, Dual doQMTSf duQWlOiV, Plur. dogaict, doydiwv, do- The poets have G. dovQog, D. dogl, dovqi, Dual dovoe, Plur. N. dovotx, G. dovgwv, D. dovgeaai (Epic). dogv&og, ov, o, spear-polisher, regular. From AOPTZO2, V. doQV$e. tlxwv, ovog, ^, image, regular. From EIKfL, G. eixovg, A. eixw, A. Plur. sixovg. Zevg, 6, Jupiter, V. Zsv. From AI2, G. Jwg, D. Jtl, A. Jla. (f 37. N. 1.) Zip, o, G. Zijv6g t D. Zyvi, A. Zvjvot, = preceding. &SQ(inMv, ovrog, 6, attendant, regular. From OEPAW, A. &()tma, N. Plur. -frsQansg. I%UQ, agog, ichor, regular. Ace. Sing, also l/m. xttJiwg, M or wo?, o, cable. From KAAQ2, Plur. N. xa'Aot, A. xakovg. jtugu Ionic xaQrj, 10, head, G. XCXQTjTOg, D. XOtQrjTl, X0, N. Plur. *'^I. From XP^^ 7 , G. xgmog, D. y.Qoirl, A. TO Or TO^ XQttTCt, Plur. G. XQ(XT(OV, D. x^rxa/. From KPAA2, G. xQaenog, D. x^if, Plur. N. X^WT, A. TOU^ From KAPHA2, G. xtxgya- iog, D. xo?JaTf, Plur. , ov, o, bough, regular. From KAA2, D. xi% D. Plur. xAa'focr* (Epic). tyajro?, ov, o, partaker, reg- ular. From KOINJIN, Plur. N. xo^wyf^, A. xoi- KPAA2, KPA2, see x^. xylrov, ov, TO, /z7y, regular. From KPINO2, Plur. N. xglvioc, D. XQIVSUI. XQOMJ, rjg t y, woof, regular. From KPOS, A. x^oxa. A? contracted A$, o, s^owe, G. hxaog Ao?, D. Awed' AV, A. Ay A?>, Dual. A Aas, Plur. N. luaeg Afc, G. ladwv Idwv, D. Ao-(/t (Epic). From AAA2 ( -- ), G. Aa'ov. [uxQT.vg, o, witness, A. IIUQ-CVV, D. Plur. [iixQivai. From MAPTTP, l, /o?, 77, scourge, regular. From MA2TI2, D. ^uaair (contracted from ^W'OTH), A. . veiQov, TO, dream. The rest is from ONEIPA2, ovtiomoc, or tiger? i, Dual ovslyme, ovei- gnioiv, Plur. o ovti- , . ovg, TO, car. The rest is from the Doric we, wro'c, WT/, Dual corf, wrot^, Plur. OJT, WT Wtf/. ngiofivg, o, old man, A. TT^- aj5uv, V. ngsaftv. The rest is from TrQftTfivTrjg, ov. In Hesiod a Nom. Plur. occurs. 44 o, ambassador, G. Plur. N. A. V. , D. ngsafisai. The rest is from TTQtafevTTjg, ov. oawnov, ov, ib, face, regular. From IIP02JIIIA2, Plur. N. ngoawTictTci, D. nQOGwnct- OL. ov, ij, ?/>er, regular. From JIPOXOT2, D. Plur. (like fioval from INFLECTION OF WORDS. From r\ 2TlSy [$46- aiyl, ^ nvg, nvQog, nvgl, TO, fire. From J1TPON, Plur. N. A. nvQcc, G. TIVQOJV, D. nvQOiq. GXWQ, TO. The rest is from 2KA2, oxaiog, axaTi, &/C. arn/cov, ovog, r\, drop, regular. From 2TAZ, N. Plur. OTU- $ - ov, o, row, regular. og, w', o, peacock, regular. From TAO2, N. Plur. TWO/. i, TO, water. The rest is from *TdA2, vdaiog, vdari,, From vdog, D. Sing, vdei (Epic). 6g, ov, o, son, regular. From 'TIET2, G. vlsog, &c. like paadevg. From *TI2 come the Epic G. vlog, D. vlt, A. via, Dual, vis, Plur. N. i/I*?, D. vleai and i/twat, A. via?. pi*?], rig, i], battle , regular. From 'T2MI2, D. vafilvi. w, ovog, %> swallow, regu- lar. From XEM/IJly V. 2. Nouns, which have only one nominative, but more than one form for any of the other cases, are anomalous. Such are the following : , w or wog, %, threshing- ^v^g, ov or qrog, o, mushroom. wig, I &og, o, v\, bird, regular. ' In the Plur. also N. A. 6'^- mg or oQvzig, G. oqvioty* WTOWC, w or 0)0?, o, paternal uncle. rig, sog or ^TOC, o, moth. .iQ, %fiQog and %?g6g, ij, hand, D. Plur. always xfyal. The forms G. xegog, D. xtQh Dual fciQolv, are poetic. floor. g, a) or WTO?, o, laughter, g, tog or TO? or idog or ?y, justice. Idgwg, M or wrog, b, sweat, xktig, eidog, rj, key. Also Ace. Sing, v&tiv, A. V. Plur. liyTQwg, (o or wo?, o, maternal uncle. NOTE 1. All proper names in ^ gen. eog ( 42), have ^ or ijv in the accusative singular. E. g. 'AQHJTOcpotvqg, eog ace. ^AQiGioyuw] and T^K NOTE 2. Some nouns in ig have t<5o? or to? in the genitive. E.g. gen. ^vidog or fi^viog, resentment. ^N 47, 48.] ADJECTIVES. 45 NOTE 3. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of nouns in rjg gen. ov, often ends in c. E. g. Fvyi]g, ov, ace. for NOTE 4. A few proper names in ^g, ovg f and vg, are de- clined according to the following examples : 'lavvrig, G. *Icx.vvr\, D. 'lawy, A. ^Juvvriv, V. *lavvr\. ttovg, G. Jftoi}, D. J'Aov/A. rftow, V. VVg, G. dlQVVy D. /llOVV, A. dlOVVV, V. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 4T. Defective nouns are those of which only some of the cases are in use. Such are the following : fryalou, ajv, oi, Etesian winds. 'OAi^wTna, wi/, T, Olympic No singular. games. No singular. ^w, an A. Plur. used only in 6V^, TO, dream, used only in the formula, ^ (pegeiv, to the N. and A. Sing. show favor. O2 or O^S'OIV, TO, eye, Dual "la&[iiUy wv, TOC, Isthmian games. N. A. oaae, Plur. G. oaacw, No singular. D. oWotc, old oVaotat. A%, o, 7io/, A. Aly. oydog, TO, advantage, used 6, Jfoe //new, D. Ati/, A. only in the N. Sing. T. jQTvvha, o)?', T, Pythian games. ri, yg, ^, armpit, used only No singular. in the phrase ^TTO [tdHijg, TV, used only in the formula under the arm, clandestinely. w TV, O Mow. Ntpsa, wv, T, Nemean games. VTKXQ, TO, waking, as opposed No singular. to 6Vo, used only in the NIV, ri, snow, only A. y/qpa. N. and A. Sing. ADJECTIVES. 1. In adjectives of three endings, the feminine is always of the first declension ; the mas- culine and the neuter are either of the second or of the third. 2. Adjectives of two endings are either of the second or of the third declension ; the feminine is the same with the masculine. 46 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 49. 3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first or of the third declension. Such adjectives are either masculine, feminine, or common. ADJECTIVES IN 02. 4O. 1. Most adjectives in og have three endings, og, y, ov. E. g. Gocpog, oocpy, aocpov. When og is preceded by a vowel or by ^, the feminine has a instead of 77. E. g. a&og, |/, a$tov' tiaxyog., S. (wise) y (wise) TO (wise) N. Gocpog 00( py GOCfOV G. D. A. V. OOCpOV oocpov oocpd oocpy GOCf>1]V GOCpOV D. N.A.V G. D. . oocpw GOCpolv aocpd Gocpaiv GOCpCO P. N. G. D. A. V. GOCpol aocpwv oocpolg ooyovg GOCpol Gocpal Gocpoug Gocpdg Gocpa oocpwv oocpolg aocpd oocpd So all PARTICIPLES in og. E. g. ivmopwog, S. o (worthy) r\ (worthy) TO (worthy) N. &OC| '&' at-iov G. a$lov |t? a$lov D. to? a&a |/0) A. a$LOV a&av uiov V. fee |/ feoy D. N.A.V. tow |t |tw G.D. fooiv a$laiv a$loiv 49.] ADJECTIVES. P. N. w'lftot aiat G. a/oiv a$lwv a^laiv D. allots a$laig aloig A 3 t- r 3 i? ' " *'f? VVf. >'. >'{. . (Jt^LOL CH^lCtl* Ct^lM NOTE 1. Adjectives in oog have 77 in the feminine. Except when oo? is preceded by . E. g. 2. Many adjectives in og have only two endings, og, ov. E. g. rjavxog, riav%ov. Particularly, compound adjectives in og have two endings. But compound adjectives in xog have three endings. S. o, ri (quiet) za (quiet) N. G. D. A. V. D. G.'D'. p. N. G. D. A. V. NOTE 2. In Attic writers and in the poets, many adjec- tives in og, which commonly have three endings, are found with only two. E g. o, y shvfrsQog, TO &SV&SQOV, free. NOTE 3. The ending a of the feminine is long. Except the feminine of Slog, divine, and a few others. NOTE 4. For the ACCENT of the genitive plural of the feminine of bary- tone adjectives and participles in o$, see above ( 31. N. 2), 48 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 50, 51. 3. Adjectives in sog, ta, eov, and oog, orj, oov, are contracted ($ 32 : 34). E. g. a XQvaf], xgvosov XQVGOVV, G. %gvasov jrjg, golden. g agyvgovg, agyvgiot, agyvgoi, agyVQSOv agyvgovv y G. )fov agyvgov, agyvysag otgyvgag, of silver, unroot; anhovg, ankoy 7rA?5, anhoov ankovv, G. ankoov UTI g, simple. NOTE 5. For the ACCENT of some of the contracted forms of adjectives in M;, oos, see above ( 34. N. 2). ADJECTIVES IN S12. 5O. Adjectives in wg have two endings, cog, wv. They are declined like vwg and avwyewv ($ 33). E. g. S. o, TJ (fertile) TO (fertile) G. Bvysw evysw D. ivystt evyew A. ct/yei^y svyswv V. Bvystag evysoiv D. N.A.V. i G. D. P. N. G. fi/'^w' tvyeow D. evysmg svyewg A " *' V. evyeco svyeo) ADJECTIVES IN 2^. 51. Adjectives in v, gen. so^, have three endings, v^, wa, v. E. g. y\vxvg, yhvxeia, ykvxv. S. 6 (sweet) ^ (sweet) TO (sweet) N. /Avxv? ylvxsla yhvxv G. ylvxiog ylvxelag yhvxeog D. ykvxEl ylvKti ykvxela yAWtsi y\VK*i A. ^Avxw ^Avxetw^ yhvxv V. yAvxv 52, 53.] ADJECTIVES. 49 D. N. A. V. G. G. P. N. G. D. A. V. ylvxisg ylvxelaiv ylvxelg ytoxslcu >) yhvxslaig yhvxslg yivxttag ylvxuai ykvxds ylvxioiv yjivxsa ylvxetov ylvxda yl.VY.ia. NOTE 1. The Ionics make fern. ' or or E. g. NOTE 2. The poets sometimes have mas. and fern, vg, neut. v. E. g. o, ^ ydv$, 10 ydv. ADJECTIVES IN H2 AND is. 52. 1. Adjectives in rjg, gen. sog, have two endings, ^?, sg. E. g. oJ N. G. ahrj&sog D. A. V. N.A.V. a G. D. P. N. G. D. A. V. 2. Adjectives in i$, gen. to?, have two endings, ^, *. E. g. l(5pt, G. I'J^io?, knowing. ADJECTIVES IN AS, E12, HN, OT2, T2, JIN, J12. 03. 1. Adjectives in tig, gen. COTOC, have three endings, , a, r. E. g. nag, 5 50 s. N. G. D. A. V. D. N.A.I G.D. P. N. G. D. A. V. o (all) nag navrog navtl ndvrot nag INFLECTION OF WORDS. f> (alt) naact ndarjg noiarj nuaav naaa [53. TO (all) navrog navvl nav nav naaa ndaouv nuvitq navxtav naaotig Ttdaag naaai So all PARTICIPLES in . E. g. , Tvyav, G. REMARK 1. These two adjectives "in ag y p&ag and have aiva in the feminine. Thus, fii^ag, p&aiva, [t&av, G. [i&avog, black, rdtiig, lakuwa, lukuv, G. idhavog, unfortunate 2. Adjectives in etg, gen. MO?, have three endings, < S. o (graceful) f) (graceful) 10 (graceful) N. G. A. V. D. G.D. P. N. G. D. A. V. Xotgleaact Xctgleaant Xotgttaacov %agiiaaaig Xotgisaaotg 53.] ADJECTIVES. 51 NOTE 1. The endings fag, yeaaa, fa, are contracted into f}g, ?]e7(7tt, r^v. E. g. Ti{tjjg 9 TiprjEaoa Tiftfjaaa, iifi^v T*//?Jj', G. g, valuable. The endings osig, oeaaa, oev, are contracted into ovg, ovaaa, ovv. E. g. nlccxovg, Tilaxoeaaa Tihaxovaaot, nlaxosv nhctxovv, G. nhtxxovvrog, flat. REMARK 2. The dative plural of adjectives in its forms an exception to the general rule ( J 2. 5). 3. Participles in slg have three endings, slg, slaa, iv. E. g. l$) Ti&tlaa, TL&SV. S. o (placing) fj (placing') TO (placing) N. Ti&elg Ti&tiact G. xi&tvTog D. ?i&ivii A. ti&tvTa V. ti&slg Ti&elaa D. G. D. TI&VTOIV p. N. Ti&tvTfg Ti&iiacu G. Ti&evTWV Ti&eiawv A. Ti&tvTag Ti&slaag V. ii&ivTtg Ti&siaoti 4. There are but two adjectives in rjv ' o TSQIJV, fj TSQSWOI, TO TQZV, G. TEQSvog, tender ; and o agarjv or oigQT]Vy TO MQG&V or (XQQSV, G. ugasvog or uggsvog, male. 5. Participles in ovg have three endings, ovg t ovaa, 6v. E. g. didovg, didovattj didov. S. o (giving) rj (giving) TO (giving) N. didovg didovact didov G. didovTog didovayg didovrog D. didovTi, didovarj didovit, A. didovra didovaav didov V. didovg didovaa didov 52 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$ 53. D. N.A.V.didorrs didovaa didorTS G. D. diSovtoiv didovaaw didorTOiv P. N. didorisg didovaat, 8i8orT(x G. didorTWV didovawv didorTwr D. dtoVuoX*) didovaaig didovai(r) A. didorTag didovaag didorTot V. didorTtg didovaai didorTot 6. Participles in i/$ have three endings, vg, vact, vr. E. g. duwvg, deixrvaa, dsixrvv. Ml S. o (showing) \ ij (showing) TO (showing) N. deixrvg deixrvaa dsixrvr G. deixrvrTog dsixrvatig dttxrvrrog D. dnxrvvti dsixrvarj dfixrvrTL A. dsixrvrToi dsixrvaotv dsixrvv V. dsixrvg deixrvaa dsixrvv N.A.V dtixrvrTS detxrvaa deixrvrTS ij. I). SsixrvyTotv dsixrvaaiv dsixrvvroiv P. N. daxyvyTgg deixrvaoa dsixrvrTot G. dsixrvrTWV deixrvauv deixrvrTKtv D. (5fixvi;(rt(v) dnxvvaaig SfiXVVGl(v) A. dsixrvrTag dsixrvaag deixrvrTa V. 5X^VT6? Suxrvocti deixrvrTcc 7. Adjectives in wj>, gen. OVTO?, have three endings, wr, ovact, or. E. g. exwV, xoi/o"a, exov >S^. o (zvilling) ^ (willing] TO (willing) N. XWV exovaa kxov /^* r ' exovarjg exorTog D. IxO^Tt exovay kxOVTl A. exovrot exovactv kxov V. cxwv sxovaa sxov N.A.V.xoW txovaa sxorTS G. D. ix or TO iv exovaaiv exovToiv 53.] ADJECTIVES. 53 p. N. sxovisg exovaou SXOVTOL G. SXOVTWV sxovatnv txOVTWV D. sxovat(v) exovaaig exovai(v) A. sxoviotg kxovaag kxovict V. sxovTsg kxovaai SXOVTd So all PARTICIPLES in ow. E. g. ivniwv, Tvmovact, TVTITOV, G. tvmovfos ' (pdewv, ydsovaot, , gen. ovog, have two endings, wy, ov. E.g. ^. o, ^ (rzpe) TO (ripe) N. nenwv ninov G. ninovog nenovog D. ninQVi nlnovt A. ninovu ninov V. ninov ninov D. N.A.V.TTf^ovs nenovs G. D. 7T7royo*y nsnovow P. N. nsnovtg G. TTSTToVwV D. ninooi(v) A. ninovag ninovct V. nsnovsg ninovct 9. Participles in w^ have tnree endings, w^, ma, o^. E. g. g, TSTVcpvla, TTV(pog t having struck. 54 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 54, 55. S. ^ TO N. iKTV(fcag TSjvyvla TSTvmog G. TfTVCfOTOg T8TVvlag TTV, nog' o, y ?JAt|, xoc * o, i] yfttshtySt yTog ' 6, r) iTiTidg, ccdog ' o {IWXMQ, agog ' o, ^ ,jUxo/o)?', wvog ' o, T\ {icMQavxriv, si'og ' o, r) [iwvv$, %oq ' o, ^ VOf!(tc, udog ' o, r) Ttagafikwifj, nog ' 6, 77 nnQunkfe, yog ' o nsvrjg t ^TOC ' 6 nolvwi$, xog ' o nQofifa}g, yxog ' o, r) anogdg, ddog ' o, y Add to these the compounds of dylS, ^w^|, nalg, E. g. o OQ&Q&OI& TQ'%og ' o, f\ xodklnaig, cudog' o, ^ NOTE. Some of these are also used as neuters, but only in the genitive and dative. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 5o. Compound adjectives, of which the last component part is a substantive, follow the declension of that substantive. 56.] COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 55 Such adjectives may have a neuter, when it can be formed after the same analogy. E. g. fv^agig, i, G. wog, graceful, from sv, /uQig, wog svtlmg, i, G. idog, hopeful, from ev, efalg, idog dlnovg, ovv, G. odog, two-footed, from dig, novg, nodog adaxQvg, v, G. vog, tearless, from -, ddxgv, vog v, ov, G. ovog, happy, from gi), dalpwv, ovog _ Q, OQ, G. ogog, magnanimous, from piyag, r^x NOTE 1. The compounds of nohg generally have idog in the genitive. E. g. anohg, i y G. idog, vagabond. NOTE 2. The compounds of ^TTJQ, naryf), and yqrp mind, change t\ into w. E. g. ^>, G. ogog, motherless Q f G. o^oc, fatherless v, ov, G. orog, discreet. NOTE 3. The compounds of ^'Acoc, laughter, and xsgag, horn, are either of the second or third declension. E. g. v, G. w or WTO^, fond of laughter g, wv, G, w or uiog, having three horns. ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 5G. The following list contains most of the anomalous and defective adjectives. evg and yvg, neut. iv and ?)#, ^ooc?, G. c^o?, A. evv and ^iV, neut. Plur. G. o)y, of good things. The neuter 5, contracted from ev, means, well. wg, Nom. mas. living, alive. The rest is from the regular wog, r\ y ov. ufyag, ntydlrij p.iya, great, is declined in the following manner : S. o (great) % (great) -ib (great) N. fisyag fityalr] G. jUf/Aot; fj,eyahi]g . D. (Asydkw [it/city A. fisyav fj.eydlr]V V. psyahs D. N.A.V. (AsydhM G. D. nsydiloiv peydlcuv 56 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 56. p. N. jusydhoi G. fAsydhwv D. {isydkoig A. [isydkovg V. fieyuhoi, lAsydlai, Hsyahwv [Asyu'koug fieydkag fjisydkcu Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and accusative singular, masculine and neuter, come from the obsolete MEFAAO2. The vocative singular fieydhe is very rare. nUwg,full, borrows its feminine from nliog. Thus, nhswg, In composition it has only two endings, w^, wv, ( 50.) nokvg, TioUiJ, TroAv, much, is declined as follows : S. o (much) % (much) TO (much) N. nohvg TtoM.1] nolv G. TroAAoi; 7roAA^? TroAAov D. TTOA^W A. TTO^yy P. (many (many) (many) N. TroAAo/ G. TroAAcSv D. iio\\oig A. TTOUOU? The dual is of course wanting. Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and accusative singular, masculine and neuter, come from nottog, y t 6v, which is used by the lonians. The epic poets decline nokvg like ylvxvg' thus, nohvg, nofalct, noli), G. noUog. ngnog, meek, borrows its feminine and neuter from ngavg, ngatia, ngav, G. ngaiog. aotg, o, ^, safe, neut, owv, A. awv, A. Plur. aug, neut. Plur. a, the rest from the regular owog, a, ov. The feminine a is rare. ygovdog, 77, ov, gone, used only in the Nominative, of all genders and numbers. $ 57.] DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 57 DEGREES OF COMPARISON. COMPARISON BY TEP02, TAT02. t>7. 1. Adjectives in og are compared by dropping g, and annexing -isgog for the comparative, and xonog for the superlative. If the penult of the positive be short, o is changed into w. E. g. aofpog, wise, aocpcorsgog, wiser, aocpwTaxog, wisest ctTlpog, dishonored, anuoifgog, aTtpoTonog asfivog, venerable, aspvoxegog, ospvoxaxog. NOTE 1. In general, o remains unaltered when it is pre- ceded by a mute and a liquid. ( 17. 3.) E. g. nvxvog, dense, nvxvoxegog, nvxvoxaxog. REMARK 1. In a few instances Homer changes o into u even when the penult of the positive is long. E. g. xccxo%sivos, xctxo NOTE 2. A few adjectives in og are compared according to the following examples : cplkog, cplfasgog, (isaog, GnovSoilog, oyoqxxyog, REMARK 2. Those in oog are always compared by E. g. ankosaTctTog, contracted %. Adjectives in vg, gen. eog, are compared by dropping g, and annexing xegog, taiog. E. g. o|u, sharp, oSuxsgog, o$UTaiog. 3. These two adjectives, p&ug and xdhxg, drop og of the genitive, and annex xegog, xaxog. Thus, ctvog, ctvog, 4. Adjectives in rjg gen. eog, and sig gen. eviog, shorten and eig into tg, and annex rsgog, inrog. E. g. 58 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 58. NOTE 3. "YivMf, test false, has also comparative ^evlto-rf^es. vvs, VTOS, poor, follows the analogy of adjectives in y, gen. tog ' thus, 5. Adjectives in wt>, gen. ovog, drop og of the genitive, and annex saie^og, eaTarog. E. g. ovog, vwQovi /?A, ^ua'xap, are compared as follows: , yog, aQTia g, a%ot xog, NOTE 4. Substantives denoting an employment or character are sometimes compared like adjectives. E. g. fiaadsvg, king, ftaademe^og, more kingly, puadtmuTog, most kingly uU thief, xhTiTloTaiog, very thievish. NOTE 5. The pronouns do not admit of different degrees in their significa- tion. Nevertheless the comedians, for the sake of exciting laughter, compare etvros in the following manner : KVTOS, himself, a.lrort^os t himself-er, uurdwros, himself-est, ipsissimus. COMPARISON BY IJIN, I2T02 58. 1. Some adjectives in vg drop this ending, and annex Tcov for the comparative, and icnog for the superlative. E. g. rjdvg, pleasant, ydiav, rjd 2. Comparatives in wv are declined according to the follow- ing example : S.o,r) (pleasanter) TO ( pleasant er) N. ydlttv ydtov G. rjdlovog ydlovog D. rivlovv ydlovi A. ydlovcc ^dlca ydiov D. N. A. rjdlovs fjdlovs G. D. ydiovoiv fidiovoit P. N. ydlovsg ydlovg ydlova G. ydiovwv ydiowav * D. vf8loai(v) f)dlooi(v) A. ydlovag fjdlovg ydlova ydlto 59.] DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 59 Observe, that the accusative singular masculine and feminine, and the nominative and accusative plural of all genders, drop the v, and contract the two last syllables. NOTE 1. A few adjectives in us form their comparative by dropping the last syllable of the positive and annexing ffyuv or rruv. E. g. a.t>s, deep, pKo-tfuv. NOTE 2. KgV*, pj'trrof. The epic poets have friiri^os, prfretrtg . vg (OAXT2), swift, iu%iwv commonly fidoatov, ($$ 14. 3 : 58. N. 1.) nsQTfQog, higher, vniQianog, highest, derived from the preposi- tion vn&o, above. g, later, vaTcnog, latest. , high, vifjtwv, vyiorog. g, brighter, cpadvjctTog, brightest, derived from g>cuVw. cpsQTCtTog, (p&yiaiog, see aya&og. , %tl(ji(jTog, ^s^f/wy, see xaxog. NOTE. In a few instances new comparatives and superlatives are formed from adjectives, which are already in the comparative or superlative degree. E. g. y^urtrros from ^^uros, xttgdrtgos from %iiuv. NUMERALS. CARDINAL NUMBERS. GO, 1. The numerals tig, dvo, xgug, and teaaagsg or TCT- ragtg, are declined as follows : puxg fita filav j&. o (one) <% (one) N. tig ula G. tvog D. ivl A. eva D. TW, T, TW (two) N. A. (5uo and dvm G. ^uoTv and dvsiv D. dvolv P.ol,al(three) N. Tfefc G. JQLOJV D. A. TO (owe) P. (^o) N. A. wanting G. D. dvwv dv T (three) TQIWV P.oi,al(four) N. Ti'aaaQsg G. D. A. Tiaoagctg TQIIX T (/ot/r) rtaaaga Tsaadgwv 6 rdaoagot 62 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ $ 60, REMARK. Jvo is found undeclined. 2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100, inclusive, are in- declinable {< 45. 2). 5. nivis 40. 6. IS 50. 7. iTTia 60. 6|JXOJ>T 8. oxro* 70. e^doprjxopia 9. W 80. oydorjxovra 10. #x 90. ivvivr^ovTa 11. trdtxct 100. ixaiov 12. dcudcxa 200. fadxoaioi, ai, a 13. dsxoiTQeig or iQiaxuldsxu 300. -IQIMXOGIOI, at, a 14. dexaT&aaagsg or jeoaagea- 400. TSTQCXXOVIOI, at, a xaldixct 500. nwinxoaioi, ai, at 15. dsxttnsvTKOrnsvTexaldexct 600. g^wxoaioi, t, a 16. dwus$ or exxaidsxa 700. kniotxcHJioi, at, a 17. dexasma or eTiTaxaldfxa 800. oxTxoatot, at, a 18. foxaoxrw or oxjwxw/^exa 900. twuxoaioi, a.i y a 19. dsxasv via or eweaxotldexa 1000. %lhoi, ui, a 20. rxoffi(') 2000. dtaxttioi, at, a 21. tl'xoui ei<;, or t^ xat sl'xoai 10000. HVQIOI, at, a 30. TQi&xovTa 20000. di(}(j,VQtot t at, a NOTE 1. The compounds ovdslg (ovde, tic) and tig) have nom. plur. oiidtvsg, pydsveg, insignificant persons. NOTE 2. The ACCENT of the feminine ^uta is anomalous in the genitive and dative. ( 31. N. 2.) NOTE 3. JexuTQeis, dsxaTsaanyec, and the first component part of TfaaotQeaxotldsxct, are declined like ?/ and leaoagsg respectively. NOTE 4. Thousands are formed by prefixing the numeral adverbs ( 62. 4) to ^/JUot. TWis of thousands are formed by prefixing these adverbs to [JLVQlOi. NOTE 5. Instead of any number of tens -|- 8 or 9, a circumlocution with 3a, rwv TWX D. TJj TOJ D. Tolv T(UV Tolv D. TO!? Toilg tolg A. i6v ify TO A. TW T TW A. TOl'? lag id NOTE 1. For QUANTITY, ACCENT, and DIALECTS, see above ( 81. N. 1, 2. 3 : 33. N. 2, 3, 4.) We only observe here that the Dorians have T*/, rmi, for /, /. NOTE 2. The original form of the article was TO2, from which come the oblique cases, the Doric forms rot, rai, and the adverb rug. 64.] PRONOUN. 65 PRONOUN. PERSONAL PRONOUN. 64. The personal pronouns are fyu, av, 7. The nomi- native 7 is obsolete. 8. (I) S. (thou) ^. (Ae, sAe, iV) N. eyw N. au N. 7 G. efiov, [tov G. aou G ov D. cpoi, fioi D. ool D. ol A. ffl, (.18 A. as A. l f D. (we two) Z>. (you two) 1>. (they two) N.A. vu'i, vw N.A. aqpau, aqpw N.A. aqoos G.D. vwiv, vwv G.D. aqpwiV, aqpwy GT\ .f. .JL'. ocptoiv P. (we) P. (ye, you) P. (they) N. fa* N. fyi ff N. (rqpa n. arqpfa G. ^fj.wv GC n> . vuuv G. o(fO)v D. fjfilv DC . VUlV D. a(plai(v) Ac Tjj.iag A. l^U A. aqpaff n. ag>a REMARK. The dual rw and ayn are very often written with- out the iota subscript ; thus, y NOTE 1. The particle yi is often appended to the pronouns of the first and second person for the sake of emphasis. E. g. l/w/s, / indeed, for my part ; av s, thou indeed. The accent of e/u/s is irregular ($ 22. 3 NOTE 2. DIALECTS. The dialectic peculiarities of the per- sonal pronouns are exhibited in the following table. Sing. N. Epic and Doric tyriv. G. Epic tpdo, f/mo, ^'^j/, Ionic and Doric D. Doric tyiv. Plur. N. Ionic r)i*ss$, Epic a^^q, Doric apsg (long a). G. Ionic ripsaw, Epic tjfteyur. D. Epic aft fit or appiy, poetic ^/v (short t), jjptv. A. Ionic ^ueW, Epic a^^s, Doric ^e (long ), poetic (short a). 6* 66 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ $ 65. Sing. N. Doric iv, Epic TVVIJ. G. Epic ago, duo, usdsv, icolo, Ionic and Doric aev, Doric also -ttv or ifi;?. D. Doric TtV, rttV, Ionic and Doric TO/. A. Doric re, T*V, TV (enclitic). Plur. N. Ionic vplsg, Epic i^fe, Doric i^^ (long v). G. Ionic vfitiuv, Epic vfitiwv. D. Epic tip^u or vfjip.iv, poetic fyuV (short t), {j^/ei/. A. Ionic fy/g'ac, Epic (f^jie, Doric t^ (long v), poetic ' (short ). 1 . G. Epic to, elo, 5er, esTo, Ionic and Doric tv. D. Doric IV, Epic eol. A. Epic le. Plur. N. Ionic 0qpe p e;. G. Ionic aopo)v, Epic cupelutv. D. Epic and Ionic acp/ or o-qpfr. A. Ionic aqpc, Epic and Ionic o-^s, poetic crqpaff (short a), Doric y/g (in Theocritus). The Attic poets use the accusative aqpc in all genders and numbers. NOTE 3. The accusative plv or viv, him, her, it, them, is used in all genders and numbers. The epic poets and the lonians use pV, the Attic poets and the Dorians, vlv. 1. The pronoun nvroq is declined like 0-090'? 49. 1), except that its neuter has o instead of ov. Thus, avTog, he, himself, avnf, she, herself, amo, it, itself, G. amov, 77?, ov. 2. With the article before il, amog signifies the same, 144. 3,) in which case it is often contracted with the arti- cle. E. g. javioVy tavTWj ravrfj, for TOV ctmov, iw UVTW, ti] ctVTij. When this contraction takes place, the neuter has o or ov ' thus, Tffvro or KXVIOV, for TO oruto. The contracted forms lav-ty and TVT must not be con- founded with TuvTf] and -taina from OI/TO?. NOTE. The lonians insert an e before the endings of ctviwv, aiiiolg* E. g. aviiriv for 66.] PRONOUN. REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 67 ^ GG. The reflexive pronouns are (paviov, aswuroi;, eavxov. They are compounded of the personal pronouns and aviog. They have no nominative. 8. M. (of myself) 8. F. (of myself) G. ffltXVTOV G. D. ffiavioi D. A. ffwvTov A. P. (of ourselves) P. (of ourselves) ff.iavrfj G. D. A. Tj^lMV CtVTWV T\piv ctujoig avjovg G. D. A. 8. (of thyself) G. ofocviov or oavTov D. tfVTci7 or aavrw A. asaviov or aaviov P. (of yourselves) G. t'ftalv avitav D. Vfilv avTolg A. i^uas aviovg 8. (of thyself) G. aUT?Jc or aavvrjg D. otctvcij or onvTtj A. fftCtVTTJV Or CFUT7jV P. (of yourselves) G. VUMV avrwv D. v^iv avTttig A. Vfiixg (xvictg A (of herself) G. iavrrjg or nvtr^g D. kotvrij or otvTi] A. kaVTl'iV Or VT7?V P. (of themselves) 8. (of himself) G. &X1/T0V or nt'Tov D. eixVTw or oevrqH A. cwurov or JioV JP. (q/* themselves) G. vro)j' or tttTajv G. i/ra)i D. iavrolgor avToig D. tavuxig or ctvicug A. IVTOVJ or aiiiovg A. vr^ or uvTag The contracted forms of UTOV must not be confounded with the corresponding forms of cxwr's. NOTE 1. The third person plural also is often formed by means of the personal pronoun and ovrog. E. g. aywv VTWV, for eaviwv. NOTE 2. The weuter lt/T or etvro, from Uvrv t sometimes occurs. NOTE 3. The tfwa/ ayTo7v of the reflexive pronoun tawrov is sometimes used. NOTE 4. In Homer these pronouns are often written separ- ately. E. g. ffnv avifjg, for , 68 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ < 67, 68. NOTE 5. The lonians use suv for u. E. g. euscnvTov for tpuvrov. ( 3. N. 3.) POSSESSIVE PRONOUN 67. The possessive pronouns are derived from the per- sonal pronouns. In signification they are equivalent to the genitive of the personal pronoun. rj, 6v, my, from g, n, ov, of us two, i( s, a, ov, our, " 00$, at], oor, thy, " oybriifyog, ix, ov, of you two, " vphtgog, vc, ov, your, t( og, ^/', ov, his, her, its, " OfpsTtQog, , ov, their, " NOTE 1. DIALECTS. First Person Plur. Doric apog (long ), Epic apog (long-**), for yp&TiQog. In the Attic poets apog is equivalent to the singular fyog. Second Person Sing. Ionic and Doric rsog for oog, Plur. Doric and Epic v^6g (long u), for v^hegog. Third Person Sing. Ionic and Doric eog for og, Plur. Epic and Doric ocpug for oyittgog. NOTE 2. The dual vu*ri^oe and D. iivoiv D. jiat(v) Tial(v) A. rivet il A. TLVS A. Tivag iiva, cioocc NOTE 1. DIALECTS. Sing. G. Epic TS'O, Ionic and Doric TV, for TOU, D. Ionic TS'W for TW, Plur. G. Ionic ifcwv, all enclitic. 2. The indefinite pronoun delva, such-a-one, is declined as follows : S. All genders. P. All genders. N. ditva N. Siivfg G. fon>o G. dslvwv D. fom D. A. dftva A. NOTE 2. Aristophanes (Thesm. 622) has TOU $i?y, for rou hTvog. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. TO. The demonstrative pronouns are Sfo, OUTO?, and exslyoj. ^0 ^ is simply the article with the inseparable particle ds. Thus, ode, r t de, Tode, G. loi'de, jfjads. Oviog is declined as follows : 8. M. (this) F. (this) N. (this) IN. ovrog ccVTrj 10VIO G. TOVTOV TctVTrjg 10VIOV D. TOVTOt IdVTTJ VOVTW A. toviov taviriv 10VIO D. (these two) (these two) (these two) N. A. TOL'TW javia Tovrw G. D. JQVTOIV tamouv 10VIOIV P. (these) (these) (these) N. OVTOt avion, javra G. JOVTMV 10VIWV jovrcwv D. IQVTOig totmofig TOVTOig A. Tovjovg ravjotg lavia 70 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [?1. 'xetvog, he, that, is declined like ovxog. Thus, i%sivog, y, o, G. exelvov, t}g, ov. NOTE 1. DIALECTS. D. Plur. Epic voladsaai, Tola-deal, for to1ade,'ftor\ ods. The lonians insert an before the endings of IOVTOV, TOVTW, TOVJCOV, xoviovg. E. g. TOVTSOV for TOVTOV. For ixslrog, the Ionic dialect has xslvog, the Doric, and the ^Eolic, xrjvog. NOTE 2. The letter / (long) is often appended to the de- monstrative pronouns for the sake of emphasis. E. g. omoal, avir^i, this here ; exeivoal, that there. The short vowel is dropped before /. E. g. odl, rfil, TOUT/, javil, for odei' } rjde'i', vodt'i', TOVTOI, RELATIVE PRONOUN. 71. 1. The relative pronoun og, who, which, that, is de- clined as follows: S. M. F. N. D. M. F. N. P. M. F. N. N. OG % o N. co a co N. ol ai a rv ~ ~ 7 f^ r 7 ? f^ ~ 77 \J. OV Tjg OV \J(' OiV CKiV OLV vf. C0?> (OV (OV D. co 77 co D. olv alv olv D. olg cclg olg A. ov r\v Q A. co co A. ovg ag a 2. The relative oang, whoever, who, is compounded of og and the indefinite pronoun rig, which are separately declined. Thus, S. M. F. N. N. ovTig %ug o ji G. ovuvog, orov yaTivog ojuuvog, OTOV D. MTIVI, OTW 1\1Wl MTLVl, OTCO A. OVllVOt, JJVTIVCI O It P. N. (HTiveg ouuveg ajiva, G. WVTIVWV, OTMV Wl'TLVMV WVTLVWV, OTWV D. olvTiai(v), oioiai(v) alaTiai(v olaTiai(v), OTC ^ r A. ovaTLvag aauvag oiTivot, TT The neuter o ti is often written 0,11, to prevent its being confounded with the conjunction OTI, that. 72, 73.] PRONOUN. 71 NOTE 1. DIALECTS. Sing. Epic, N. ong for Sang, G. oio, OTV, OTTCV, for OTOV, D. crew for OTW, A. oTiva, neut. out, for ovuva, o 11, respectively, Plur. Ionic, G. OTWJ> for ozwy, D. oTeoioi, fem. oTeyai. The accusative singular oWa stands also for the neuter plural aura. NOTE 2. The particle nig is often appended to Sg. E. g. oantj>, %nQ, on(), G. ovTifQ f liansg, written also separately og nsg, r\ neg, o neg. NOTE 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the com- pound relatives oang and oansg. E. g. OOTLGOVV, oansgovv, whoever, written also separately, oamg ovv, oansg ovv. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. . The reciprocal pronoun is aMyJitav, of one another. The nominative case and the singular number are of course wanting : D. M. F. N. G. D. A. P. G. D. atttjloii attrilcttg A. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 73. 1. From the obsolete nO2, what? * 01102, who, and TO2, this, and from the relative pronoun og, who, come the following corresponding pronominal adjectives : Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. noaog, how much ? nooog, of a xoaog or joooads oaog or how many ? certain or voaovTog, so onoaog, as quantity much much as 72 nolog, of what quality 1 INFLECTION OF WORDS. noiog, of a votog or roioads certain quality [$73- olog or no-rsgog, which of wanting the two ? or-ioioviog, such ondlog t as wanting ?, of what wanting wanting number ? noarouog, in how wanting wanting many days 1 yn?>U'xoe, how old? TrqMxog, of TqMxog or TI how large ? a certain xoads or n ^^i ^^ xovro?, so i certain size so large nodanog, of what wanting wanting country 1 whichever of the two onoa-iog, of what num- ber soever OTHMJTCUOg, in what- ever num- ber of days or wanting wanting rvvvog or -ivvvov- Tog, so little as old as, as large as OTiodanog, of what country soever wanting NOTE 1. TOGTOVTOC, Toiovrog, and x^A/xoi/ro? coincide with oviog in respect to the diphthongs ov and av. E. g. ioaoviog, In the neuter they have both o and ov. E. g. TOOOVTO or voaoviov. NOTE 2. The demonstrative forms often take / ( 70. N. 2). E. g. TocjouToff/, as much as you see here. Here also the short vowel is dropped before the letter /. E. g. Toaoodl for roaoaSu. NOTE 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the relative forms ( 71. N. 3). E. g. oaoaovv, how much soever. 2. The following adjectives also belong here : attodi*n6g(uX)iog),ri, ov, foreign, aficpw, both, G. D. a{i(poiv, used n> o> t/l e r - ( 33. N. 1.) only in the dual. ), a, ov both. txaaro?, ij, ov, each t every. 74.] VERB. 73 exdrsgog, a, ov, each of two. navrodctTiog (nag), y, 6v t of all trsQog, (x, ov, other, another. kinds. ypsdanog (ypelg), ?J, 6v t our v^8anog (vfielg), y, ov, your countryman. countryman. I'd tog, a, ov, proper, peculiar, his own. VERB 74. 1. The Greek verb has three VOICES; the active voice, the passive voice, and the middle voice. 2. There are five MOODS; the indicative, the subjunctive, the optative, the imperative, and the infinitive. 3. There are six TENSES, the present, the imper- fect, the perfect, the pluperfect, the future, and the aorist. The primary or leading tenses are the present, the perfect, and the future. The secondary or historical tenses are the im- perfect, the pluperfect, and the aorist. 4. The indicative is the only mood in which the imperfect and pluperfect are found. The subjunc- tive and imperative want also the future. 5. There are three PERSONS ; the first person, the second person, and the third person. 74 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [74. Present. Imperfect. Perfect 1. Perfect 2. Pluperfect 1. Pluperfect 2. Future 1. Future 2. Aorist 1. Aorist 2. Present. Imperfect. Perfect. Pluperfect. Future 1. Future 2. Future 3. Aorist 1. Aorist 2. Present. Imperfect. Perfect. Pluperfect. Future 1. Future 2. Aorist 1. Aorist 2. INDICATIVE. TVTtTO) ZTVTCTOV TSTVTtO, TVTteO ervifja ZTVTtQV TSTVflfiai TTVl]JOfiat hvnnv TVTtTOftai Synopti- ACTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. TVTtTG) TTV(pO rTV7tCD TVIJJG) TVTCG) TVTtCO MIDDLE rvjirapai 74.] cal Table. VERB. 75 VOICE. OPTATIVE. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. TVTITOlfll TVTtTS TVTtTUV TVTlTOV TTV(pOl[tl TTV(f TTV(pVO,l TTVTZOl[Jll TTVTt TBTVTtivai TTVTtds VOICE. TVIfJOV TVTt TVTtTOV VOICE. TVTZTOlftrjV TVTtTOV TVTtOV TVTtlV TVlfjai TVTIZW Tvnov TVTZ&V TVTZTO[tVOS VO$ -[yos Tvcp&fjvai TVTtyvai Tvneis TVTtTG&(U TVTtTO[AVOS TTV(p&OU TVTltf&ai TVTt0[JlVOS Tv\paa&ai 76 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ 74. ACTIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. / strike, I am striking. 8. tVTITd) D. TVTfXOfiSV P. 1VUTOU.IV TVTITSig 1V71TETOV TV7I1STS TV71T81 TV71TSTOV VVmOVai(v) Imperfect. I struck, I was striking. 8. sTvmov D. eTvmofiEv P. ervmofiEV STVTlTtTOV CTVTITSTS Perfect 1. I have struck. D. reTVcp(xfj.Ev P. Tsrvcparov Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. tixvnu, inflected like Perfect 1. Pluperfect 1. J had struck. 8. TSTVq)ElV I}. T8TV. - - P. - - TVl/JOV -ivyjtxTtaaav or -arrow Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. , inflected like the Present. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. TUKTSIV, to strike, to be striking. Perfect 1. rsTvcpsvou, to have struck. Perfect 2. -lexvnsvai, synonymous with Perfect 1 Future 1. -ivyuv, to be about to strike. Future 2. ivnitw contracted xvnelv, synonymous with Future I. Aorist 1. Tvyai, to strike. Aorist 2. -tvnuv, synonymous with Aorist 1. PARTICIPLE. Present, wmwv, ovaa, ov, striking. ( 53. 7.) Perfect 1. isxvywg, via, o'g> having struck. ( 53. 9.) Perfect 2. TSTVTTW?, via, 6g, synonymous with Perfect 1. (ibid.) Future 1. nfywy, ovaa, ov, about to strike. ( 53. 7.) Future 2. ivnwv, sovaa, iov, contracted rvnwv, ovaa, ovv. (ibid.) Aorist 1. ivy ag, aaa, av, striking, having struck. ( 53. 1.) Aorist 2. TVTiwV, ovaa, ov, synonymous with Aorist 1. ( 53. 7.) 74.] PASSIVE VOICE. 79 PASSIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. 1 am struck. S. tvmo^ai D. ivmoiiz&ov P. TVmofAS&ot or -TIT njTiita&ov rvmsafrs ivmta&ov Imperfect. I was struck. D. hvmo^&ov P. STVHTOV ETVTITSTO fTvm&a&wv ITVTITOVTO Perfect. I have been struck. D. TBTV[t[J,S&OV jP. I rhvcp&s Pluperfect. I had been struck. S. 6TSTl>r)V D. ISTV[A[IS&OV P. ixixvcp&s Future 1. I shall or will be struck. or -at Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. i) inflected like Future 1. Future 3. / shall remain struck. , inflected like Future 1. Aorist 1. I was struck. S. imcp&riv D. sxvcp&rjjitv P. Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. , inflected like Aorist 1. 80 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 74. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. I am struck, I may or can be struck. S. TV7lTG)[i(Xl D. TV71TW[18&OV P. T;V7lTW(J.S&a Perfect. I have been struck, I may have been struck. S. TSTVfifisrog (77, ov) w, ?/, r\ D. teTVfiiisvw (ex, at) wjitv, f^ror, yvov P. TSTVflflSVOl (t, ) W{lV, ^T, W(Jl(r) Aorist 1. I am struck, I may or can be struck. S. -ivy&w D. -tvy prefixing a syllable or two syllables to the verb. The temporal augment is formed by lengthening the first syllable of the verb. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 76. 1. When the verb begins with a con- sonant followed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment of the PERFECT is formed by prefixing to the verb that consonant together with an e . E. g. TTI'(jp, ysyyacpa, So xHw, T#VX" cpvo), niyvxa' %alva3 9 pcu. ( 14. 3.) This kind of syllabic augment is called reduplication. 2. When the verb begins with a double con- sonant (, |, T/J), or with two consonants the second of which is not a liquid, the augment of the PER- FECT is formed by prefixing an f. E. g. fifTfi'w perf. NOTE 1 . Some verbs beginning with a liquid take n instead of the redupli- cation. See the Anomalous Xa^^avw, A^av&;, Aeyw collect, MEIPH, TEH say. NOTE 2. Verbs beginning with ( n, yl> //?>, are variable in the augment of the perfect. E. g. /A^qpco, tykvcpu or 77-79.] AUGMENT. 85 Those beginning with -/v always prefix an e. E. g. yvwgl^w, tyvtagixa. NOTE 3. In a few instances, verbs beginning with vr take the reduplication. See the Anomalous snV-nw, Kvwffu* The verb xrciopcu, possess, has perf. pass. txrvftKi and xtKrvftxt. NOTE 4. The Epic language, in a few instances, prefixes the initial consonant together with an u. E. g. liu, $ti!itt& for liltot. 1. The augment of the PLUPERFECT is formed by prefixing an f to the reduplication of the perfect ( 76. 1.) E. g. rvmat, rtivcpa pluperf. hnvytiv. 2. But when the perfect begins with , the plu- perfect takes no additional augment. ( 76. 2.) E. g. crx7iTW, I'axaqpa pluperf. faxwqpsm NOTE 1. ^The additional augment s of the pluperfect is often omitted. E. g. TfAa^raw, s-cEjeXevT^eiv or NOTE 2. The verb 'Iffrvpt often lengthens the syllabic augment i into n in the pluperfect active. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. When the verb begins with a consonant, the augment of the IMPERFECT and AORIST is formed by prefixing an f. E. g. imperf. tivmov aor. NOTE 1. These four verbs, ^oyXa/^a;, ^va^a/, Xotvu, and /u, often take the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic. See in the catalogue of An. omalous Verbs. NOTE 2. In the Epic dialect the second aorist active and middle often takes the reduplication through all the moods and In some instances an e is prefixed to this reduplication, but only in the indicative. E. g. cpQa^w, Tiecpgadov or enecpgadov. NOTE 3. The syllabic augment of the imperfect and of the aorist is often omitted by the epic poets. E. g. (pegco, ysgov for , TQOtnofirjv for hgccTio^r. w 79. When the verb begins with p, the aug- ment is formed by prefixing an , and doubling the Kg. ), imperf. tQ^amov, perf. i'gf^aqpa, pluperf. c^><5a', iXxvw, 'Igrtca, \^u^u t i^yK^oftKi, IffTixa* See also the Anomalous NOTE 2. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment. See the Anomalous ayvy^te/, XM>Jfr/MU, av^ava;, <'&;, s/'AAiw, Ellin, t\tf6>, tvvt/fAi, EPm, ovgiea, a&ia^/axw, c^s elavvw, EslETOJL, ENEFKJl, ENEOSl, eVe/xw, Igelnto, ' ' OQVVfJtl. 2. The PLUPERFECT in this case takes no additional aug- ment. E. g. ayelgw, ayyyeQxa, uytiyegxtiv. Except axovo), axrjxoct, yxrjxoeiv ' &v>w, cA^Aa^ua^, See also the Anomalous EAETQSl. NOTE. The epic poets sometimes omit the augment of the second syllable. See the Anomalous eix.a%ftivo$, u,Xa.o ( u,oii, ei^et^iffea t a%ia>. AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition receive the augment after that preposition. E. g. , imperf. -nQoa-sygayov, perf. ngoG-yiyguytt, plu- perf. Ttgoa-tyfyQcxcpfiv, aor. nyou-r^mov , So efi-TiljiiM ( 12. 1), iv-ininroV ey-xQlvot (^ 12.2), ivl- y-xegixa ' avk-kvw (^ 12. 3), avv-slvov, avl-kskvxa' ov- 12, 4), avv-tvfioov ' x-At'w ( 15. 3 N , 88 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 83. REMARK. Prepositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel before the syllabic augment e. ( 135. 3.) E. g. U.VOX.OKTU, ayrixovrov. Except */ and vepo. E. g. vsgixovrru, vrttJiixovfrov vrgoXiyu, fgoiXfyot. (ibid.) NOTE 1. Some verbs compounded with a preposition take the augment before *^ a * P re P s iti n * Such are apQtffGwrict/, &yr/0Xto>, iftwoXoieu, Ivavrtoopeti. See also the Anomalous aftQiivvuftt, up,vi%6> t avaA/ivpu, xa&ifyftui, NOTE 2. Some take the augment either before or after the preposition. E. g. vgoSufttefAeti, iTf^oS-vfAtofAnv or vgo&vfAioftnv. See also the Anomalous NOTE 3. A few verbs take the augment before and after the preposition at the same time. Such are avogS-ou, ^IOHTKM, ^ietx,oviu t ivo%%.6et> t &a.ptu, avi%w, xa. 2. In verbs compounded with other words the augment stands first. ( 135.) E. g. j/5 f w, yasfaov, TjadpTJiCGt, derived from uaffiqg (-, (jf/5w). NOTE 4. From irtiror^oQiu, derived from ivrvorfjoqios ('tvifos, rgtQu), Ly- curgus forms perf. twvroTT(>o(f>9iKe& for \, as eivmopuv for 1st pers. Doric and poetic iita&ov for ps&ov, as iVTiio^eodov for rvmo^&ov. Plur. 1st pers. Doric and poetic ^a&a for pe&ot, as TVTiTofita&a for jvnro^t&oi. 3d pers. Ionic and Epic rca, ro, for JT/, yro. These terminations are found in the pcr- yircJ and pluperfect passive. Also in the present and imperfect of verbs in ^ i ( 117). The termination TO is found also in the imperfect of verbs in w ( 85. N. 6). 85. 1. The vowel, which stands between the termination and the root ( 83 : 84), is called the connecting vowel. It is an o in the first person of all the numbers, and in the third person plural ; in all the rest it is an s. Except that, (1) The connecting vowel of the perfect active, and first aorist active and middle, is an . But in the third person singular of the perfect and of the first aorist active^ it is an s. (2) The connecting vowel of the pluperfect active is an si. In the third person plural it is an si or e. (3) The present and future active lengthen o into o>, in the first person singular, and e into , in the second and third person singular. 2. The following table exhibits the terminations and the connecting vowels united. Pres. fy Fut. Active. P. 1st. 2d. 3d. 8. to Bi-g BI> D. O-fJltV B-TOV B-JOV P. o-uev S-TS ovai ( 12.5) Imperf. Sf %d A. Act. P. 1st. 2d. 3d. S. o-v B-g e D. O-fJSV B-10V B-iqV P. O-IUBV 8-T6 O-V Pres. 4- Fat. Pass, fy Mid. 1st. 2d. 3d. o-fiai, s-ai, rj, i t-rai o-pe&ov e-a&av s-a&ov e-afrs o-viou, Impf.Pass.fr Mid. $c 2 A.Mid. 1st. 3d. 3d. O-[ir}V 8-O, OV B-TO o-pe&ov e-a&ov s-vfryv e-a&s 85.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 91 First Aorist Active. Fir. p. 1st. 2d. 3d. 1st. s. a - (X-ftyV D. a- per CC -10V Ct-1t]V Of-^Ufrt^OI P. a-litv -T a-v a-f*e&a Perfect Active. P. 1st. 2d. 8. a #- D. Ct-[lSV U-TOV P. a-ittv a-zs Pluperfect Active. P. 1st. ' 2d. S. ft-j> t- D. Sl-fltP EL-TOV P. ll-UtV Bl-TS First Aorist Middle. tt-O, 0) a-a&ov a-ads 3d. a-Tov 3d. 3d: a-ro a-vro 5) si-tfccv, t-actv REMARK 1. For the terminations of the first and third person singular of the active, see above ( 84. N. 1, 2, 3). REMARK 2. The endings /; M, , of the second person singular of the passive and middle, are contracted into y or u, ou, &/, respectively. In Attic authors, n is more common than y. NOTE 1. In some instances the third person plural of the perfect active takes civ for art. E. g. yiyveurxa, 'iyvuxav. NOTE 2. In the Alexandrian dialect the second aorist active and middle often takes the connecting vowel a, of the first aorist. E. g. EIAH, Cfiiu. for tTfrov ' iu i y&t, tQwyxv for tQwyov ' iV(H for $87-] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINAT NOTE 2. The Epic language often uses w, //$, # ( 84. N. 6.) E. g. UNITERSITTi NOTE 3. Sometimes the Epic language uses the connecting vowels (o, c) of the indicative. E. g. t'^xw, w$ (wet, 05) t't'nv, tins, t"v> for NOTE 2. In many instances, particularly in contract verbs, the optative active takes the endings olyv, o/^g, o//?, dual olriiov, oir)Tr]v, plural on^ci', olrjrs, olrjaav. E. g. (ptvyw, nEfpevyolqv for NOTE 3. The Jirst aorist active in the optative has also the endings /, SKXC, i, dual f/aioy, eifXTrfV, plural fuxptr, tla-is, star. E. g. JVTITW, jvtfjEicc for Tuy/a^t. The second and third person 94 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 88. singular, and the third person plural, of this form, are more common than the corresponding persons of the regular form. These endings are said to belong to the ^Eolic dialect. NOTE 4. In the Epic language the third person plural of the optative passive and middle often takes the termination cno ( 84. N. 6). E. g. agao^Laij agyacxlcno for ag NOTE 5. In some instances the second person singular of the optative active takes the termination a&a ( 84. N. 6). E. g. xAcao), xkaloia&a for xhalotg. NOTE 6. The Alexandrian dialect uses, in the third person plural, oiGuvy VLIGULV, for oisv, cutr, (84. N. 4.) E. g. TI/TITW, v, -ivyjctioav, for -ivnoiev, IMPERATIVE MOOD. 88. 1. The following are the terminations of the impera- tive mood. Active. P. 2d. 3d. S. <&l TO) D. TOV TO)J> P. re Passive and Middle. 2d. 3d. (TO, O G&W O&OV O&WV o&s adwaav, o&cav NOTE 1 . The terminations $/, , perf. pas. /Si/JAw^a/, /3/3Xja* for ptfiXvff-ui. NOTE 2. The Epic and Ionic dialects form the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive by annexing rt, WTO, to the root of the verb. ( 84. N. 6.) E. g. Perf. 3d plur. t^OuQnini for tyftagnivoi tlal Plup. 3d plur. (cpdayaio for iy&aQn&oi qaav. (1) J/ is commonly changed into s before it, TO. E. g. oiXTt, otxro, for o/x^j'ra/, O/XT/I^TO. (2) The consonants TT, /5, x, /, are generally changed into their corresponding rough ones (cp, ^), before area, TO. E. g. ley &, AfAf^T, AfAf/To. (3) Z becomes 5 before ait, aro. E. g. ec^ 3. The perfect passive SUBJUNCTIVE and OPTATIVE is formed by means of the perfect passive participle and slpl. E. g. Perf. Subj. xeTVpfierog (??, 01^) o>, ?Jc, ^, ^ror, wpzv, rjrs, cuj/. Perf. Opt. rfTVfji^ierog (r t , ov] efyv, tfyg, tl'rj, Elrpov, tlqiqv, nr)- fisrj ti'rjTS, d'yaav. 4. The perfect passive SUBJUNCTIVE of verbs in oj, fw, and ow, is, in a few instances, formed by prefixing the augment of the perfect to the contracted present subjunctive ( 116). In this instance as are contracted into 77. E. g. ' Perf. Subj. xexTo^cu, ?y, Tjrat, u[At&ov, wa&ov, WVTlXl. 5. The perfect passive OPTATIVE of verbs in w, fw, and ow, is, in a few instances, formed by dropping ^t of the perfect passive indicative, and successively annexing the regular ter- minations of the optative passive ( 87. 1 ) preceded by i. E. g. Perf. Opt. x*TJ?/tiipr, 7^0, ^TO, yps&ov, fja&ov, y 98 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 91. NOTE 3. These two verbs, xroiofta.! and fjupv/itrKu, form the perfect middle optative also by prefixing the reduplication to the contracted present middle optative. Thus, *SXT^}V, uo, euro, &C., fttftMf/M9 t uo, euro, &c. MifAvrnrKu often changes u into ot, in the perfect middle optative. Thus, (ttftvoijunv, oto t otro, &c. In the Ionic and the lpic dialect these verbs change into e<, in the perfect middle optative. E. g. xtxriMfAiiv, ftspvttpfAnv, for KixryfA NOTE 4. Aw* is perhaps the only verb in u&>, which forms the perfect passive optative after the analogy of verbs in J^>JV, xtttryo. NOTE 6. In some instances the SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE drops the connect- ing vowel in the dual and plural of the indicative, and throughout the impera- tive. In this case, the SECOND PLUPERI ECT follows the analogy of the second perfect. See ivtuyw, AEIH, tyi/i*, El AH, il*,*,, EAET0H, x{*&, a-a, is syncopated ( 91. N. 6.) in the dual and plural of the indicative, throughout the imperative, and in the infinitive. In the subjunctive and optative it follows the analogy of verbs in pi ( 117). In the participle it is contracted. E. g. from BASly Perfect 2. INDIC. S. /?/?, ptfitmc, fteflixs, D. {lt(}(X{isv, SUBJ. S. /?f/5o5, /?f/?/]c, fa(lri t D. ftspups P. ftf(t(o t uev, ptfnw, fofiwut(v). OPT. S. fttfttxl^v, pffitxirjc;, ftfflftlri, D. f$sfi*tr)f*fr, ptpalijTOV, /3t/3. (tipaiov, fofidTuv, P. fif/Hart, fisfiuTwaav. INFIN. (Ispdvai. PART, foftatog, /5f/?wa (sometimes fopuvta), (ttfiao?, G. (te- fiaoios, contracted fafiwt;, Pffiuaa, pefiuig, G. ptflajjog. Pluperfect 2. S. tftfputiv, ifoflaifig, f /?/?*, />. fftip(*iiiv t i^aroVy e/?- /5i^v, .P. efiefivtiitv, e/5e'/9are, IpifiuaviV. NOTE 8. The singular of the second perfect and second pluperfect of verbs in w, cw, is not used in the indicative. 92.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 99 NOTE 9. The feminine participle of verbs in w generally ends in era, in the second perfect. Its uncontracted form is not used. NOTE 10. The ACCENT of the third person plural of the indicative (91. N. 7) is placed on the penult, contrary to the general rule (" 93. 1). AORIST PASSIVE. OS. 1 . The root of the first aorist passive is formed by annexing &e or #77 to the root of the verb. ( 83. 2.) The root of the second aorist passive is formed by annexing or ?;. (ibid.) 2. The aorist passive uses the terminations of the active voice, and, in its inflection, follows the analogy of the second aorist active (t&rjv) of T/#T^IU ( 1 17) ; except that all the reg- ular terminations of the indicative, imperative, and infinitive are preceded by 77. E. g. ivmw, Aorist 1. INDIC. S. Irv(p&viv 9 r}g, r\ t D. rjLi SUBJ. S. rvip&sm, //c, eij 9 D. iwfitv, trjTov, C7?TOJ>, P. e' srjTS, swat, contracted zuiu. ( 117. N. 17.) NOTE 3. The Epic language often takes fttvat or ptv for v/, in theirifinilive. E. g. Tu, in the second person singular of the second aorist' active hnperathe, take the acute on the last syllable. In composition, however, they follow the general rule ( 93. 1). See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 5. The second person singular of the second aorist middle imperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable. E. g. TV71TW, JVTIOV. 6. In compound verbs the accent cannot go farther back than the augment. E. g. Ti^oa^w, nQoaii/ov not H NOTE 3. In verbs compounded with a preposition, the ac- cent is placed on that preposition when the augment is omitted. ( 78. N. 3.) E. g. ffjupalvw, tfjqxxirov for eviipttirov. NOTE 4. When the augment, upon which the accent would have been placed ( 93. 1), is omitted ( 78. N. 3), the accent is placed on the penult. E. g. TT/TITW, TILTHS for BTHHTE. 94, 95.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 101 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. PRESENT ACTIVE. 94. 1. The present active indicative is the source from which all the other tenses are derived. 2. Verbs are divided into pure verbs, mute verbs, and liquid verbs, according as the letter before w is a vowel, a mute (ji, P, 9 ' *> /> X ' T, d, #, also ), or a liquid (A, ^/, v, Q). E. g. tifiata, , rsixkM, $iw, nxvw, anoiM, larva, Tfta'a;, TQSW, %w.luw. See also the Anomalous ciya- fiou, aXeo^ifxi, cifiq>uvvvfit t (XQ'(jxo), dctlw divide, dupdrt, dotTsouvu, donticii, fktxvrw, tvvvfii, tytxu, ea&iM, fi?/Wf, Uwaxo^uwt, xAaw break, ^nlo^ai, [is&vco, votlo), our v pi, ONJIMI, not- NOTE 2. The quantity of the penult of some pure verbs is variable. See the Anomalous m, algsw, x^/^o;, /?M/J>W, dsot) bind, dldwpi, dvinxfuu, dvM, SQVM, t f ^/cjxw, t'o^o), xogsrrvui, xptpavvvfjit, Aua>, u'x^o^ini * CpT][ll, (f&lXVM. NOTE 3. X^&> changes a. into >j, contrary to the rule. E. g. %n*6> t ucn. 'Axpououoci does not change a, into n t as aucpoctfouou. 9* 102 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 96. NOTE 4. T&vftt lengthens t into a in the perfect active and passive. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Veibs. OO. The present in actual use is not always the foundation upon which the other parts of the verb rest. Many verbs have, or are supposed to have, more than one present. In order there- fore to be able to ascertain the original or simple present, the learner must become acquainted with the methods by which new presents may be derived from a given present. These methods are exhibited in the following paragraphs. 1. Some verbs beginning with a consonant, followed by a yowel or a liquid, prefix that consonant together with i. E. g. didoM from JO ft Tti^ttw " TPAfL. A few verbs beginning with or, o#, TTT, prefix 1. E. g. fcriwoj from 2'TAfl. Also the verb ViJ2, thus, Uta. NOTE 1. A few take the Attic reduplication, but without .the augment of the second syllable ( 80. 1.) E. g. AFAFJl from tiyu. NOTE 2. The Attic reduplication of fobtifu from ON AH, and the prefix of a.u from //a&>, are anomalous. 2. Many verbs, of which the root ends in a labial (n, /?, 9), drop w and annex TOI. E. g. ivnrro from TTfi-fl %()VTiia " KPTBSl, ( 7) qimta " 'PlftfL, (ibid.) SO U71TM ((f)), fitXTlTW ((jp), |5A7IT) (ft), dpl'TITO) ((jp), &(XTITW (fp), &QVTlTti) ((p), KwiVTTTtt (/5), xifiTITW (TZ), X071TU (TI), vlnTto (ft), QomiM (qp), (jxamn (qo). Hence it appears, that the root of the simple present of verbs in TTTW ends in a labial ; generally in n. 3, Many verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (x, /, #), or lingual (T, d, &) t drop w with the preceding consonant, and annex uuw. E. g. q>(flatj(a from ftPTKfL jdaaw from TAT'fl 3ioWw " I1P4VSL ptiaota " ILUTJl /5/Joaw " lil/XJl xo^uaaw " KOPTOSl. So from KPAFSl , especially in syllabic verbs, are considered simple. E. g. tinifa, %'(aQii. NOTE 6. The last syllable of the simple present of a^cra^w, /3aArn, ugpogu or a^otrcru from 'APMOAfl. 5, Some verbs annex y to the last letter of the root. E. g. ra from ifuw, nliw from 6. Many verbs insert v before the last letter of the root. E. g, XAN/lfL from XAdfL AAMBfL " A4BSI, ( 12. 1) EXEFKJl " XNEKJl, ( 12. 2) /to'Mfi) " BAAJl,(^ 12 3.) Here belong all verbs in Mew and ^w, and some in ^w, as 7. Some verbs annex wro or m> to the root. E. g. av&ru) from cfi'|it, cA/(jthu;o) or oltadavw from OAI^OfL. Some annex ro> to, and insert y before the last conso- nant of the root. E. g. // n fl r w from jw:4 O SI li'pffana " AAUSl, (12. 1) " 7TXJ2, ( 12. 2.) 8. Some annex . 13. Many presents are formed from dissyllabic presents, which have * in the penult, by changing the into o and annex- ing ew. E. g. TToy&eca from nig Sot* Or by changing e into w and annexing o). E. g. from NOTE 9. YLirofAKt gives a..'#a), |o) ( 96. 15), except the imperfect, generally come either from the simple present, or from a new present in w ( 96. 10), or from both. 17. In dissyllabic verbs the radical vowel is sometimes placed after the last consonant of the root. ( 26. 2.) E. g. OWAJl from OANJl TMESl " T>O> v OPOJl " OOPJl. 18. In many instances, the penult of the original present is lengthened : becomes 77 or m ' as AABSl, AIIBSI ' ftdNJl, spairta. f ft, and, before a liquid, I asj^P//7/2, iytlnu ' KP1NJI, x^/Tro*. 8 a (rarely 77) ; as 2HEPSI, anilgw. o on ' as AKOJl, axuvM. v u, and, before a liquid, v ' as ftTFSl, cptvyw ' AI2XTNJI, (UO^L'lh). On the other hand, m is shortened into , into T or 6, ev into JJ, 7; into (rarely into .), r into I, ov into o, v into D. NOTE 12. Sometimes iv in the penult is shortened into s. See the Anomalous p&eopai, ^-KH rww, TiAew, Tive'w, Qkiu fluw, %e(o, NOTE 13. 'EAawvto comes from lxy by lengthening into at;, and annexing 9 to the rcot. ( 96. 5.) 19. The radical vowel is often either *, a, or o (rarely oj). This takes place chiefly in dissyllabic verbs. ( 2. N. 3.) E. g. 2I1EPSI, 2UAPJI, 2 NOTE 14. In some instances the diphthongs ft, and tv are changed into 01 and ov respectively. Seethe Anomalous ETJJl, txw, JMliT&JL* mid 'w. IMPERFECT ACTIVE. . To form the imperfect active, drop o of the present, annex oi/, and prefix its augment. E.g. imperf. 106 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 98. FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE. 98. 1. To form the perfect active, drop o of the present, annex xa, and prefix its augment. E.g. 7ii'o) perf. Tteirnvxa 96. 6, IS.) (2) When the vowel is either *, , or o, the first perfect of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes . E. g. fySnyxu. ( 96. 6, 18, 19.) NOTE 1. The verbs xAmv, x^tvu, vr^vvu), drop v in the first perfect active. Thus, xeX/ee, xEX/*a, ?revrAfx. 2. To form the perfect active of mute verbs whose root ends in a labial (TT, /3, 99) or a palatal (x, 7, #), drop co of the present, annex cc, change the preceding smooth or middle mute into its cor- responding rough mute (y, /), and prefix its aug- ment. E. g. TQlftw ygixcpw n/.iy.w So TV7iTC>, tirvcpa ' TiQMaoa, nsnQa%a. (^ 96, 2, 3.) The perfect formed according to these rules ( 98. 1, 2) is called the FIKST PERFECT ACTIVE. NOTE 2. The first perfect of the following verbs changes the radical vowel i into (^ 9f). 19 : *AsT, xe*A0 * *'&/**&>, irijrof*.P/XJ2), ntyglxa. OTsttw (ZTEslfL), taroAa. fl'TZfL* part. HEqpi^wg. aiegyw, tarogya. qpt'o), neyva. TIXTO) TAASly TfcrA. %i'w (XE/lfi), T/w (TPfl'Ji), rtTQiyot CpCtlt'Ct) f^-4rV^2], 7l(ptjl'Ct. NOTE. In Homer, a few pure verbs in aa* t tta y form their second perfect parti- ciple by changing a or i into > and annexing us. E. g. j FIRST AND SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 1OO. To form the first pluperfect active, drop a of the first perfect, annex f ( 95) 5/yioai " c5?/Aw(jw (ibid.) AtfcTTO) "" Xfc^ W ( 5. 2) TiU'xw " TiAfc'lw (ibid.). So rifjnrii, rtti^aa) .( 95) ; dgato, dguaw (ibid.) : T/W, rraaj (ibid.) ; (^/xorw, dnxgDuM (ibid.) ; rp//?w, T^/^/G) (8. 2) ; /^>(jpw, yqciytM (ibid ) ; At/o), At'w ( 9. 2) : TSI'/W, jft^w (ibid.) ; (Jw, a'aco ( JO. 2); Trf/^fo, Tmow (ibid.); fX7i/^w, ^Ti/aw. (ibid.); CFTItVdd), UTItiuM ( 12. 5). The future thus formed, is called the FIRST FUTURE ACTIVE. 103.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 109 NOTE 1. Futures in taw, from verbs in *&), often drop the / a, and are inflected like contract verbs in w ( 116). E. g. j Jo), fut. xopVw, xopw, isig, iti, dual L&TOV, plur. iovpsv, NOTE 2. Some futures in aw and saw often drop the cr, and- are contracted like verbs in w and sw. (ibid.) E. g. /law fut. shaaco, ^o) " <5i#ffX<5(jw, diaaxtdaw " TSA(JW, NOTE 3. The Doric dialect, in the inflection of the first future active, follows the analogy of contract verbs in so) (ibid.). E. g. rofieva)) fut. j'o^tsww, Doric NOTE 4. The Doric often forms futures in |w from pure verbs or from verbs in w, which among the Attics have aw in the future. E. g. NOTE 5. The poets often use craw for aw, in order to make the preceding syllable long by position. E. g. dvvco, avvaow' cx^vvco 1O3. To form the future active of a liquid verb, drop a of the simple present, and annex eo contracted c5. E. g. jUsVw fut. pj' f w contr. prw x^t^f'w x'W, (ibid.) ffifAw, ( 96. 6.) The future thus formed has been called the SECOND FUTURE ACTIVE. NOTE 1. A few liquid verbs have their future in , tTgupa ( 8. 2) ; ygdcpco, eygay>a_ (ibid.) ; Uyw, |'AE? (9.2); zei^w, irevla (ibid.); (5w, ^aa (10.2); ntl&u, ensiaa (ibid.); &nl(o, tflmoct (ibid.). NOTE 1. A few pure and mute verbs annex a, instead of fa. See the An- omalous aXiofAOLty ^etrioftott, EIELn, ENEFKH, iviixea, xata, fftvu, X^ u ' NOTE 2. Three verbs take * instead of tra. See the Anomalous Sftafti, wpi, and vt&nfAi. NOTE 3. The Dorians often form aorists in a from pure verbs, or from verbs in w. E. g. /dtt'w, ty&a$a ' xopw, NOTE 4. The poets often double the a after a short vowel. E. g. avvw, jjvvaaa ' ^Aw, tylkaaoa. 2. To form the aorist active of a liquid verb, drop a of the simple present, annex a, lengthen the penult, and prefix its augment. A, in the penult, is lengthened into ??, and s into ei. E. g. XQirto aor. i'xfjlva ( 96. 18) ufivvw " tfiivvot (ibid.) vipta " eve i pa (ibid.) T/Uw " waa ( 91. 6, 18) agxxUw j only in the indicative (m con- sequence of the augment). Thus, ^a, oW, fyettfu, ugov, a^a/, a^aj* 105.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. Ill t*a/, aA0&B/, a\aptvos. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. NOTE 6. A few liquid verbs take tra, in the first aorist active. Such are XI/W (KEPfl), 'UiDfftt. ' Ki^KtU (KEAH), tKlXffU. ' KV^U, 'U^fftt, ' ril&> (TEPfL , T6Eu4Jl), wcptlov. T/XTW (TEKJl), {fiQ>ASi) t cuqpAoy. li^voKo^ai (TTKJl), txvxov. (nAAfl), sVrorAov. jftyyw (TMArSl), (HAOJ2), tn (niOJL)j tTll&OV. T^fcTTW, , enagdov. T^>(JPW, &ov. T^W^W (TPAFSl), (llETfL), tnsoor, ens-cov. -ivyxdvw (TTXJl), tTV%ov. nlvw (fllJl)j tniov. fPAFJl, ecpocyov. (nAArfL), tnlriyov. &ENSI, nscpvov, entyvov. , tnoQor. (psvya) (&TrJl), -tyvyov. (llTAPJl), tmrxgov. Qnw (ftPAzlJl), tcpgador. (2'TIXJl) t tOTi^ov. %dra (XA/JJl), xx^oy. (2TTrJl),sarvyov. %uli'(o (XANJl), tyotvov. TAFJl, iiayvv. zardam (XA/JJl), fyadov. le^vco (T^W), tTFfiov, tTa^oy. XPA12MSL) TETMfL, NOTE. Some of these verbs have also a first aorist active. See a^a^/Vxa;, Ellin, ENEFKfl, xXagw, xnivu, f^a,^vria t veiff%&> t vii$-&>, rti(&u, vri7rru t in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE. 1O6. 1. To form the present passive, drop o of the present active, and annex opai. E. g. TVTttw pres. pass. jvmo^Lai. 2. To form the imperfect passive, drop opai of the present, annex o^v, and prefix its augment. E.g. JV71T6), TfTZTO^Utti imperf. paSS. llVTlTO^irjV. PERFECT PASSIVE. ^ 1O7. To form the perfect passive, drop o of the present -active, annex pai, and prefix its aug- ment. E. g. perf. pass, ninav^ai '* n^cfllr^jLtti ( 95) " dtdfywpai, (ibid.) ^i^L^^.CHi ( 8. 1) " ninltyput, (9. 1). 108.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 113 So Tif.iaM, Tttifiypttt, ( 95) ; waw, yviafiai (ibid.) ; T/W, TSU- Utti (ibid.) ; daxQVw, dedixxQVficu (ibid.) ; -lylfita, tiigi^^iai (8. 1); ygaqxa, y^yga^^ai (ibid.); A/W, Isfayfiai' TEV^M, rl- (9. 1) ; adw, yapou, ( 10. 1) ; nel&w, n&nsia^aL (ibid.) ; (ibid.) For the inflection of the perfect passive, see above (91). (1) The perfect passive of liquid verbs is always formed from the simple present. E. g. ayysMito, ^'//d^at ' yuivw, nsg>afi(juxt. ( 96. 6, 18: 12. 3.) (2) When the vowel of the root is either e, a, or o, the perfect passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes . E. g. slQM, t, iiQbp&i(V ( 7) ; (ibid.); tsv^t^, fofvjf&ip' $^ w > ij'a&rjv ( 10. 3); (ibid.) ; ^w^/^w, ix^Lo^v (ibid.) The aorist passive thus formed is called the FIRST AORIST PASSIVE. (1) The first aorist passive of liquid verbs is always derived from the simple present. E. g. ayyittw> ijyysi^v ' yalvw, fydv&ijv. ( 96. 6, 18.) (2) When the vowel of the root is either e , a, or o, the first aorist passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs .takes . E. g. TjV y&slgw, ey&dg&rjv. ( 96. 6, 18, 19.) NOTE 1. Some pure verbs, particularly such as retain the short vowel in the penult ( 95. N. I, 2), insert a before d^v. E.g. NOTE 2. The liquid verbs mentioned above ( 98. N. 1) often drop the v jn the first aorist passive. E. g. *X/v*/, i*X/v9->jv, commonly U>./9-v. 1 1 4). Some verbs form their aorist passive also by drop- ping w of the present active, annexing ^j>, and prefixing the augment. E. g. A/w aor. pass. eUyrjv. The aorist passive thus formed is called the SECOND AORIST PASSIVE. The following list contains nearly all those verbs which have a second aorist passive. For the changes of the root 3 see above ( 96). (AFJl), iayriv or iayyv. aMdaao) {AAAATSl}, rj 110, 111.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 115 (BAABSl), ygcpw, JAJI, eddrjv. da) (JAMJl), dsgco, tddgyv. (EASl), ed , (ZTFJl), (OPT&Jl), (KEPfL), (KAEIHI), XOTTTW or xaw, exexijv. (KPTBSL), (MANJl), ol'yw, ol'yyv. ogvoato , sndyrjv. nvlyw, I gew ( C P2*J2), ffiyvvp oxmw 2 ansiQW (ZIIEPfL), eangqv. oil fiat , eajlfirjv. OTstta (2TEASI), earner. OTSQBW (2TEPSL), oqxxaaw xciaaw (TAFJl), fiu hgnrjv. tti, frsQarj T?;XW (TAKJl), and TV71T03 (TTIlJl) , Tvcpw (OTfL\ cpalvw (OEPfL)> (0PAJTJI), vw, scpvrjv. (XAPJl), inlay r\v. FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 1 1 1. 1. To form the first future passive, drop &r)v of the first aorist passive, annex th^tfo^cu, and reject the augment. E. g. rvrnw, exvcp&rjv 1 fut. pass. Tvcp&^ao^oc^ 2. To form the second future passive, drop yv of the second aorist passive, annex ^oopou, and reject the augment. E. g. w, hvTirjv 2 fut. pass. 116 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 112-114. 112. To form the third future passive, drop ai of the second person singular of the perfect passive, and annex opai. E. g. t 3 fut. NOTE. Liquid verbs, and verbs beginning with a vowel, very seldom have a third future passive. PRESENT, IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLU PERFECT, MIDDLE. ^113. The present, imperfect, perfect, and plu- perfect, middle, are the same as in the passive. FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE MIDDLE. ^114. 1. To form the first future middle, drop o of the first future active, and annex opai. E. g. ivmto, wya) 1 fut. mid. NOTE 1. When the first future active ends in o7 ( 102. N. 1,2, 3), the first future middle ends in ovpai. E. g. . xo/u/w, xojtw, 1 fut. mid. xo[uov[A(xi, inflected like , 1 fut. mid. So in the Doric dialect, TVTTTW, rvyw, 1 fut. mid. The Attics sometimes use the Doric first future middle. 2. To form the second future middle, drop a of the second future active, and annex opou. E. g. TsAfiw 0TAw 2 fut. mid. axektofioti,, contracted NOTE 2. In a few instances the second future middle is found in mute and pure verbs. See the Anomalous V^a/, ^avS-avw, /ia^^a/, viva, vivrw, rixreu, 115.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 117 FIRST AND SECOND AORIST MIDDLE. 115. 1. To form the first aorist middle, drop a of the first aorist active, and annex apqv. E. g. 1 aor. mid. 2. Some verbs form their aorist middle by dropping 9 are con- tracted by the Attics in the present and imperfect. NOTE 1. Dissyllabic verbs in w are contracted only when and s come together. E. g. ntew, ntisig nhlg, nUsi nlu, nUo- pev, nUeje TiMrc, nliovai. REMARK. Aeau t xvxu, vuvetco, ffp.Kt, da, see above ( 23. N. 1). NOTE 3. XJ^ movable v ( 15. 1) is very seldom appended to the contrairod third person singular of the imperfect active. NOTE 4. The Epic dialect sometimes changes the radical vowel g into . E. g. ox?/w for oxn'w. NOTE 5. The Epic contracts sent into siou, and ho into 7o. E. g. aidbtat aidsiai, aldefo txidelo, from atdf'o/xat. Sometimes it drops the second e. E. g. fivdwi for nv&itai from NOTE 6. The Epic protracts a or (contracted) into or , and w (contracted) into ow or ww or wo, and w into ow. E-g. u, dyoaaso&e a/OQua&e, Epic ayognaads , Epic Tieddo} ' ntddeig ntdac, Epic ntdnag ^/?aw, rjpdovaa r//5coaa, Epic rj^wwaa ' rjfiuovTsg qjjwvTsg, Epic fjfiwovieg ah LOCO pot i > ouTiiioiTO alviano, Epic aiuoano. In the Epic dialect, verbs in ow sometimes follow the analogy of verbs in w. E. g. 6*?? vy* 117.] VERBS IN pi. 125 NOTE 4. In some instances the subjunctive of verbs in vfti rejects the connect- ing vowel. Ei. g. ^tourxtboivvvfju, ^iotffxt$a,vvv. Aftupi and *&vp.t lengthen the vowel only in the singular of the second aorist indicative, and in the second aorist infinitive. See the paradigms. NOTE 1 1 . The second person singular of the second aorist imperative, in a few instances, takes s instead of S-*. See the Anora. S/a;^, %%&>, 7?^/, riS-yjM, $gi&>. NOTE 1 2. The imperatives /3j&/ and 0-T5J9v, from fiifivfu and Iffrtjf&i, in com- position, often drop $/, and change v into &. E.g. xra/3a for xxrafinSh NOTE 13. The verbs r/S^/, 't*if&i t and $ft&>ju.i, lengthen s and o into tt and on in the second aorist active infinitive . thus, S-t7veu t slva/, Sovvat. NOTE 14. KTIMI, HIMI, O0IMI, and HAHMI, in some of the parts of the second aorist follow the analogy of verbs in tif&i or apt. See the Anomalous KTIH, -rtvea, rqce< and $/$#- ftt, see the paradigms. Aftupi sometimes throws the accent back on the antepenult in the subjunctive and optative passive, when the last syllable permits it( 20j. "10-Tw^ sometimes does the same in the optative passive. 128 INFLECTION OF WORDS. Synopti- ACTIVE INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. OPTATIVE. Present. Imperfect. Aorist 2. Present. Imperfect. Aorist 2. Present. Imperfect. Aorist 2. Present. Imperfect. Aorist 2. Present. Imperfect. 2 Aor. Mid. Present. Imperfect. 2 Aor. Mid. Present. Imperfect. 2 Aor. Mid. Present. Imperfect. 2 Aor. Mid. TlfhfUl SiScof.il edidav Hdcov TI&& tSzixvvv e8vv Seixvva Svo Soir^v SeixvvoifjLi Sv-qv PASSIVE AND SiSofiai Scoftai in.] cal Table. VOICE. IMPERATIVE. ictia&t, VERBS IN 129 818000 8600 8tixvv0o INFINITIVE. icstdvat, &S6&CU Soa&at Ssixvv0&ai PARTICIPLE. L0rds ri&sk #m &zlvai fats 8i8o&L Si86vou SiSovs S6fo Sovvai 8ovs tefavto Sswvvvat Seixvvs Sv&i Svvat, *<* MIDDLE. Sl86[J,VOS dvao Sva&ai 130 INFLECTION OF WORDS. K S. I place ICTT^S D* t UJTCITOV ICFTttTOV JP. iOTOtfiSV S. UJTTjg tarrj ioiaaav D. IGTUTOV P. la S. D. JP. BOTTJ GTV\1QV ACTIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I put I give didwg ll&STOV dldofisv dldoTOV frt&SflfV dldoptv or didovai(v) or Imperfect. edldwv edldwg tdlda tdldopsv edldoTOV edidoTijv hl&wav edldoaav Second Aorist. ISvv 9m e&frov e&trs e&eaav tdoaa I show delxvvfi delxvvg delxvvTov delxrvTov or ") sdslxvvv edeixvv sdelxvvTOV sdelxvvpsv edslxvvTe edelxvvaav sdvv edv tdiJTOV I'dvre edvaav ( 117. N. 16.) 117.] S. fffTW ACTIVE VOICE OF VERBS IN fit. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. 131 dswvvw laiy D. la larriTOV P. I -ii&yg vi&fj didwg didwfisv didwiov dewvvrjTov OTW in- flect, like the Pres. dsi,xvvtaai(v) Second Aorist. #w inflected 5w inflected dvw ( 117. 4.) like the like the Pres. Pres. OPTATIVE MOOD. Present. S. larttlrjv ioTalrig iGTairi D. loTctlri P. n&elrjg didolr] didolriptv deixvvoig dswvvoi dswvvonov SeixvvolTrjv didolrjjs dswvvons D. laTCUTOV Or thus (117. N. 5) didolTyv lr]v in- fleet, like the Pres. didotrs didolsv Second Aorist. inflect, dolyv inflect. $vr t like the like the Pres. Pres. ( 132 INFLECTION OF WORDS. K or lair} D. toTonov P. forms 8. OTlf]T(0 D. GTrJTOV P. GT7JTS Gift or 2 Aor. Pres. I 2 Aor. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. tl&ne dldois diSoTWGUV or or TtxHVrwj' Second Aorist. \ or <&eg do&t, or dog S^iiov doiov or &8VT(i3v or doviwv INFINITIVE MOOD. didovai, PARTICIPLE. didovg dovg delxrv&t or dtlxvv dflxVVTS or dswvvvTGw dv&i, dmov dvTMaav or dvvrwv dsixvvvott dvvai deixvvg dvg PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. S. Torrc^u a* lavaatu 'li&sGni or il& tide-cat, dldoaat, dldoTou delxvvaai ddxvvrai ll&ZG&OV loxua&ov P. IG dldoG&ov dldoo&ov Ssixvva&ov ddxvvadov rl&sa&s dldovTcu OF THB 117.] S. lotn PASSIVE AND or !'< IfflttTO D. laTa^ie&ov laTOUJ&OV P. laja^da inflected like the Imperf. S. l iary D. l(JTW P. i(JTWlulS&Ct lar'fia&B tCFTWVTOM like the Present. MIDDLE OF VERBSJjhjJ^ J y E&S I T "X Imperfect. . edldoao or hl&ov or edidov hl&tto IbidoTO tdLdofis&ov sdldoa&ov hl&sa&ov eu&sa&e edldoa&s edidovjo Second Aorist Middle. inflected inflected like the like the Imperf. Imperf. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Ti^M^UL Tl&7)T(Xl didw didwa&ov Vl&fjCf&S Tl&WVTGtl Second Aorist Middle. frwfiixi, deacon, like the like the Present. Present. sdely.vvao id SIX WTO fdttxrvadov tdtlxr inflected like like 134 INFLECTION OF WORDS. S. ivTalpw laiaio IOTOUJO D. la iajoua&ov iaicua&s GTOtl{J,r]V like the Present. S. HoTctao or l'( P. V( OTocao like the Present. Pres. 2A.M. (jTaa&cu Pres. 2 A.M. OPTATIVE MOOD. Present. diSolo didolTO didola&ov dsixvvoio dsixvvoijo deMvvol[j,e&ov dsixvvoia&ov didolafte Second Aorist Middle. like the Present. like the Present. xl&ta&ov dldov&ov. didoa&wv dldoafrs didoa&Mcruv or ^t^off^toj Second Aorist Middle. &soo or &ov douo or dov like the like the Present. Present. INFINITIVE MOOD. PARTICIPLE. duxvvoivxo ( 117. N. 17.) IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. tl&sao dldoao dslxvvao or -il&ov or dldov dtlxvvafrov deixvva&wv delxvva&e deixvixj&caaav or dfi dvuo like delxvvao. dslxvva&ai dvG&ai dvperog REMARK. It is supposed that the aorist of verbs in pi originally ended in , c^ujjv, ( 105 : 115. 2.) Hence its name second aorist* 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 135 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 118. 1. Anomalous verbs are those which have, or are supposed to have, more than one present ( 96). 2. All verbal forms, which omit the connecting vowel ( 85. 1), are anomalous ; except the perfect and aorist passive ( 91 : 92). 3. The following catalogue contains nearly all those verbs which are apt to perplex the learner. REMARK. In this Grammar, obsolete or imaginary Presents ( 96) and Nominatives ( 46), are always printed in capitals. They are so printed " in order that the eye may not become accustomed, by means of the common letters, to a multitude of unused and merely imaginary forms, and thus rendered less capable of detecting barbarisms at first sight." A. AAJl, injure, A. aaoa contract- ed aaa, A. Pass, acxa&rjv, A. Mid. aaadfirjv. Pres. Mid. 3d pers. sing, action. ( 109. N. 1.) /^i (ATASly ArHMI), ad- mire, A. Pass, riyda&riv, F. Mid. uyaaofjiai, A. Mid. (not Attic) r^aoaijrjv. ( 117 : 95. N. 1: 109. N. 1.) The Present ayao^at or ayalo^ni, am angry at, envy, is used by the epic poets. ^ ( 96. 18.) uyelgta (AFEPJl), collect, uye- QM, tfysiga, ayriysQxa, ayriytQ- {iai, yytQ&ip'* ^ A Mid. yye- Qonr\v (Epic), Infin. aytQK- i, Part, ayyontvoq for g. (96. 18:81. 1: 26. J.) ayvvfii (AFSL), break, F. |o), A. l| (rarely ^e), 2 Perf. l/a, 2 A. Pass, fw/r/v or ax^i'. (96.9:80. N.2.) NOTE. The simple AFH was originally FAFfl, whence X.U.VK^O.IS (see xarci'yvvft^ , which originally was *FF^/f. ( 1. N. 1, 3 : 10. N. 2.) ctyw, lead, |w, rfca, Perf. fact and ctyrio%ct, ^y^cti, v\X,&v[v> 2 A. tfyuyov, 2 A. Mid. riya- yoprjv. ( 96. 19, N. 1 : 81. 1.) The Perfect ayrjoza is not Attic. NOTE 1 . 'Aywo^a is formed as follows: &yu, AFAFH, AFOFH, omission of the second y is acci- dental. NOTE 2. In Homer we find Aor. Imperat, 2d pers. plur. u%tn for &Zatrt. ( 88. N. 3.) C A/UI, see avdiww. aelQw (AEPJl), regular, =z al'gw. The epic poets have Pluperf. Mid. 3d pers. sing. W ? TO for 7?V- ( 9G - 19 f'So), Epic, = ftftw. (AESl), blow, Infin. a^vai, Part, adg, Imperf. ayv (in Homer). Pres. Pass, urjfiai. ( 117. N. 17.) alvew, praise, eaco and T^aw, tact 136 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 118. and rjaa, ? ; x, (95. N. 2.) take, choose, Tjcrw, qxct, r^tai, e&rjv. { 95. N. 2.) From 'EAJl, % A. fdov, 2 A. Mid. tUo/iqi', 2 F. &LW (rare). In the Perfect, the Ionics prefix to this verb a sort of Attic redupli- cation with the smooth breathing, aouignxct, agettgnfteti. ( 81.) aijpw (APJl), raise, agw t rJQot, riQxa, rjotia!, tj(f&ipt. (&& 96. 18: 104. N. 5.) ala&dvopai ( 1/^OJl), perceive, feel, Perf. Mid. fja&iuiai, F. Mid. aiati reopen, 2. A. Mid. ^ yadofiyv. ( 96. 7, 10.) axa/o) (AXfL), trouble, afflict, F. xtt/'j / '(/to, A. i]xj/a, 2 A. yxoizov, 2 A. Mid. TjxaxouTjv. Mid. ttxtt#/ojuat, grieve, feel grief, am afflicted. (& 96. 10, N. 1.) * anttxfuros, r\ 9 ov, sharpened, pointed, a defective Perf. Pass. Par#. from AXJl. > ( 81. N.) axova) (AKOJl), hear, tfxovoa, rjxovxa (not Attic), ovaficci, ovadyv, ovooftat, 2 Perf. x?J- xo, 2 Pluperf. r t xr]x6siv. (^96. 18:81: 107. N. 1: ^ 109. N. 1.) jxlaopat, ^vander, rove, Perf. Mid. alalrjftat synonymous with the Present, Infin. aid- Iria&ai, Part, ahalyuwog. } (81. N.: 93. N. I.) uldairia (AA/JSl), increase, Im- perf. (as if from aAdaVw) ^ fydavov. ( 96. 7.) eudffcrxG) (AA/JJl),grow, thrive, cause to grow, F. aA^ifaw. (96. 10,8.) >U'!tt (AAEKJl), ward of, F. odeSij'ae*, A. Mid. ^h^x 2. A. r/AAxor. ( 96. 15, 10, N. 1 : 26. 1.) NOTE. The Aor. faetXxov is ob- tained in the following manner : or alfvo^ai, avoid, es- cape, A. Mid. qfotipriv or ijJUvtti^v. ( 96. N. 12: 104. N. l.j afolg, see ct7Ao). As/(jpw (AAI&Jl), anoint, dyw, tiya, Perf. cJeAtyJUgx*, A?fA^- fia. (96. 18:81.) 'AAT2KJI (AAJl), capture, Perf. eofAwxa and ^'Ao)x 7iz;e 6ecw captured, F. aJuaaopai shall be captured. From 'AAJIMI, 2 A. Awy and TifAroi' ^s captured, Aw, Aot- ^v and ccAw^y, aAw^at, Aov. Pass. uUoxojttu,, am cap- tured. ( 96. 8, 10 : 80. N. 2: 117. 12, N. 6.) ulnalvw (AAlTJl), sin against, offend, F. eUtr^aw, 2 A. r/At- TOV, 2 A. Mid. y ( 96. 7, 10.) ^ The Perf. Mid. ahx^erog has the force of an adjective, that has sinned against, that has offended. c> (93. N. 1.) ccUo^m CAAJI), leap, spring, A. Mid. ftdpnv, 2 F. Mid. cdovftvti, 2 A. Mid. rilo^iip'. ( 96. 6: 104. N. 5.) NOTE. Forms without the con- necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 2d pers. sing. aiXffo, 3d pers. sing. XTlow, which 118] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 137 see. See also 'AAI2KJI. ^ ( 96. 10.) AUJXW (AATKSl), shun, avoid, F. Mfa, A. fovfr. ( 96. , 14.) tthynlvM or ahfpdvw (AA3>fL), procure, bring, find, 2 A. 7?A(j>o*>. ( 96. 7.) AAfLy see ro) (^AMAPTSl), err, sin, miss, Perf. i^a^xa, Perf. Pass. fjfiutQiimat, A. Pass. fub/y, F. Mid. apotQ- , 2 A. yuotoTov. ( 96. 7, 10.) For WOIQTOV Homer has al- so ^U^QOTOV, with the smooth breathing. NOTE. The Homeric jjf&fyorov is formed as follows : 'AMAPTH, *AMOPTfl, fiftogrov, vftgorov, %ft- fyorov. ( 96. 19: 26. 2, N.) /3A/(jxw and W^/JAOW, miscar- ry, (96.8.) The Present ^i- /?Aow occurs only in com- pounds. ct{j.7is%(a (otficpl, l^w), wrap a- round, clothe, Imperf. a^mu- %ov, F. ttftcpsSw, F. Mid. ri^u- cpE^ofica, 2 A. yfimaxov, 2 A. Mid. ^Tnoxo^rjv. Mid. a^ini- %ofjai, wear, put on. ( 14. 3:82. N.I.) and (AMnAAKJl), miss, err, F. rtfinlnxqaw, 2 A. yfinhctxov, Infin. danlny.uv and some- times anlaxsiv, without the //. ( 96. 8, 10.) l f evrvui), clothe, 12* F. ctf4ipitadra> ^AdfL), please^ delight, Imperf. r^vdavov or edrdavov or krivdotvov, F. <5?7'a, 2 A. 6<5ov or <$o>, 2 Perf. f<5a. (96.7, 10:80. N. 2, 3, 5.) For g&>v Homer has also ivctbov, with the smooth breathing. The Doric has 2 Perf. 'iitia, with the smooth breathing. NOTE. The simple 'AAD, was originally FA AH, from which came 2 A. cFFftfc* (like i/AfAa^ov from MEIPH), which finally was chang- ed into tvotiov. ( 1. N. 1, 3.) ANEOfL y spring forth, 2 Perf. avrivo&ot synonymous with the Present. ( 96. 19 : , 8L) , ave%(o (civ a, l^co), hold up, F. Mid. aveSofAou, 2 A. avG%ov, 2 A. Mid. r)Vo%6ur]v. Mid. avixo^Ltti, endure, Imperf. ^~ vfXOfirjv. ( 82. N. 3.) avolyw (y, ol'^ci)), open, Im- perf. ocycWoy, F. yo/|a>, A. wyso^a (later ^fvo/|), Perf avsofxot, Perf. Pass, aj'ecpy^cu, A. Pass. avfwx&W* 2 Perf. v f o)/ stand open, 2 A. Pass. (later) ^o//^. ( 82. N. 1.) 138 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 118. eWj Imperf. avwyeov, =. fol- lowing. , command, order, |w, , 2 Perf. civwya synonymous with the Present. NOTE. Forms without the con- necting vowel, 2 Perf. 1 st pers. plur. cLvwyftsv, Imperat. eiva%3-i, av&>%Q-ctt t civa%Ss, for civ&jyz, ili/cra or of, F. Mid. 7 cr?, see i, invoke, curse, aao- , aaa^v, regular. From APIIMI comes Epic Infin. agrJitwou. ( 117. N. 17.) aQUQiaxM (APJl), jit, adapt, join, F. w'^aw, A. ygaa, Perf. Pass. aQ^Qf^ai, 2 A. TIQ 2 Perf. 'ow0a (Ionic a Part. fern. aQaQV~ut ( 96. 8, 10, N. 1 : 81. N.: 103. N. 1: 104. N. 6.) NOTE. The syncopated 2 A. Mid. Part, eigpivof has the force of an adjective, suitable, adapted. ( 92. N. 4.) V/ro (APJl), please, gratify, F. atggwti, Perf. Pass, r/pfa/ura. (^ 96. 10, 8 : 95. N. 1 : 107. N. 1.) (APJl), procure, ac- quire, earn, save, Imperf. rjQvvfirjv. ( 96. 9.) QOG), ploUgk, till, OffW, 0(J, From APfLMI, Infin. Act. (Epic) aQomiwai. ( 81 : 95. N. 1 ) w^Tra^o), seize, snatch, erw or |w, a or , x, oiapcd, or ctyfiat, act&rjv or ax&r]V, 2 A. Pass. wQTiayriv. ( 96. N. 6.) APJl, see r^w, otQaglattto, MQS- (7XW, &QWfUH ai/lco or-u^Vw (ATrJl), in- crease, F. av|?f(7w, A. ^i/l^cra, Perf. Pass, yvfypai,, A. Pass. ^v^Oriv. ( 96. 15, 7, 10.) ctVQaw, otVQEQ), avQlaxopoti, (AT- PJl,) used in the compounds 7rV'w, snaVQsw, inavgl- axouai, which see. ( 96. 8, 10.) ATPfL, see the preceding. aqpeWrat, see aqp/fy/uf. ayir]iLi (anc, fyfu), let, go, Im- perf. dcpleov or r^cpUov some- times r)Jl, see 7Twqp/(jxw. ^f r w (AX ft), Part.axwv, ovaa, afflicted, grieved, Perf. Pass. 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 139 jlicted, grieve, Infin. x^- o&ai, Part. (wn%riiitvo$ or Axwiptvoq. (96. 10:95. N. 2:81. N. :93. N. 1.) $X&o[i, aaat, dan. Pass. aofiat, 3d pers. sing. rt ^ Epicr t . ( 116. N. 6.) UWQTO, see /5tVw and /?ffxw (BASL), go, walk, F. ^aw sAa?/ cz/sc #o ^o, Perf. /5/5ryx, Perf. Pass. ftepanaL (only in composi- tion), A. Pass, spu&riv (only in composition), F. Mid. i, A. Mid. (Epic) f/fy- and foo^v, 2 Perf. From A. (in composition often M\, farm, /?'^. (96. 6, 10, 17.) From BAEJl, BAIIM1, 2 A. I'/SV, 2 A. Mid. iffi- , Subj. 3d pers. sing, for {H?ii(u, Opt. /?Aa- , Infin. /5>l^(j^at, Part. , all Epic. (117. N. 15, 17: 96. 19.) /9(jxw, see (falrm. /5aTaJw, carry, daw, aaa, a- &yv. ( 96. N. 6.) , see pabco. or /?f/0|Ui, see /3alvw. or /9//J^* (J3AJ1), = /vw, which see. (96. 1.) (BOPfL), cat, F. ), Perf. /?/?^wx, Perf. Pass. ftspQwpat, A. Pass. efigia&rjv, 3 F. ftf^waoftai, 2 Perf.- Par*, /fe^w?. From BPSIMI, %A.%0g, you, TJXW, 7?/iw/, gt^v, ^oofiai, regular. From the simple ijfOJi come the Ionic forms efiuHja, e'/Jw- a&yv, priaoiiat. ( 109. N.I.) BOAEfL (BAASl\ Perf. Pass. Seftoblftai, =. /5Ho). ( 96. 19, 10.) BOASl, see BOPJl, see /Soaxw (BOJ2), /ecc?, pasture, F. /?oax?|(jft}, A. c^oax^aa. ( 96. 8, 10.) I3ov)iofica (BOAJl), will, Imperf. tfitvlofAifw or ^ovXo^rjv, Perf. Pass. f}s/3ovKijiJiai, A. Pass. efiovkr)&T)V or Tifiovhriftriv, F. Mid. fiovlrjaoficu, 2 Perf. /5s- comp. in Homer TT^O- a. (96. 18,10: 78. N. 1.) From the simple Present come Pres. Pass, jjfo- liofiai, 2d pers. plur. p6faa&e. BOfL, see ^oa'oo, /Jocrxw. BPAXJl, crash, rattle, 2 A BPOfL, see fiovy/wiiai, (BPTXfL), roar, yaopcu, vjadfirjv, Perf. ffsfiQV- %a synonymous with the Present. (96. 10.) n (FAMfL), marry, F. , A. eyrjfiat (later fy- , Perf. ^f^a^^xa, Perf. Pass, ytynpripai, A. Pass. , Part. fern, also yct(j.ei(ja, F. Mid. ya^saao- pat (in Homer). (96. 10' 95. N. 2 : 102. N. 5.) , see nrNJl. ysywvco and ysywvsw (jT/lIV/l), ca// aloud, 2 Perf, ysywva synonymous with the Pres. yslvouctt, (FJENJl), beget, bring forth, am born, A. Mid. tyBivapip begat, brought forth. ( 96. 18.) ysvio, see yLyvo^ai, *EAfL. FJENJ2, see ylyroftcu. (rilOSL), rejoice, tjow, , 2 Perf. ysyrj&a synony- mous with the Present. ( 96. 10.) and yrigawj grow old, , ff, x, aao^ica. From , 2 A. tyJQuv, yrj~ , yrjQoig. ( 117. 12.) (FENJl, TASl\ pro- duce, .cause to exist, Perf. Mid. ytytrqptn, Pass, iytvn* dj\v, F. Mid. ysvyaopai, 2 Perf. ytyova (poetic also yeyua), 2 A. Mid. tygvoprjv. Mid. ylyvopcu or ylvouni, produce myself, make myself, become. ( 96. 1, 5, 10, 19: 26. 1.) The 2 Perf. /*/ is in- flected, as far as it goes, like jftjffii* ( 91. N. 7.) NOTE. For 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. sing, tygygra, we find 'iy&vro or }>>- ra. ( 92. N. 4.) yiyvwaxw(rNOJl)> later ywwaxw, know, A. eyvtoan (chiefly in composition), Perf. syrtaxn, Perf. Pass, tyvmainxi,, A. Pass. tyyfaa&vjv, F. Mid. From TNSIMT, 2 A. s/ 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 141 yrti) yvolrjv, yvw&i, yvwvoH, yvovg. ( 96. 1, 8: 76. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1 : 117. 12.) yoaw (FOfL), bewail, regular. Imperf. also tyoov. From rOHMT, Infin. Epic yoy pe- rm. (96.10: 117. N. 17.) TfLNfL, see ysycorw. /I. deuvvw or dalca, give to eat, entertain, F. daiaw, A. i'dou- aot, A.Pass. ldalad"i]v, A. Mid. feast, Opt. 3d pers. sing. dalvvTo. ( 96. 9: 109. N. 1: 117. N. 7.) (JAJL), divide, Perf. Pass. u, 3d pers. plur. ds- (in Homer), F.Mid. i, A. Mid. idaadfiyv. (96. 18: 107. N. 1: 95. Y. 1.) (JAJl), burn, 2 Perf. 5i'- drja, 2 A.Mid. idao^iriv. Mid. dalopat, am on Jire, burn. (96. 18.) xxi'w (JAKJI), bite, Perf. fo- dr)%M, Perf. Pass, dedyyucti,, A.Pass. tbrix&riv, F.Mid. Sri- |oa/. 2 A. f'daxov. (^S 96. 5. 18.) 3f//'w (j/lMfl), subdue, tame, df.ir]xct, dsd^^oti, A. Pass. IdfArj&rjv, 2 A. Pass. ^8a^.r]v. (96. 10, 17:95. N. 1.) fiat, = preceding. ( 96. 5.) i'w (dAPOft), sleep, Perf. dtduy&rjXM, A.Pass. t&uo&rjv, F.Mid. duQ&iiaojjtti, 2 A. tdag&ov or Hdgnd-ov. ( 96. 7,10: 26. 2: 11.) , divide, share, A.Mid. . ( 104. N. 1.) , see fla/w. y cause to learn, teach, Perf. deddyxa have learned, Perf. Pass, dsdarj^ioci, F.Mid. dcHgcropflu, 2 A. tdaov, 2 Perf. dedaa have learned, 2 A. Pass. <5V I learned. From AEdAfL, Pass, dtduopat. (96. 10, 11.) or del (dew), it behooves, one must, Impersonal, F. ^sijacf* A. (dlto), frighten, scare, A.Mid. 3ft- Wce^v. (96. 11, 8, 3: 76. N. 4.) deldto, see AETfL. df-lxvvpt (4ETKJI), show, F. de/lco, A. i'5f^, Perf. Pass. dddeiypou, A.Pass. tdsfy&riv. ( 96. 9.) The Ionic has fc'w, |'3e|a, JETJI or 5tw or dsld(o,fear, A. I'flsiaa (in Homer tddeiaa), Perf. dtdoixa am afraid, F.Mid. deiaogiai, 2 Perf. ^ fi '- 5 aw afraid. ( 96. 18, N 14:98. N. 3:79. N. 3.) NOTE. Forms without the con- necting vowel, 2 Perf. Itfttptv, $i/- J/TI, Imperat. Itft&t, 2 Pluperf. i2V- (5 91- N, 6 : 76. N. 4 : 88. N. 1.) dspw, build, A. i'ds^uw, Perf. dep7]xa, A. Mid. ( 96. 17.) i, see 5f r w, want. t, see, 2 A, 2 Perf. &?3o ? xa, A. Pass. 142 INFLECTION OF WORDS. lar. % A. Pass. %xx7?i/. 6. 19, 17: 26.2.) receive, dsdi/fiat, Ids- deSofuxi, ^efctjuijf, regu- (not Attic), 2 A. id NOTE. Forms without the con- necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. iSey/^v, Ssx't, A. td&yacc, A. Pass. F. Mid. dsTjaofiai. Mid. dtoftai, want, need, pray, beseech. ( 96. 10.) For A. 3d pers. sing. edtyaev, Homer has dijasr. JHKJl, see ddxvu. dyw (JAJl), as Future, shall jind. (dIJAXJl), teach, F. j (poetic also didaaxy- cyw), A. fdldaSa (poetic also Id id da XTJ a a), Perf. dedldatxa, Perf. Pass, dedldaypai, A. Pass. tfidax&W- ( 96 - 10 . N. 10.) dldr]jj.i, see (Js'w, bind. didgdaxco (dPAJl), run away, Perf. dedQaxa, F.Mid. fyaao- ^uat. From 4P1JMI, 2 A. edguv, dgw, dgaiyv, dgoi&i, dqwui, dqd?. ( 96. 1,8: 117. 12.) This verb occurs only'in composition didwpi and Mow (4OJl),give, F. 5 wad), A. |'3o)xa, Perf. i6)xa, Perf. Pass, dsdopou, A.Pass. edo&yv, A. Mid. tow- , , or 5oj, dovyai, dovg, 2 A. Mid. Idofirjv. (96. 1 : 117: 104. N. 2: 95. N. 2.) flt'fw, seeA:, F.Mid. ditfaofiou. Mid. dl^TjfKXi, seek, retains the 7i throughout, as Part. diMpevos. (96. 10: 117. 3.) JIKJI, cast, fling, 2 A. diw, see /IE1SL, de JMAJl, JMEJl, see dctpdca, dff^a). doaiat or dsata^ it seems, Im- personal, A. Mid. donaaa- TO, Subj. 5otf(/5Ti, Epic. ( 102. N. 5: 86. N. 3.) dox-dw (JOKJl), seem, think, F. do$u, A. idofc, Perf. Pass. dtdoyfiai. The regular forms <5ox?j(jw, ^cj, ^*, are not common. ( 96. 10.) dovnew (AOTIIfL), resound, sound heavily, A. Idovnrjoa (also tybovinriau}, 2 Perf. de- dovna. ( 96. 10.) NOTE. The A. iybovvvxrot comes from TAOrriEn, which is formed after the analogy of KTWX'IU from Trrm ( 7.) 4PAMJI or JPJEMJ1, Perf. og- i, Perf. Pass, (little used), 2 A. , 2 Perf. 5%o^u (Epic), F. Mid. dQcxfjiov^ai, = rpf^w, which see. (96. 10, 19.) am able, can, Imperf. tdvvd- Perf. Pass. A.Pass. jdwfj&iiv (and { F.Mid. dwyaopat, A. Mid. (in Homer) 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 143 , Perf. ( 78. N. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 109. N. 1.) dvco and dvvca, enter, set, cause to enter, F. dvaco, A. Perf. dsdvxct, A.Pass. tfvi F. Mid. dvGOfiou, A. Mid. sdvad^v (Epic also Idvao- [irjv), Part, dvaopevog as Present, setting. From /JTMI, 2 A. zdvv, dvco, dvrjv, dv&i, dvvai, dvg. ( 96. 5 : 95. N. 2: 85. N. 2: 117. 12, N. 7.) or Ea(p&. S. olda D. fofiw P. oia&a I'VTOV olde(v) I'OTOV SUBJ. S. eldw, sldyg, eldy, D. fidrjrov, P. eldM^sv, sidyis, P. NOTE 1. The Attic reduplication of iyf>wyo(iot. is anomalous. NOTE 2. Homer has 2 Perf. 3d pers. plur. \y^ny'o^-SLtn for lypqydm atff h as if from EFEP0I1. NOTE 3. Forms without the con- necting vowel, 2 Perf. Imperat. 2d pers. plur. iygvyogS-t, Infin. lygyiyogS-eu, with the terminations of the Passive, trSt, o-S-ou. on, see so&lw. ,, see the following. ipou (^JEJJl), seat myself, sit, Imperf. e6[tr)v, A. Pass, g- a&yv (later), 2 F.Mid. tdov- /tiai. (96.4: 114. N. 2.) This verb is chiefly used in the compound xi which see. or xHAeo, will, F. j or fiehyod), A. r\&&i]ai ( 96. 10.) am accustomed, 2 Perf. (Ionic #) synony- mous with the Present. (96.19: 80. N. 3, R.I.) F.Mid. OPT. S. fidelyv, fidelyg, sidsfy, D. fldelrjTOV, eldelrjpev, siduqjs, tldelyaav. IMP. 8. i'v&i D. i'aiov P. lore laiwv 144 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 118. INF. PART, eldwg, vita, 6g, G. oT Pluperfect 2. S. T}Ssiv, jjdr] D. jjdtig, fjdeia&a, P. ydtifiw, rjaptv jjdens, yore , ydrj, r t dfLV 9/fc/Tigr, ^arr^v rfitaav, y NOTE 1. Perfect. IND. 2d pers. sing. 7?v, loXj^jjv, -, lo'A.wr. ( 96. 13 : 80. N. 2.) , see METPSl. 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 145 flfil (EJl, E2SI), am, a), l?^, la#/, rival, wV, Imperf. ^v (some- times ^u?p), F. taoftui, i(Joi^r t Vy baea&ott, taopevog. Present. IND. S. flfil D. lopsv P. taper eig, si SUBJ. S. W, fig, ?J, D. toftSV, VjTOV, V\1QV, P. W^J>, ^T, W(Jl(v). OPT. 8. w]v> si'yg, si'rj, D. siypw, tl'qjov, ^'T^J>, P. elijfiw, ei'tjTt, efyaotv. IMP. S. la-d-i D. loroy P. HOTS INF. eivui, to 6e. PART. wV, ovoa, 6V, G. ovrog, being. Imperfect. Future. IND. S. eaogjuxi, I'd/j or lact, lasrwt or i'oicu, D saso&ov, saea&ov, P. eoops&ct, easa&s, taovrai. OPT. ^. eaoifi^v 9 taoto, saono t o&rjv, P. eaolps&a, taoia&s, I'OOWTO. INF. I'afo&txt, to be about to be. PART, laoptfog, ^ ov, about to be. NOTE 1. Present IND. The 2d pers. sing. iT belongs to the Middle voice. Compare ^/Xja^a/, 2d pers.

t\tu contracted ^/Xs7. ) The forms lS^. I'w, l/;c, I/,, -D. t'w^sy, I'^TOV, ^roy, jP. I'c l'woi(v). OPT. ^S>. Ibf^ut, lot?, I'oi, D. i'oifiev, I'OITOV, loliyy, P. i' I'OITS, i'oiev. IMP. S. ISi, si D. ITOV P. ITS ITW ITOJV i'Twaav or i INF. livau PART. twV, lovaa, lov, G. iov Imperfect. S. ijsiv D. yu^M, ypsv P. yft ysig, rjeia&a ysnov, TJTOV TJELTS, ^ ysi, fjsiv yeiTyv, yTr\v yeoav NOTE 1 . Present. IND. The 2d pers. sing. T, like 7 from tipi, follows the analogy of the Middle. The 3d pers. plur. teet follows the analogy of r&i&ffi from riS-vpi.. ($ 117. N. 2. > IMP. 2d pers. sing. tJ is used only in composition, as 'ifyi for f|/S/ from %&ft,. Compare 11-7. N. 8.) INF. liveti comes from the imaginary IEH, IHMI, after the analogy of T;$gva/ from nS-ico, TI^^I. Imperfect. The forms s/v, fag, &c. follow the analogy of the Pluperfect Active. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 147 NOTE 2. DIALECTS. Present. IND. 2d pers. sing. Epic ti), liken, compare, Imperf. rjiaxov or ( 96. 14.) see e'#w. ilavvw (rarely daw), drive, march, F. &aoo or Ac5, A. ylaaa, Perf. tl^axa, Perf. Pass. &4?X/ciK, later ft^la- A. Pass. ^>L^v, later 96. N. 13 : 95. N. 1 : 102. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.) EAETOfL (EATOfL), F. Mid. ffavQOfjcai, 2 A. fyv&ov com- monly ril&ov, tl&v>, '&&oi,fu 9 2 Perf. (rarely u, which see. ( 96. 18: 26. 1 : 93 N. 2.) NOTE. Homer has 2 Perf. i/Xif. 1 st pers. plur. e/X^Xot/^jy ' for 8/XwXoy^a^gv. ( 96. N. 14 : 81 : 91. N. 6.) eknco, cause to hope, give hope, 2 Perf. wfaa as Present, 2 Pluperf. iwlntiv as Imper- fect. Mid. Elnopau, cause myself to hope, simply / hope. ( 80. N. 2, 3.) 'l, F. Uw (rare), 2. A. v, I'Aw, tkoifii, fta, fiAfil^, wV, 2 A. Mid. tikouyv (Alexandrian elldurjv), =. alysw, which see. ( 80. N. 1: 85. N. 2.) NOTE. It may be supposed that 'EAn was originally FEAH, of which the 2 A. Mid. 3d. pers. sing., without the connecting vowel, would be FsXra or FEVTO (like fieNntrros for jSsAr^roj). The form FevTtf was finally changed into yevro, he seized, which is found in Homer. ( 1. N. 3 : 92. N. 4.) EAfL, see el'AAw. ENEFKfL (ENEKfL), A. ^V/- xce, Perf. eV^Vo^a, Perf. Pass. ivi]Vy(jiou, A. Pass. yvs%&i]v t 2 A. yvsyxov, = (psQCOf which see. ( 96. 6 : 104. N. 1 : 98. N. 2 : 81.) ENEOfL, float, lie on, sit, 2 Perf. ivrivo&a. ($$ 96. 19 : 81.) ENEKJl, see ENEFKJl. 148 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 118. svenw or Ivviivn or JENinJi or ENI2IISI (fcV, EIIJl), F. evi- (77177 aw or &fyt, 2 A. tvianov, poetic, = EinSl, which see. ( 96. 14, 16, 10.) ivlmu or ivlaau (ENIIMl), chide, 2 A. svdnnov and (as if from ENIHAnfL}, rivina- nov. ( 96. 2, N. 1.) ENI2IMI, see eVsTrw. ivvinw, see ivinw. svvvpi (ESI), put on, clothe, F. law, Perf. Pass. J^at or lapou, Pluperf. Pass, ii^v or a7/^v or e&afirjv, A. Pass. ea&i]v, A. Mid. eeaa^v, poetic. ( 96. 9 : 95. N. 1 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1 : 80. N. 2.) o, see si'Mw. or tnavglaxofioci (inl, tVQtw, avglaxopai), enjoy, F. Mid. cTrau^'ao/ica, 2 A. inr^Qov, enavgw, 2 A. Mid. enr)V()6fj.r}v, and inav- (EIII2TASI, EI1I- 2THMI), understand, Im- perf. riTiLard^v, A. Pass. r\m- oiri^v or imaxri&riv, F. Mid. iniairiaouoii. (^ 117: 80. N.4.) , see EIHJl. w, am occupied with, am busy, Imperf. unov, F. Mid. ^(//o^wcet, 2 A. tonov, OTIW, onuv, onajv, 2 A. Mid. 6(7710- ju?p, (jnwficti, Gnol^Vj vnov, onea&ou, anofjiwoq. Mid. gjro- liai, follow. ( 80. N. 1.) The old poets have 2 A. Mid. Subj. aj7rot)//ou, /w/*. eaTiea&at, Part, konojjisvog. NOTE. It seems that 1*u was originally SEIin, whence 2 A. gVecrav, syncopated iV^av. (Compare v$, ffvg, sus ; Ix-opa,!, sequor : v OL ) O'X&XK contrary to the rule ( 14. 3). NOTE 2. It would seem that the original form of ^ was 2EXH, whence 2 A. t (ZOJ2) f gird) F. worw, (^ 96. 18, 10.) A. Itwaa, Perf. l?wx, Perf. -fran (OA&SI), bury, T / T ' J/ Cl T A T ' Pass, e^wa^at, A. Pass. cw- e^y/, T&&OIHIIUI, A A. "ass. (j^v (^ 96. 9 : 107. N. 1 : ita^v. ( 96. 2 : 14. 3.) 109. N. 1.) OAJl, am astonished, 2 A. H. eicupov, 2 Perf. ledyna (con- ^t, see !BJI, place. trary to 14. 3) synonymous .ijji/, 5y. The Imperfect ^v, ^, with the Present. ( 96. 18.) is used chiefly in the formulas OAfL y suckle, suck, A. Mid. us.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 151 Pres. Mid. Inf. OOPJl, see (contracted from OPE&Jl, see , 23. N. 1) #e'Aw, see &iha. OEPfL, warm, F. Mid. Mid. myself. , 2 A. Pass. &sgopai; warm ( 103. N. 1.) (OETJl), run, F. Mid. -frsvaopou, devaovfiou. ( 96. N. 12: 114. N. 1.) 'w, jow, see vl&imi. see #0juca. ( OIFJl), touch, F.Mid. '(96. 7.) /0 ' (OANSl), die, Perf. G57W /ead, 2 A. , 2 Perf. is&vaa, i TS&VCtVOU, 0PJEXJI, see &QVTITW (OPT0J2.), crumble, , H&Qvynx, 2 A. Pass. (OOPJl), leap, spring, '2 A. S&OQOV, F. Mid. &OQOV- VLV.I. ( 96. 17, 18.) OT0JI, see W(jp(. sacrifice, -friiaw, e&vaot, , tTV&qv. ( 95. N. 2 : 14. N. 3.) I. locate, vaw. vaa, vxa t A. Pass, idv&rjv and . ( 95. 5.) see , see (Epic Te&rrjwg or T#mafe), I'fw and ^Vw (^EjJl), seat, sit, F. Mid. davovoti. From F. law and tw, A. l'ax, F.Mid. TEONHKJl, F. TS#>^'!W, igqaopiu. ( 96. 16, 4, 7, wtfwjloiia*. ( 96. 17, 8, 10: 102. N. 1.) 11: 91. N. 7: 99. N.) jUi and t r o) ( C J2), send, Imperf. VT^V or lovy, F. TJCTW, A. ^x, Perf. slxa, Perf. Pass. ^ucu, A. Pass. e-S-rfv or d&yv, 2 A. ^ (not used in the sing, of the Jrac?.), w, efyy, I'^-i, or eg, elv/, elg, 2 A. Mid. ^uijy or sifjtvjv, w^ai, cl'^eijv, lao or ov, fa^at, f^yoff. ( 96. 1: 104. N. 2 : 80. N. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 117. N. 11, 13.) The Present and Imperfect, and the Second Aorist Active and Middle are inflected as follows : Present Active. IND. S. 'ir^u fyg D. Present Passive and Middle. S. tsfiat, D. l'Tt tSftS&OV ILSJOV P. fft )> laai(v) INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 118. SUBJ. tw, like 'ii&w from SUBJ. lu^ai, like OPT. lelqv, like Tt&slrjv. OPT. lelfiyv, like IMP. o. !'$*, tTw, /X le- IMP. $. IWo or v, jP. I'erf, Z). lea^oy, isa&(* Isa&waav. INF. icvai. INF. lisa&ou. PART, lelg, s7cra, eV. PART, l^pevog, 77, ov. Imperfect Active. Imperf. Passive and Middle. S. Hyv f fyg, fy, D. HsfisVf S. isftTjv, teao or I'ov, I'ero, IETOV, ihrjv, P. fofisv, D. ispt&ov, Isa&ov, lea isif, tsaav. . P. Itfis&a, ! f g(j#, ISVTO. Second Aorist Active. Second Aorist Middle. IND. S. yv S. spy yg sao r) ITO, tho D. spw, fipsv D. eps&ov, STOV, shov su&ov, sia&ov sroVf SiTrjv P. fy^&iw P. STS, sits ea&s, tio soar, slaav eVro, elvro SUBJ. w, inflected like the SUBJ. w^a/, inflected like the Present. Present. OPT. ffyv, like the Pres- OPT. tipyv, like the Present, ent. IMP. s-d-i, like the Present. IMP. Tao, like the Present. INF. eh'ui. INF. so&cKt,. PART, tig, tiaa, sv. PART, tptvog, r], ov. NOTE 1. The Present Ind. 3d peris, plur. IZn is contracted from /&/. ( 117. N. 2.) NOTE 2. For Imperf. Act. ftp, there occurs a form ft/, found only in composition. NOTE 3. Homer has F. !, A. IW, 'hxu. ( 95. N. 2 : 8O. N. 3.) NOTE 4. The form lavreu for Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. ilvroti, is obtained as follows: 'EH, 'OH, peu t M/ACU, iarou. ( 96. 19: 80. N. 3.) See 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 153 Ixveo^ca and Ixarw and txw, come, Perf. I^u, F. Mid. llo^uat, 2 A. Mid. ( 96. 5, 10, 7.) NOTE. Homer has A. Act. 3d pers. plur. 3|av for 7gav. ( 85. N. 2.) 'lAUMl ^lAASl], am propitious, Imperat. Ua&t- or U^t, Perf. (as Present) Subj. ttj- x, O/?. llyxoipi, F. Mid. A. Mid. pat, 2 A. I'o^ov. Mid. pou, restrain myself. ( 96. 1, 10: 95.2.) IfL, see eipi, go. K. KAdSl, see xalvvfioti. xa&e^oficei (XT, e&pai), sit down, Imperf. exa&t^ofiyv, A. Pass, exa&sa&rjv (later), 2 F. Mid. xad-edoviicti. (14. 1: 82. N. 1.) Mid.' lldaxo^ (rarely aJ - xa f **" >*' .f^)' 5/ ^> ucu), propitiate. (96.8: Im P erf ' ^^^.1 95. N. 2.) na^uat (lITAJl, 'lIITHMl), F. Mid. Trir;^, 2 A. I'- v, 2 A. Mid. ima^v, =. i, which see. (96.1.) Icjxw, see ei'axa). 'iairiiii (2TAfL), place, cause to Stand, F. aTTfaw, A. earrjaa, Perf. lar^xa stand, later a/rx ^we placed, Pluperf. standing, Perf. Pass. !em*- ^f , A. Pass. t P. txsia&ov NOTE. The Present x/ or i/ has the signification of the Future, /ie f/ozt'?i / also, desire to lie down. ., command, F. Mid. x- xf'x^axo', Perf. Pass. , A. Mid. IxFltjadnyv, or xsxsQctGpai, A. Pass. - 2 A Mid. Xx>lo^t^^ for ^x- ygd&riv or exsQMO&iyv. (^96. xeloarjv. ( 96 10 : 78. 9 : 26. 1 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 2 : 26. 1.) N. 1.) uT r w, prick, regular. From For Aor. Act. Inf. xtfifai, KENTJl, A. Inf. xevoai. Homer has *&), mix, xeydavw (in writers not Attic F. xf(jw, A. exf'^atftt, Perf. xegdyaw), A. exigdava (not 118.] Attic ANOMALOUS VERBS. 155 ), Perf. dwx or 7, 10.) xw, see x/J<5w (KA/lfL}, trouble, vex, worry, F. Mid. xxa<5?jcH, 2 A. Mid. Part, xhvpevog as adjective, celebrated, famous. ( 78. N. 2: 117. N. 10.) anxious about, care for. KMAfL, see (96. 18, 10, 11:95.N.2.) dnjiM, Mid. Ki&v#pvn> ^^ oxl- xtxbjaxw (KAAfL), = xaJlea). ($00. 17,1,8.) WIAI. ( 96. 16, 6.) xt/ui'M (K/XJL), reach, finely F. Mid. xixfaopou, A. Mid. e'xt- Xmjapnpi 2 A. ext^ov. From KIX1IMI, 2 A. ex^i^r, $%'. Xf^w (Epic xt^e/w), Op^. ja- X^Vj Inf. xi%rjvou, Part. y.i #& 2 A. Mid. Pa?-/, x/^f afro?. (96.7, 10. 117. N. 17, 15.) *WQW L (XQUM)) fond, the rest from^otft?, which see. ( 96. xrw, g"0, Imperf. ex/ov. xiicfw (KAATSl\ clang, F. xAtf'Sw, A. IxAa/|a, 2 A. I- y, 2 Perf. xe'xA?^ or xs f - . From xsxybj/w, Pres. 6x^>;y. f 96. 4, 6, 18, 11.) a/w or xAw, ?^fp, F. x>Lat?f(Ta} or xA?/(jw. From K^iATJl, A. exAavaa, F. Mid. x/Lwuao^ wcu, yMwaovuou. ( 96. 10 : 114. N. 1.) a'w, break, xAacrw, I'xAftaa, xs- From KAHMI, 2 A. Par/?. (KOPSl), satiate, F. A. txoQsaa, Perf. , Perf. Pass, xsxo^s- (Ionic *#ogiwf*e), A. Pass, txoysa&rjv. ( 96. 10, 9 : 95. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.) fL), cry, F. X|M, F. Mid. xQnSopou, 2 Perf. xx^/ synonymous with the Present. From /GE- KPAFJi), F. Mid. xsx^w- o;ueu, A. (later) fxexoci|a. (90-4,11.) NOTE. Forms without the con- necting vowel, 2 Perf. 1st pers. plur. xt*ay,av, Imperat. 2d pers. sing, xex^a^/, 2 Pluperf. 1st. pers. plur. i*ix&;#. xe6ptf4ifi> or F. Mid. (117.) (later x^f^aw), 5?/s- ??^, F. xoF/i'(jw or , A. cx^^^aw, A. Pass. (969:95. N.I: 102. N. 2: 109. N.I.) vttpat, Imperf. fitgilfiv&pip' :=: preceding. ( 96.6: 117.) , possess, Perf. Mid. xs- xzT/^uat and ix 156 XTJ(j#ae, Part. x- XTIUISVOJ, F. Mid. XTTjcJO^Uttt, A. Mid. exjyaduvv, ($$ 76. N. 3:91.N. 3.) Tf/vo) and xilvrvui (KTENJl, KTAfL), kill, F. XTSVW, A. i'xTf}'j Perf. ixTotxa and - xroV?;xa, Perf Pass. wrapou, A. Pass, sx-tu&rjv (sometimes MTtXV&rjv), 2 A. tXTdVOV, 2 Perf. I'xTOJ/a. From KTHMI, 2 A. fXTJ>, XTW, XtaltJVf XT- , 2 A. Mid. exTeejuip, jdpsvo?. ( 96. 5, 19, 18, 16, 9, 13: 117. N. 10.) Homer has also F. xravia, x,>'. ( 96. 14, 10: 78. N. 2.) VM, tkctvov or jjX(xvov, Ai/aw, i'Aofuaa, used only in the compound 7roAua;, which see. ( 78. N. 1.) AAXfL, see A/^rw. Aty&>, collect, &>, |, Perf. stAo- ^, Perf. Pass, ti'faypai, 2 A. , Pass. e'Aey^y. ( 76. N. 1 : 98. N. 2.) Jftya, say, is regular. . NOTE. Forms without the con- necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. iXiy^v, 3d pers. sing. Xixro, for iXty^unfj iXt-ytro. (^ 92. N. 4 : 7.) AEXJl, came to lie down, w, |, A. Mid. s^otfjtijv lay down, 118.] ANOMALOUS YERKS. 157 Impcrat. (in Homer) Inf. Af'atx>?i'. (96. 18: 95. N. I.) MAKJl, see ^r\yiao^.at. (MAO ft), learn, un- 14 2 A. (also >), 2 .) (Epic 114. der stand, Perf F. Mid. na i'fjta&ov, 2 F. Doric contracted from (96. 7, 10: 114. N. 2: 23. N. 1.) XQvaftoti, Jight, Opt. fiaQval- fit]v or naQvolfiriv, Imperf. tyaQVafinjv, inflected like UJTO^WOU. TTTW (MAPHJl), take hold of, seize, F. paQyw, A. fym^a, 2 A. I'fiotQTiov ffAUTiov, without the Perf. fiifia^a. ( 96. (I nic jiVZtGfut combat, Perf. Mid. F. Mid. ^uHjo,M A. Mid. 2 F. Mid. (96.10: 95. N. 2: N. 2.) and ^ai^aw, desire, am eager, strive, feel a strong impulse, 2 Perf. /UE/UMU sy- nonymous with the Present. Mid. px'o^at, desire, seek, Impcrat. JJWEO, Inf. //a~(j3r.a. (96. N. 2: 116. N. 7.) The 2 Perf. ^s^aa is inflected, as far as it goes, like (Zifiotot. ( 91. N. 7.) &vaxw ( t L>uco), ?.'?/7A:c drunk, intoxicate, F. ^tfiujw, A. ffjil&vaa, A. Pass, fpt&va&riv. Mid. ii&voxo{iai, am intoxi- cated. (96. 8: 95. N.I.) , am intoxicated, equiva- lent to the Middle of the preceding. MEIPJl(MEPJl), divide, share, Perf. Pass. 3d pers. sing. it is fated, Part. fated, destined, 15S INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 118. Pluperf. Pass, 3d pers. sing. elfiofQTo it was fated, 2 A. eppogov I obtained, 2 Perf. efjLfioga have obtained. Mid. peloopai,, receive a share, obtain. ( 96. 18, 19 : 76. N. 1 : 79. N. 3.) The augment a of the Perf. and Pluperf. Pass, takes the rough breathing. The forms fAtfiogqr are sometimes used for . ( 96. 13.) u, am about to be or do any thing, shall, F. [isttyow, A. c>a^a. (96. 10.) eho, am a concern to, F. pt- >t?j(jw, A. sjuelrjaot, 2 Perf. (Epic) PBM)M. ( 96. 10, 18.) The epic poets have Perf. Pass. 3d pers. sing. /u,if*fi*.sTai for ptftl- Xsra/. ( 26. N,) and plprw, remain, F. w, A. estiva, Perf. usue- a. ( 96. 1, 10:26. 1.) MENJl (not to be confounded with the preceding), intend, purpose, 2 Perf. pspovct sy- nonymous with the Present. ( 96. 19.) yxdopou (MAKSl), bleat, 2 A. BittrxQ?; 2 Perf. fisprixa. From ptfJL^xv, Imperf. f^ic- v. (96. 18, 10, 11.) , stain, regular. Homer (11.4, 146) has A. Pass. 3d pers. plur. fiiavd-^v for plav- &fv for tuiuv&riaav. ( 92. N. 1.) lyvvfit and (tlayto (MITJl), mix, F. ^u/lu), A. e/ue|a, Perf. Pass, fiifiiyfioti, A. Pass. efilxfryv, 2 A. Pass, tuiyriv. ( 96. 9, 14.) NOTE. Form without the con- necting vowel 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. sing. ifUM>r or fiixro for I^a/ysra. ( 91. N. 4: 7.) pipvifajxto (MNAJ2), cause to remember, remind, F. A. efivyaa, Perf. Mid. pefi pen, remember, Subj. (sai,, Opt. prjv or fiepvolprjv (Ionic fitpvscpjLirjv), Imp. nepvyao, Inf. (isfivqu&ait Part, [livog, A. Pass. 3 F. ptpvyaofLict*, F. Mid. (afyaofiai,, A. Mid. tpvrjadprjv. Mid. pipitfaxouai, remind myself, remember. ( 96. 1,8: 91. N.3: 109. N. 1.) plftvia, see MNAJl, see MOAfL, see fjwxvopcu (MTKJl), bellow, ya [icti, yaoiftrjv, 2 A. sftvxov, 2 Perf. ^i^vxa. (96. 10.) IV. ya/w (NAJl), dwell, A. IVaaa caused to dwell, p laced, Perf. Pass. vBvaafjLui, A. Pass. V- a&yv, F. Mid. ra(jo(jLai, A. Mid. iraadiiijv. ( 96. 18: 95. N. 1 : 107. N. J : 109. N. I.) j'aWw, pe& closely, stuff, F. y|w, A. IV|, Perf. Pass. vevaapai,. ( 96. N. 4.) IV14J2, see j>/w. ye/uo), distribute, F. ra^w or ?faw, A. tvsiptx, Perf. i/cpjf- t, Perf. Pass. yerefiTjfiat, A. Pass. lv*nri&ifi or fvsfj.8- ), Perf. Iw'paxa, Perf. Pass. ero'gHx/icM. From i'/JJl (which see), 2 A. tldov, Ida, 1'dotfj.i,, Ids, id sir, t$wV, 2 A. Mid. fidofirp, I'd to pa i, idolpyv, Idov, idku&(ti,id6{ifro0a#, Perf. Mid. oQtogtfiai, 2 Perf. OQWQOI have risen, 2 A. Mid. MQO^V. Mid. oQWfAcu, also o^o^uea, oQsofint,, rouse myself, arise. h 96. 9, 10: 103. N. 1 : 104. N.-6: 81.) NOTE. Forms without the con* necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. sing, agro, Imperat. 2d pers. sing. a^ and %PSI), smdl, F. Mid. CHJcpyrjaoptxi, A. Mid. Kt(i(fQi t (jd^iriv (later), 2 A. Mid. &Kjqpo<7jU??v rarely wacpgci- /ii?r. ( 96. 7, 10: 85. a N. 2.) i'^'o), mingo, Imperf. tovytov, F. Mid. ovorjvouui. ( 80. N. 2.) oviaar, wound, regular. From OTTHMI, 2 A. ot5i^, ///. (Epic) omd[itvai or ovidpsr t 2 A. Mid. Pr#. oind^vo<; as Passive, wounded. ( 117. N. 10, 17.) oqpH'AG) (OftEASl), owe, must, ought, F. oqpsi^aw, A. ca^c/- ^a. ( 96. 18, 10.) The 2 A. uQ&ov and o$i*.ov, ?, s, always expresses a wis/j, Mai / wowW to God! ( 217. N. 3, 4.) ocphaxdva (OftslJl), incur, for- feit, F. og)X?jaw, Perf. wqpiij- x, 2 A. u^oy. ( 96. 8, 7, 10.) IIAOJI, see nalw, play, jest, enaiaa, TIB- nouapai, enala&rjv, F. Mid. nal^ofjiait na^ov^ai. In later writers, fnatSa, ninaiy^ui 9 inal X driv. ( 96. N. 6: 114. N. 1.) 7Hx/o>, strike, F. nalaw and 7iwt?Jcjra>, A. iTiaiatx, Perf. TTS- Tratxa, Perf. Pass. ninaiGyiui, A. Pass, enala&yv. ( 96. 10: 107. N. 1: 109. N. 1.) Trao^w (HAOJl, IIENOJl), suf- fer, A. ETiijcra (not common), F. Mid. nslaofjtou (rarely TTT?'- (jo^uat), 2 A. sTiatfor, 2 Perf. ninov&a (rarely nin^a}. (^ 96. 6, 18, 19, N. 10: 12. 5.) NOTE. The form r65ro. From nAHMl comes 2 A. Mid. tnl^v. ( 26. 1: 117. N. 15.) Ke'Ao), revolve, move about, am, Imperf. 3d. pers. sing. &rAs for I'jrde. Mid. n^o^iav sy- nonymous with the Active, Part. nJiopevog used only in composition, Imperf. 2d pers. sing, e'jiteo tTihsv thou art, 3d pers. sing . I'jzvUro he is. (26. 1: 23. N. 1.) IlENOJl, see rctnoa&s, see , pedo, F. Mid. nugdyao- i, 2 A. enagdor, 2 Perf. a. Mid. negdo^ai, sy- nonymous with the Active. ( 96. 19, 10.) 8Q&W, Sack, 7lQ(JW, STlSQOOtt 2 A. l'7roa#o. ( 96. 19 : 26. 2.) NOTE. Homer has 2 A. Mid. /ft/*, rtfiu.i without the connecting vowel for #ifilv*h ( 92. N. 4: 10. 2: 11.) neaaw, later TISTHM, boil, digest, F. TTsy/w, A. I'TI(/;, Peri. Pass, nintniitti, A. Pass. Insy&yv. ( 96. 2.) nndvvv^Li (IIETASL}, expand, spread, F. nvtaaw or TTTW, A. eTisTctaa, Perf. Pass. TTS- maou, A. Pass. c7iT'a^v. 96. 9 : 95. N. 1 : 102. . 2: 109. N. 1: 26. 1.) , fly, F. Mid. nei^oo- l, 2 A. ETlTOflTjV (for 67TSTO- o&ai, Ttro^ievog. ( 96. 10 : 26. 1.) IIETJl, See 7T/7TTO). IIETOfL, see nvv&dvonou. nicpvov, see &ENJI. nriyvvjjii (jlATS^), later jr?J(jaw, jfa, fasten, F. 7riJ|w, A. I'^la, Perf. Pass. TiEny/pai, A. Pass. inrix&riv, 2 Perf. Tienyyot stand fast, 2 A. Pass. eW- y^y. ( 96. 18, 9, 3.) UHOfL, see Trceo^w. niOESl (niOSl], obey, follow, trust, m&yow also neni^ow, InlSriaa. (96. 10, 11.) niOSl, see 7r/^w and the pre- ceding. , - nih^i and mlvaw Mid. ni).vafAai, which see. (96. 16, 6.) nlfinlrjfii and m^nldo) (nAAJl}, Jill, F. TiAifffft), A. IVrA^aa, Perf. ninl^a, Perf. Pass. nenlrjafioti, A. Pass. a&rjv, 2 A. Mid. Opt. nfalfirjv, Imperat. oo, Part. Ti^fisvoc. ( 96. 1 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1 : 117. N. 15.) The letter ^, in the first sylla. ble, is dropped when, in composition, IG2 INFLECTION OF WORDS. another p comes to stand before the first syllable of this verb ; as t^- tt*cXtyt4, not ifA-viju.vXyiui. The same is observed of sr/^sy^^/. JllfATtQTjf.ll and 7llfJ,7lQ(X(0 (llPASl), burn, F. TT^aw, A. engrjaa, Perf. Pass. ningria^ai, A. Pass. Ing^o^v. (. 96. 1 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.) For the omission of ^ in com- position, see y- ^/, am prudent, animated, intelli- gent, A. Pass. 3d pers. sing, l-rvvv^jj used in the compound a^-wvyi'S-fl, from Ktafviuy 2 A. Mid. (from IINTM!) io^y. ( 96. 6: 117. N. 15.) or, desire, miss, and aa, v. ( 95. N. 2 : 109. N. 1.) 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 163 l, give, 2 A. ZTIOQOV, Perf. Pass. 3d. pers. sing. ntngw- tai it has been decreed by fate, Part. ncTiQWfievog des- tined. ( 96. 17.) JIOJI, see nivto. UPAJl, see nl[A7igr][ti. I1PIAMAI, buy, 2 A. Mid. or ngiaoo or nglw, 7T/ TlQLfffiSVOg. ( 117. N. 9.) /7POJ2, see IIOPJI. UTAfL, see iTnapcu, mr)0aw. 7IT7?lw, A. taxrjhx, Perf. I' drzW Wj0, F. Mid. From 2KAHM1, 2 A. I oxhalrjv, G^r^vai. Mid. /ii, tat *Aer. ( 96. 6, 17, 18.) otxldvripi, (2KE4AJI), Mid. vxl- dvapai, =. (jxtdavvvfu, which see. (96.6, 16.) aovpcti (oreuco), Imp. 2d. pers. sing, oovao, 2 A. Pass. 3d pers. sing, taaova, in compo- sition dntaaova (Laconic) he is gone, he is dead, =. osvfiat, from asvw, which see. ( 96. N. 15.) aow, see (jojw. aneo&cu, see enco. 2TASI, see lattjfii. CfTfQSCO Or (JTS()l(JXCO (2TEPSI), deprive, bereave, F. areQijaai, A. 6aTQr}, see ^w, To^w. (Epic (jow), save, asacoxoc, (oraw),n=preceding. (116. N. 7.) TATSl, see TAAAfL, bear, suffer, venture, A. fTAa, Perf. -csrtyxct, 2 Perf. xirloKx, Opt. Tttlalrv Imp. ihla&i, Infin. From TAHMI, 2 A. T ( 26. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 91. N. 7: 117. 12.) F. xa^ufi'o), Ionic, nr T8- TAFSl, take, Imperat. 2d pers. sing. TT? (contracted from T) #aX:e thou, 2 A. Par/. TTa/wV, Epic. (23. N. 1 : 78. N. 2.) TWO* (TENJI, TAJI), stretch, extend, F. Tevw, A. Irs^a, Perf. xeraxa, Perf. Pass. Tsrce- wi, A. Pass. Tci&yw (rarely TC'^UW), cwf, F. T- ^uw, Perf. xsTprjxa, Perf. Pass. TfiT^^uat, A. Pass. 3r/fi}ipv2 A. TS(j,ov and erocfiov, 2 A. M. trapCM*. (96.5,17,19.) or tTSTfiov, I found, met ivith, a defective 2 A. Act ( 78. N. 2.) 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 165 TETXfL, see ri'/^wVw. it], see TAfL, take. TIESl, Perf. Part. xmr/w's af- flicted, Perf. Mid. i^lfi^ai am afflicted, am sorrowful. (09. N.) Tl&ijUi, (rarely Ttxh'w, th'w), jw, j9/ce, F. #?7(jw, A. '#77- xa, Perf. is&fixa, Perf. Pass. T&ei{iai, A. Pass, hi&rp, A. Mid. ed-itxdiMjv (not Attic), 2 A. I'tfyr, #w, &*lijv, friti or #&, -d-en'Od, &elg, 2 A. Mid. ^>^. ( 96. 1 : 104. N. 2:95. N. 2, 4 : 14. 3, N.3: 117. N. 11, 13.) T/XTOO (TEKJl), bring forth, F. Ts'Sw, A. Pass, (later) hi^^v, F. Mid. To[jiai, 2 A. Irexor, 2 Perf. TeToxa, 2 F. Mid. ^uat, 2 A. Mid. (poetic) er TPArJl, see TPASl, see , llVVVfJLl, =T/W, Ao/Z- or, which is regular. ( 96. 5,9.) iw (TPAJl), bore, F. r^ij- (jw, A. eiQrjoot, Perf. Tcr^ijxa, Per. Pas. TSTo^ t . (96,1.) JtJxw (TOJPJ2), wound, F. CFW, A. t'jQwaa, Perf. T- , Perf. Pass. jsTQOjfjni, A. Pass. liQuSriv. ( 96. 17, 1, 8.) ai (TTKfL), prepare, take aim at, 2 A. TSTVXOV, 2 A. Mid. TSTVXO^V, Epic. (96. 1, 14: 78. N. 2.) TAASl, see TAAASl. TMESl, TMAfL, see TS//VD). T0^)5&) ( TO PJi), pierce, TOQT^OM, &c. 2 A. i' ro? oy. ( 96. 10.) TOPll, see TQecpca (OPJl), nourish,feed, support, F. &Qsyw, A. t'^^s- y/tf, Perf. T6TQO(f)(x, Perf. Pass. te&Qtxufiai, A. Pass. ^- (p&riv, 2 A. TQct(pov (Epic), 2 A. Pass. Irgayriv. ( 14. 3 : 96. 19 : 107. N. 6.) (OPEXfL), run, A. I'^s- , F. Mid. &QgofAixi. From 4PAMJI or JPEMJl (which see) come Perf. c^jwpjxa, Perf. Pass. dtdQapqfiai, 2 A. i90Qp>* 2 Perf. (Epic), F. Mid. doc ( 14. 3.) (TPAFJl), eat, gnaw, F. Mid. TQW^OUttl, 2 A. eTQOtYOV. ( 96. 19. yxavw (TTXJl), happen, at- tain, A. eivx^aa (Epic), Perf. i^r/x, Perf. Mid. (poetic) i, F. Mid. i, 2 A', eryxov. ( 96. 7, 10, 18.) ( TTIMl), strike, F. TI'(//O> commonly xvmr^M, A. eTuya, Perf. Ttrvrj[il. see &ENJI, &ENJI ( AJl} t kill, Perf. Pass. (which see), A. TJW/xa, Perf. 4vyvoxa, Perf. Pass, frfae/pai,, A. Pass, yvex&qv, 2 A. jjvtv- {, y F. o (TrfL), flee, escape, Mid. qpevj-ofiai, ysv&vpou, nicprov or msyvor. ( 96. 5, 19:95. N. 2: 78. N. 2 : 26. 1.) , bring, carry, bear, Im- perf. tysQov. From O/J2, F. ol'cjw, A. Imperat. 2d pers. sing. oias. From ENEFKfL and qpa'crxw (YZfL), and Perf. Pass, Part. veQwyftivos hav- ing escaped. IND. S. SUBJ. S. qpw, '#*( 1 4. N, 4) D.yaTOV P. cpdis yaw? (paTWcrctv, ( INF. OAJl), come before, anticipate, F. (p&daM, A. l'g)^(j, Perf. f^^x, F. Mid. c^aotai. From MI, 2 A. tyfryv, (f&u, ydai- yv, (p&yvai, y&dq, 2 A. Mid. {(p&dfArjV, (p&dfitrog. ( 96. 5:95. N. 2: 117.) ANOMALOUS VERBS. 107 lrw, cpSiw, consume, perish, (p&law, 8U'w, Jove, regular. From the simple (PIAfL, A. Mid. eyi- Idftrjv, Imperat. 2d pers. sing. qTdou, Epic. 8w, carry, bear, wear, regu- lar. From &OPI2MT, Inf. (in Homer) nooijvai. ( 117. N. 17.) ^G)), cpQi'jaw, &c. used only in composition. From PHMI comes 2 A. Imp. Wig. ( 96. 17: 117. N. 11.) TZ&, see qpfiyw. vot), produce, cpvaw, scpvaa, rii- cpvxa am, 2 Perf. nscpva am, 2 A. Pass, (later) eyvyv. From &TMI, 2 A. lyw aw, Subj. cpvco, Opt. cpvyv, Inf. (pvvoti, Part. g)vg. (^ 117. N. 7, 16.) X. A4JI, see ^fw, xavdavw. &o (XAJJl, KA/JSl), yield, give way, F. xsxw^Tjao) sAa// deprive, 2 A. vexadovlmade to give way, deprived, 2 A. Mid. xsxaflopfv. ( 96. 4, 10, 11 : 78. N. 2.) (XANSl, XAfi.), com- monly ^ffxo?, ^joe, 2 A. %ttvov, 2 Perf. xs%r]V(x, F. Mid. ^yov^f. ( 96. 5, 18, 8.) /^D> (XAPJl), rejoice, F ^t- ^ijffw, Perf. xEjfceo^fttXj Perf. Pass. xt% use * (95. N. 3: J16. N. 2.) yf? 1 ? (^ ww )> ^ * s necessary, Im- personal, >S^w6;. ^?J, Op#. ^4>f/?/, Jw/*. xqrivou, Part. neut. x.Q f v > Iniperf. f^^v or ^^i, F. ^ifae^. The compound ano^ij, it is enough, has Inf. anoxgyv, Imperf. ani%Qr\. NOTE. The IND. ^ regularly would be^j?, ( 116. N. 2.) The OPT. %g&iy and the INP. 168 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 119. Xfivott come from %$&) (Ionic N , ip XPHMI. (6 116. N. 8: 117. , 7 , N. 17.) yitfw, coo/, y/vlw, &c. 2 A. The PART. X p& stands for Pass - tyvynv (as if from tf^v. ( 116. N. 9.) WTFJl) The Imperfect l;jv is contracted J2. from^M. ( 116. N. 3). For ^ e v, see above ( 78. N. 3: <#W (JIOJL), push, Imperf. 93. N. 4 : 23. N. 3). ftJdvM F - #??(7 or waoi, (XPOJl), color, F. A. IWa, Perf Iwxa, Perf. , A. f'xgwaa, Perf. xs- Pass. tW^uaf, A. Pass, ew- , Perf. Pass. xexQCoaficu, a^r/r,F.Mid. oKjo^uca. (96. A. Pass, togrio&iiv. f 96. 10 : 80. N. 2.) 9 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.) oW 0| wcu, &wy, Imperf. %K>vvv[ii (%6w), heap up, dam, Perf. Pass, etovtjfiai, F. Mid. F. ^cJfjw, A. ^w(j, Perf. x- wvyaoiiat,, A. Mid. (not Attic) ^a)x, Perf. Pass, xs^oafioti, eoiv^aa^v or wvrjaafiyv. (80. A. Pass. 4ro)'. E. g. ^v, according to (his) wealth, from TrAoCio?, riches. 12O. Adverbs answering to the question noodxig, HOW OFTEN ? end in dug. Such adverbs are derived from adjectives. E. g. avxvdxig, often, from av%v6g, frequent. For the numeral adverbs, see above ( 62. 4). 121. 1. Adverbs answering to the question nodi or nov, WHERE? IN WHAT PLACE? end in &i or oi(v). E. g. avTo&t, in that very spot, from amog. The termination ac(r) is chiefly appended to names of towns. It is preceded by rj ' but when the nominative singular of the noun ends (or would end) in a pure or qa, it is preceded by at. E. g. 'Ad-yvriai, at Athens, from 'Adyvou, Athens ; OWTUOHH, at ThespicB, from Oeamal, Thespia. (1) Some adverbs of this class end in ov or a%ov. E. g. avTov, there, from amog ' navTu%ov, everywhere, from nag, nav- rog. (2) Some end in ot. E. g. 'la&nol, at the Isthmus, from Yavtyioff, Isthmus. (3) The following adverbs also answer to the question WHERE ? /^t or ay%ov, avexug, itvw, e/yvg, exdg, exti, exrog, tvdov, tv&a or tv&dde or ei>T(xv&a (Ionic lv&avw) t eviog, t|w, laco, I'xra^, XTW, n&cxg, TiEQct and ni^av, n'^olov, TIOQQW, TiQoaca, ryks or rykov, wds, and some others. NOTE 1. The adverb afoo/, ctf /zome, from 7aj, house, takes the acute on the penult. ( 20. N. 1.) 2. Adverbs answering to the question no&ev, WHENCE? FROM WHAT PLACE ? end in <&er. E. g. 3 A$r)vr)&ev,from Athens, from 'A&TJVCU, Athens; ovQav6&sv,from heaven, from ovgavog, heaven. Here belongs IV #aj> or fr&evds or WTEV&SV (Ionic Iv&tvTev), hence, thence, whence. 3. Adverbs answering to the question Trotjf, WHITHER? TO WHAT PLACE ? end in as, ds, or fg. E. g. cxgfog, thither, from ^x7, there; oixovds, to the house, home, from oTxo, house; 0y8a(s, to Thebes, from Or^Sai, Thebes. 15 170 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 122, 123. is appended to the accusative singular or to Jlight, imply nom. OIH, NOTE 2. In strictness, the ending plural of the noun. NOTE 3. The adverbs olxetii, home t an 4>TS, whence accus. olxet, Qvyot. 4. Adverbs answering to the question nr lt IN WHAT DIREC- TION ? end in r\ or ^ij. E. g. fiy, in no way, from ovda t u6g, none ; 'tt another direction, from a'J NOTE 4. The ending becomes >j only when the nominative of the adjective, from which such adverbs are derived, is not obsolete. 122. The following adverbs answer to the question n 6 T E, WHEN ? IN WHAT TIME ? asl r CtVQlor, Xa {x,oi& ciftg), as. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 133|. The comparative of an adverb derived from an adjective is the same with the neuter singular of the compara- tive, and the superlative is the same with the neuter plural of the superlative, of that adjective. E. g. ooqtwg, wisely, oocpwiegov, more wisely, aocpwTona, most wisely, from aocpog, wise. ( 57.) yddmg, pleasantly, ydlov, more pleasantly, ydiaTtx, most pleas- antly, from ydvg, pleasant. ( 58.) NOTE 1. Some adverbs of the comparative degree end in us. E. g. ^aXs- 9T&>;, goi.Xfx'u'rigus, from ^aXswoj. Superlatives in us are rare. NOTE 2. Some comparative and superlative adverbs end in u, particularly when the positive ends in ea. E. g. civu, up, avuri^u, a-vurtirea. NOTE 3. The following adverbs are anomalous in their comparison : tLyW or a.y%ou, near, Wov, eiy^nrra. (Compare 58. N. I.) ixdif, afar t izao-rigea, txotffraru. ( 125. N. 2.) ivbov, within, tvSoTtgeit, tv^oTUTw. (ibid.) ftdiXa., very, ^aAXov, more, rather, fteiXiffree, very much, especially. vvKna^, nightly, by night ; vux,rKx,tTtoov, farther back in the night, that is, ear- lier in the morning, vyxT/a/V/x-ra, very early in the morning. rtiget, farther, beyond, iri^ctiri^u or vrtpctirtgov, fftoa.iTu.Tu. (ibid.) ^ov^yov, to the purpose, r^ou^yiKir^ov, more to the purpose, v^ov^yiKtrATet, very muck to the purpose. 172 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ 126, 127. DERIVATION OF WORDS. ISO. All words, which cannot be proved to be deriva- tive, must be considered as primitive. DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 127. Substantives derived FROM OTHER SUB- STANTIVES end in idqg, adqg, ludyg, Iwv, Ig, , Ivy, iwvrj, patronymics : iov, Idiov, (xQior, vXhov, vdyiov, vcpiov, laxog, vMog or vkog, Ig, diminutives : tog, fT??, (XTqg, yir)g, ifarjg, iwTrjg, avog, yvog, Ivog, mg, a, ig, ag, (ar, WVLU, Trig, iig, aact, icrva, appellatives. 1. PATRONYMICS, that is, names of persons derived from their parents or ancestors, end in idyg, adyg, tudyg, gen. ov, and iwv gen. cwog, masculine : ig gen. idog, ag gen. adog, and ivt\, iwvr], feminine. (1) Patronymics from nouns in 77$ or ?, of the jirst declen- sion, end in adiig (fern. ^). E. g. C l7in6iijg t c l7inoTad^g son of Hippotes ; Bogeag, BoQsddrjg son of Boreas. (2) Patronymics from nouns in og and toe, of the second declension, end in idyg (fern, ig) and ia8vjg (fein. tag) respec- tively. E. g. Kgovag, Kgovldyg son of Saturn; 3 4axhr}mog, *Aaidr)niadrig son of jEsculapius. In this case, the poets often use icav (fern, ivy, iwvy) for idyg E. g. Kgovltav for Kgovldyg ' "Adgyaiog, 'Adgyailvy daughter of Adrastus. (3) Patronymics from nouns of the third declension are formed by dropping og of the genitive of the primitive, and annexing idyg (fern, ig) or iadyg. E. g. /Zfi'Aoi//, nog, Zldomdyg son of Pelops ; ftegyg, yTog, ftsQyTuxdyg son of Pheres ; "Artag, VTOC, *Ailavii$ daughter of Atlas. The poets sometimes use iwv for idrjg. E. g. Uylevgj eog, v son of Peleus. NOTE 1 . The epic poets often form patronymics from nouns in ts, by drop- ping os of the Ionic genitive ( 44. N. 2), and annexing talus, ts. E. g. ITj- tevs %os, nX)$jj? 5071 of Peleus ; "B^ttr&vs, yo$, Bgjffn?; daughter of Briseus. Feminine patronymics in iV are sometimes contracted in the oblique cases. E. g. Njgsvf, no;, N^j?f daughter of Nereus, Nereid, gen. plur. N^si^v. 2. A DIMINUTIVE signifies a small thing of the kind denoted by the primitive, 128.] DERIVATION OP WORDS. 173 Diminutives end in iov, idiov, UQIOV, vttiov, vdgior, vytov, neuter : taxog, vUog or vlog, masculine : taxy, ig gen. idog, fem- inine. E. g. av&gcanog, man, av&Qwmov, a little fellow; ox, fiofifov, a little ox ; Xtfys, tus> word, tefyftiov, a little word. In this case, the ending e^/ov often becomes tiiov. NOTE 3. Many diminutives in M have lost their diminutive signification. E. g. yrtiov, vt^iov, plain. 3. National APPELLATIVES end in tog, nyg, cnyg, yTyg, laryg, itaTrjg, avog, yvog, ivog, gen. ov, and evg gen. sog, masculine : , ig gen. idog, and ag gen. adog, feminine. E. g. Kogiv&og, Cor- inth, KoQlvdiog, a Corinthian ; ^Tuysiga, Stagira, a Stagirite ; Ttyia, Tegea, Ts/sotT^g, a Teg eon. NOTE 4. When the nominative singular of the noun denoting the place ends (or would end) in a, or , the ending 40$ is generally contracted with the preced- ing vowel. E. g. 'AS-Jjva/, 'A^nvuios. 4. Nouns denoting a place, where there are many things of the same kind, end in wv or ow. E. g. ddcpvq, laurel^ dayvwv, laurel-grove; $6dov t rose, godavid, rose-garden. 5. Many masculine appellatives end in rqg gen. ov. E. g. nolig, city, noUxrig, citizen ; 'innog, horse, iTinoTrjg, horseman, Those in iTqg have the i in the penult long. Feminine appellatives of this class end in tig, E. g. nottug, female citizen. 6. Some masculine appellatives end in evg. E. g. f innog, horse, Innsvg, horseman. 7. Some feminine appellatives end in aaa or taacc. E. g. Qgn*, a Tkracian, Ogaaaa, a Thracian woman ; paadwg, king, (Saalhaoa, queen. Substantives derived FROM ADJECTIVES end in la, irjg gen. r t iog, ovvrj, og gen. sog, a gen. ag, and ^. Such substantives denote the ABSTRACT of their primitives. E, g, xwx/a, vice from xaxog, wicked oSvTrjg, sharpness " o$vg, sharp dixnioovvr], justice " dlxaiog, just fiiid-og, depth " fia&vg, deep. NOTE 1. If the ending tct be preceded by i or o, a contraction takes place. E. g. Aj&/, trutk, from aXjjS^jjj, iog, true; civotet, folly, from civ oos, foolish. 15* 174 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 129. The ending UK often becomes /. E. g. a^aS/a for a^aSe/a, ignorance, from a^aS^jjf, ignorant, NOTE 2. Those in TJJ; are always feminine. They are generally paroxy. tone. ( 19. 2.) NOTE 3. If the penult of the primitive be short, the ending otrvvn becomes uffvvn. E. g. h^uffvvy, priesthood, from legos, sacred* NOTE 4. Those in os are always derived from adjectives in vg ( 51), by changing u$ into 05. NOTE 5. Abstract nouns in a. or t> f from adjectives in 0$, are always paroxy- tone ( 19. 2;. E. g. jy from #/ow, rejoice, ( 96. 18) pax*!, battle " ^1^0^.011, fight q, confutation " fAs'/^o), confute g, thing " ngdaao), do, ( 96. 3.) NOTE 1. When the radical vowel is either e, , or o, ( 96. 19,) verbal nouns of this class ( 129. 1) have o in the penult. E. g. Ao'/o?, word, from Ac'/w, sy. NOTE 2. Feminines in / come from verbs in tuu. E. g. jSa^/Xs/a, so^- reignty, from /3a, mn. 2. Verbal nouns denoting the SUBJECT of the verb ( 156) end in T^^) (fern. TSIQCX, TQIOC, jglg gen. /<5oc), T?;?, ra>(), v?, ^ (fern, ig gen. /5o?), a^, and og gen. ov. The penult of those in T^O, Trig, TWO, is generally like that of the perfect passive <$ 107). E. g. gvTJ]g, one who draws from c prJ2, <^r^ tioiTjTrjg, maker " noiew, make grjTWQ, speaker " C PEJ2, speak ygoupevg, writer " yyaqxa, write. NOTE 3. Those in rjg, &g, gen. ov, annex these endings to the last consonant of the verb. They are chiefly found in composition. E. g. ytwpsTQyg, geometer, from yea, earth, and fiSTQsm, measure ; (pvyado&rjQug, hunter of fugitives, from fugitive, and #7?0a'w, hunt. NOTE 4. Those in og are generally found in composition. E. g. pr]Too visible, capable of being seen. NOTE 1 . Sometimes verbal adjectives in rog have an active signification, E. g. Ktt\vf7oi, cover, xett.vx'ros, covering. 2. Verbal adjectives in reog imply necessity, obligation, or propriety. E. g. TIOLSW, make, noirjTsog, to be made, that must be made. NOTE 2. The penult of adjectives in res and nos is generally like that of the perfect passive ( 107). 3. A few verbal adjectives end in Ao?, vog. E. g. fear, dsdog, timid, dswog, terrible. 4. Many adjectives are formed from verbs by annexing yg gen. toe, og gen. ov, to the root. Such adjectives are generally found in composition. E. g. /*#??'?, ignorant, from - and [iav&dvw, ( 96. 7: 135. 4;) nolvhoyog, talkative, from nolvg and Uyu, ($| 135. I : 96. 19.) 5. Verbal adjectives in [iwv are active in their signification. E. g. 7iiaTi]fj.wv, knowing, from inLaTa^ai, know. 133. A few adjectives in wo$ are derived FROM AD- VERBS. E. g. %&ig, yesterday, xd-eaivog, yesterday's, of yesterday. DERIVATION OF VERBS. 134. Derivative verbs end in aw, c'w, ow, evw, a'w, /Jw, ctlvco, vvw, a/w, tw. 1. In verbs derived from nouns of the first and second de- clension, the verbal ending takes the place of the ending of the nominative ( 31. 1 : 33. 1). E. g. riprj, honor iipou*), I honor xotvwvog, partaker xonwvem, partake [iia&6g, wages pia&ow, let, hire dlxrj, justice dixa,q>of , geographer, from y, ygetQu* 2. When the first component part is a #er&, the connecting letter is or t. Sometimes i becomes 01. E. g. g, brave from fidvfa, IIUM vrof, thunder-ruling' " V^t, xtgawog g, receiving presents " di^o^ni, dwyov, ( 9. 2 ) NOTE 5. Sometimes 0v drcps / before a vowel. E. g. pi^aff^ns (for //^/a- */?, that is, ptv-tri-affvts), coward, from pinna, ufftrtf. (^> 96. 2 : 8. 2.) 3. The primitive PREPOSITIONS are the only ones with which other words are compounded. ( 226. 1.) These prepositions generally lose the final vowel, when the word, with which they are compounded, begins with a vowel ; except negl and nqo. E. g. av-dyw, lead up from uvd, ayw sTi-airsw, praise " inl, alvtto i), contain " nfgl, i'xio excel " nyo, f^w. NOTE 6. In TTQO, the o is often contracted with the following vowel. E. g. TIQOV^O) for TT^O^CO. NOTE 7. 'A^p/ often retains the t before a vowel. E. g. upQilvvvfu from Kfttp'l, iVVVftt. NOTE 8. The Epic language often drops the final vowel of a preposition even before a consonant. E. g. an-ni^n^ for ano- 718^710). 4. The negative prefix - (called alpha privative) corre- sponds to the English prefix MH-, or to the suffix -less. Before a vowel it generally becomes dv-. E. g. a-aocpog, unwise from -, oocpog a-xgrjaiog, useless " a-, xgriaiog ixv-dkiog> unworthy " -, ci&og. PART III. SYNTAX. SUBSTANTIVE. 136. 1. A substantive annexed to another substantive or to a pronoun, for the sake of explana- tion or emphasis, is put in the same case. E. g. g fiaailitvg, King Xerxes. Here (taaiUvg is an- nexed to ZbQ$r\s. TOV TrjQia, Me Tereus. A substantive thus annexed to another substantive is said to be in APPOSITION with it NOTE 1. Sometimes the substantive is repeated for the sake of emphasis. E. g. Aao9-oj 3-vyr7 "AXraa yi^ovros ' "^.Xr&u, o; AtXtyiffffi QiXovrro- tipoiffiv a,vaitrffti, Laothoe the daughter of old Attes ; of Altes who rules over the warlike Leleges. NOTE 2. The repeated noun ( 136. N. 1) is, in some instances, put in the nominative. E. g. ' Av$goju,ei%yi, B-uydrf)^ fAsyot.Xri'rogo; 'Her tuvos * 'H - riav, as tvoutv V-TTO TL^oixtu vXylfffy, Andromache the daughter of magnanimous Eelion ; Eetion, who dwelt at t/iefoot of woody Placus. NOTE 3. Sometimes a substantive supplies the place of an adjective. E. g. 2avj WA./; C EXX?, Sane, a Grecian city, where the substantive 'ExXay, Greece^ stands for the adjective 'EAAmx^, Grecian. REMARK. Personal or national appellatives are often accompanied by the word a,vyg, man. E. g. BamXsuj a v, a man who is a king, simply a king. "Av^sj 'A9-9}VK7ot, men of Athens, simply Athenians. NOTE 4, An abstract noun is often used for the corresponding concrete. E. g. 'lxtavov, Stay yivurtv, Oceanus, the parent of the gods, where the abstract yiv&ffiv, production, stands for the concrete ysv*r>jv, producer. NOTE 5. The limiting noun, which regularly is put in the genitive ( 173), sometimes stands in apposition with the limited noun. E. g. Asxa ftva7 tiffQoga, for Axa ^ttv&Jv tio-Qogu, a contribution often mints. 2. A substantive in apposition with two or more substantives is put in the plural. E. g. AplaTgyg, AQjoicpQEvrjg, xal Msyafia^yg, tayol USQ- owv, Amistres, Artaphernes, and Megabazes, leaders of the Persians. 180 SYNTAX. [ 137. ADJECTIVE. ^ 137. 1. An adjective agrees with its substan- tive in gender, number, and case. E. g. *Aviig aoqpo?, A wise man. 'Avdgbg aoyov, Of a wise man. "Avdgsg aoyol, Wise men. *AvS(>wv aoopwy, Of wise men. This rule applies also to the article, to the possessive, inter- rogative, and demonstrative pronouns, and to the participle. NOTE 1. A feminine substantive in the dual often takes a masculine adjective, article, pronoun, or participle. E. g. TOVTW TW rex vtx > for Tama ia re%va, These two curt s. NOTE 2. Sometimes the gender of the adjective or participle has reference to the gender implied in the substantive. E. g. ^u^vi QnZaiov Ttigitrieto, %(>vffiov a-K^-x-r^ov 6%cav, the soul of the Theban Tiresias, holding a golden sceptre, where the masculine t%&>* is used on account of Ttigiffiao. NOTE 3. In some instances the gender and number of the adjective or par- ticiple are determined by the noun governed by its substantive. E. g. IIT, two vultures uttering loud shrieks. NOTE 7. In Homer, the dual nouns oWe and ^ovp are accompanied by plural adjectives. E. g. "Orfft (p&nvec, two bright eyes. "AXx/^a $ovg&, two stout spears. NOTE 8. The duals luo and K^U are frequently joined to plural substantives. E. g. Ay'o -^v^oisj for Ay'o "^v^at,, two souls. 138. 1. An adjective is often used substantivcly, the substantive, with which it agrees, being understood. E. g. yvvoe.7)t,ex. a.yiff'&cti, effort $ov- Z.OIVTO e lxaAflr, the other good things* 3. The participle preceded by the article is equivalent to ixilvog og, he who, and the finite verb. E. g. Tovg noke pr) o MVT ag idlg fiagfidgoig, those who fought against the barbarians, where jovg nole^aviag is equivalent to exdvovg oi eno^s^oar. But no^^uuviag loig fiaQfidyoig would mean hav- ing fought against the barbarians. NOTE 3. Hence, a participle preceded by the article is often equivalent to a substantive. E. g. ol (pdoaoyovvTtg, equiv- alent to Ol (pdoaocpoi, the philosophers. NOTE 4. When the adjective stands before or after the sub- stantive and its article, the substantive with the article involves the relative pronoun og. E. g. Ov fidvavaov tr^v ii%vr\v SXTT;- od^v, equivalent to C H ifyvri, yv exTr}ad{ir]v t ov ftavctvaog eaxir t the art which I possess is not low. . 4. When a noun, which has just preceded, would naturally be repeated, the article belonging to it is alone expressed. E. g. Tov filov TWV idiwTsvoviwv, % TOV TWV TVQavvsvovitov, The life of private persons, or that of those who are rulers. NOTE 5. In certain phrases a noun is understood after the article. The nouns which are to be understood are chiefly the following : y ?J, land, country, as Elg ir^v iavxwv, To their own country. yv&W opinion, as XT ys TJ\V i^v t In my opinion at least. odog, way, as Tr\v TaxloTyv, The quickest way. nQccyfia, thing, as Tot rfg notewg, The affairs of the state. vlog, son, as C O Kfaivlov, The son of Clinias. 5. The demonstrative pronoun, and the adjective nag or vin a g, are placed either before the substantive and its article, or after the substantive. E. g. OvTog o ogvig, or *O ogvig ovvog, This bird. To ftdgog TOVTO, or Tovxo TO ftdgog, This burden. 'Ana v?n g Tovg ctQi&iiovg, OT Tovg aQi&[iovg anctv- rag, All the numbers. The article, however, in this case is often omitted. E. g. Oviog ar^g, this man. Ilavisg oiv&Qwnoi, oilmen, 184 SYNTAX. [ 141, 142. NOTE 6. TLeis in the singular without the article often means every > each, E.g. Has vs7, every man. NOTE 7. "OXos and ix.a in such pursuits. NOTE 9. The article is sometimes placed before the interrogative pronoun T/f and the pronominal adjective *dio$. E.g. To ri\ what is it? To, vro'ix Tttura, ; such as what ? NOTE 1O. The indefinite pronoun ^ttva. is preceded by the article. E. g. C O j7va, such-a-one. 141. 1. An adverb preceded by the article is equivalent to an adjective. E. g. Ol TOT uv&gwnoi, the men of that time, the men who lived in those days. 2. An adverb preceded by the article, without any substan- tive expressed, has the force of a substantive. E. g. e // a v- giov, sc. ?jHt'0tt, the morrow. NOTE 1. Sometimes the article does not perceptibly affect the adverb before which it is placed. E. g. To raX/ or .o%o$ t the one, namely, An- tilochus, pierced Atymnius with the sharp spear. NOTE 3. 'O f&\v and o 3i are not always opposed to each other, but, instead of one of them, another word is sometimes put. E. g. Ttagyog fiiv &, o 31 s, the one a husbandman, the other a builder of houses. NOTE 4. The second part (o $) of the formula o /t*v ..... o M generally refers to a person or thing different from that to which the first part (o p'sv) refers. 2. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the article is often equivalent to the relative pronoun. E. g. "Ogvig IQOS, TW ovvopa v agrees. NOTE 1. In Homer and Herodotus the pronoun of the third person generally refers to a person or thing different from the subject of the proposition, in which it stands. In the Attic writers, it is generally reflexive, that is, it refers to the subject of the proposition, in which it stands, or of the preceding, if the second be closely connected with it. NOTE 2. In some instances the personal pronoun of the third person stands for that of the second. E. g. (II. 10, 398 : Herod. 3, 71.) NOTE 3. The personal pronoun is sometimes repeated in the same proposition for the sake of perspicuity. E. g. 'E^a* plv, il *} (MI xatQ-' 'Exx^va/v ^9-oW TiSW^tfciS-', XA.* ovv "fvr (tot $oxi7f X.i'yuv, to us, although we have not been brought up in the land of the Greeks, nevertheless thou seemest to speak intelligible things. NOTE 4. The forms Ifiov, cpol, tys, are more emphatic than the corresponding enclitics pov t pol, ps. E. g. Jog epol, give to ME, but Jo? [i 01, give me. After a preposition only efiov, efiol, tys are used. Except p$ In the formula nqoq /we, to me. 14 4. ! Amog, in the genitive, dative, and accusative, without a substantive joined with it, signifies him, her, it, them. E.g. otffx,iutt.tTtt.i id-ovovvrsg iauroTg, for <&&ovou*rtg XAjA?, envying one another* POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 141O. It has already been remarked, that the possessive pronouns are, in signification, equivalent to the genitive of the personal pronouns (^ 67). E. g. Otxo? o aog, equivalent to O oixog oov, Thy house. ( 173.) 17 1x1$ a 6$, equivalent to'naig aov, A son of thine, (ibid.) NOTE 1. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively. E. g. 2 a* voS-os, my regret for thee, not thy regret for others. ( 173. N. 2.) NOTE 2. In some instances the possessive pronoun of the third person is put for that of the^rsf or second. E. g. O^i^/v yfftv, for O^atvop.eit vis vptg, I seem to be some body, that is, a man of consequence. M E$o%i vi tiviTv, he seemed to say something great. NOTE 5. Sometimes the poets double rig. E. g. "E^rr/ r/y ov Xo avTolg olg tnotyyettovrai, In those things which they profess. Here olg stands for a after enctyysMoviai. (ibid.) REMARK 1. If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun, this pronoun is generally omitted ( 148. 5), and the relative takes its case. E. g. ^ligyovtag oig civ IXWJASV, for ^TsgyovTotg cxfivoig, a av l/w^usv, being satisfied with what we have. v wv jvyxdvofABV e^ovisg, for '.El Ixtlvtov, a ivy%avo^v g, we go away from those possessions which we happen to have. REMARK 2. In attraction the noun joined to the relative pronoun by a verb signifying to call, to be, to believe, ( 166,) also takes the case of the relative. E. g. TOVTWV, wv av Ssunoivwv xAif, for Tomwv, oig av d&ffixotrag xaktlg, of these, whom thou callest mistresses. NOTE 1. In some instances the relative, even when it would be in the nomi- native, is attracted by the antecedent. E. g. (Herod. 1, 78) OlMv xu titans .fn.^^ovst 'iov$ xctt 'AS-yvetiovs, to daring men, such as the Athenians are, where o'iovs xat 'ASwot'tovf stands for 0401 X.O.} ' AS-flVKiOt ftffl. REMARK 4. In some instances the personal pronoun, connected with olo$, remains in the nominative, though 010$ has been attracted by its antecedent. E. g. Near/*; 31, o'iovs where fatxtirt vuv stands for fatxot vy \a.vtgal t The honors which Meleager received are well known, where -tag Tipag stands for oil npctl. Ovx olaOa polQag yg ivx&v avxyv XQ ft **; Knowest thounot the fate which she must meet 1 for ^olg NOTE 3. The same- is true of relative adverbs. E. g.*'Al- hoas OTIOI av txcplxy ayanifaovoi as, they will love thee in other places whither thou mayest go, where a'AAooe stands for or 3. Very frequently, in case of attraction, the antecedent is put after its relative. E. g. Kujaay.svoc^ovTCt r\g UQ^OI %WQug, for Kmuaxtva^ovToi jyv %(a- guv, rig u^oi, Improving the country, which he governed. REMARK 6. Frequently the principal words are attracted by, and placed after, the relative. E.g. Ol'ztrm qpeiyrur, ov r^ytq IKXQTV Qa, for *0 [ia(jTvg t ov ftf*?, ol'xtiai (ptvyMr, the wit- ness whom you brought has decamped. Ol ncdctiol wtivoi, d)v oropnTct p-f/ukw. AtytTixi enl ao(jp/, 7/tTTxov if, x/ hlctv- iog, those ancient persons, Pitfacus and Bias, who are re- nowned for wisdom, where wy attracts only the proper names. REMARK 7. The antecedent may be placed after its relative even when apparently no attraction takes place. E. g. 'Anoyv- yoig V r\vtiv* av 6ovty dixy?, you can get clear in any lawsuit you please. NOTE 4. Sometimes only the adjective belonging to the antecedent is placed after the relative. E. g. Aoyous a.x,ovffov t ovg &GI ^uffTu^tTs tjtu i/av t for Aoyou; ax.ovav, hear the melancholy news which I have brought to thee. 5. The relative pronoun often stands for the demonstra- tive pronoun, especially in the Epic language. E. g. JidrQoxhov o yt*Q ysQotg earl davovrwr, let us mourn PatrocluSj for this (that is, to mourn) is honor to the dead. So in the formula og ph.... og ds, equivalent to o pir..., de, ( 142. 1.) 17 194 SYNTAX. [ 153- 156. So in the formula Kal oV, for Kod oviog. E. g. Km} o$, /*- fiwuas /ue/a, wj'ee^^cJcjxct, awe? Ae, uttering a loud cry, jumps up. So in the formula >/<5' o?, said he, used parenthetically. NOTE 1. Frequently the relative is apparently put for the demonstrative. E. g. (II. 1.0, 314, etseq.)V/y 8i TI? iv Tgusaat dolwv, Ev^.i]dBogd&i> TW oa tic tail, he declares to the captain of the vessel who he is. NOTE. "Oar/? is particularly used when the person, who is asked, repeats the question before he answers it. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub. 1496) "Av&gwne, il nomg , 2TP. "0 11 noiw ; Man, what are you doing ? STR. What am I doing ? ltS4L Frequently the relative has the force of the con- junction IW, in order that, that. E. g. Ugsa/Selav nsunw, rjTtc javT egu, to send an embassy to say these things. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 1JO. The reciprocal pronoun regularly refers to the subject of the proposition in which it stands, which subject is either in the dual or plural. E.g. TOHXVTM TIQO uyooivov, such things were they saying to one another. NOTE. Sometimes aXA^Xwv stands for lavruv. E.g. A/c^St/gay they destroyed themselves, that is, each destroyed himself. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 1*56. 1. The subject of a proposition is that of which any thing is affirmed. The predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject. E. g. l4Ax//5iJy? flnev, Alcibiades said, where 3 AkxL{3i(xdT]g is the subject of the proposition, and tintr, the predicate. 'jByu txTotyoc tlpi, I am timid, where fyw is the sub- ject, and aW/jo? el t ui, the predicate. 2. The subject is either grammatical or logical. 157.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 195 The grammatical subject is either a substantive or some word standing for a substantive. The logical subject consists of the grammatical subject with the words connected with it. E. g. in the proposition 'Axovaag rccvxa o KvQog tTiil&ETo, Cyrus, hearing these things, was persuaded, KvQog is the grammatical, and axovaug jama o Kvyog, the logical subject. 157. 1. The SUBJECT OF A FINITE VERB is put in the nominative. A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in number and person. E. g. 3 JEyw ley a, I say. 2v Ityeig, Thou sayest. *%s1vog kdysi, He says. 2. The nominative of the neuter plural very often takes the verb in the singular. E. g. Tn tfTttTv^T aywvlfsiai, The armies arc fighting. tysrixo, These things happened. NOTE 1. Sometimes masculines and feminines dual or plural take the verb in the singular. E. g. SavSett xoptzi xetrtvvvoS-tv upovs, her auburn hair was flowing over her shuulders. 'H/u.7v olx, 'ioHfto<; *Anok- JLwv, but if Mars commence the fight, or Phwbus Apollo. "Ov *fv f'yu aytx'/M, 1} AAo !4^twy, whom I or any other of the Achccans may bring. 4. A collective noun in the singular very often has the verb in the plural. E. g. To n A i] & o g oi'ovtttt, The multitude think, flaxaav y nJni&vg, The multitude spake. This rule applies also to the pronominal adjectives txaaiog and liMog. E.g. "jtpflikov la$KJ&ixi OQ^t t d\)v f'xworzog dixot dgazptis, each person teas to have for his share ten drachmae. NOTE 4. A noun in the dual often takes a plural verb. E. g. JTcp o) o a (J a T e, you two will save. On the other hand, a noun in the plural takes a verb in the dual, when only two persons or things are meant. E. g. (II. 3, 278 -9) OV rlwvdov, you two who punish, where o* refers to Pluto and Proserpine. NOTE 5. The nominatives tyw, VM, 17/1 f 7?, are f tne fi fst person ; au, ayw, v^uf/c, are of the second person ; all other nominatives are of the third person. The nominatives of the first and second person are usually not expressed, except when emphasis is required. NOTE 6. The verb which agrees with the relative pronoun is in the first or second person, accord ing as the antecedent is of the first or of the second person. E. g. '///uly ov 3vtie, a'ljivfg iriQov^tfv u t w?, you do not sacrifice to us, who pre- serve you. A^tkiQ^ ^*}PJ v? i% fi ? *n v fvj? ptiiWQovj O thou immeasurable Air I who holdcst the earth suspended. So when the antecedent is implied in a possessive pronoun ( 150. N. 7). E. g. 'ArtxrdQin jfj ?^fT'^, o'irtrtg OE ov di eoojau^LfVj through the cowardice of us, who did not save thcc. REMARK 2. Any noun which is in apposition with the omitted personal pro- noun ( 136 : 157. N. 5) of the first person, may have the verb in the first person. E. g. Qspio-roHXti; %KU vretgat ei, I, Themistoclcs, have come to thee. NOTE 7. Sometimes the verb agrees in number with the nominative in the predicate 160. 1 ). This takes place chiefly when the nominative in the pred- icate precedes the verb. E. g. 'Eirrov Sue \o$u n 'Oa/mw y^*X, equivalent to n 'Idtyetvu tc-ri $vo Xo^ w^fl/.a/, Idomene is two high /tills. 158.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 197 NOTE 8. The third person of a verb is often found without a subject, (1) When any thing general and indefinite is expressed. E. g. Oudt xev tv&ct Tfov ye fidvog xal %ttQttg OVOITO, sc. rig, even here no one would find fault with thy valor and strength. Atyovai or (paal sc. UV&QMTIOI, they say. Frequently the word 7r^/// is to be supplied. E. g. z/?;>lw- #?j'(jrat, the thing will show itself. Ovwg txsi, it is so. /ZoA- lov del, it icant s much, far from it. Jsl%si drj nfaa, the event will soon show. (2) When the verb indicates the employment of any person, the word denoting that person is generally omitted. E. g. J$xi}ov$t TO!? "l&hiai naQnaxtvdaaa&ai, sc. o XTJ^VS, the herald proclaimed to the Greeks to prepare themselves. Tov vofiov vfiiv aviov (xvayvwaeTai, sc. 6 ygctmj.ctTev$, the secretary shall read to you the law itself. (3) Frequently the verb is changed into the third person singular passive, and its subject-nominative into the dative ( 206. 2). E. g. Toig nofaploig VTVxr]Tai, for Ol tvivxyxuai, the enemy have succeeded. Kalug aoi for Kalwg a7ifxX(t(/o, thou hadst answered well. (4) The subject of verbs denoting the state of the weather or the operations of nature is not expressed. E. g. "Tei, it rains. 2V/qpa, it snows, ^'aaaf, there ivas an earthquake. JVaxoTf, it grows dark. NOTE 9. Frequently the subject of a proposition becomes the immediate object ( 163. 1) of the verb of the preceding proposition. E. g. ffrtQe vvv dfrgyaa TIQMTOV TOVTOVI, o 11 dya, for 4>/^s vvv a^f, o 11 dga oi'iooi, now let me secjirst what this fellow here is doing. NOTE 10. The verb tlpl, a???, is very often omitted, but chiefly when it is a copula ( 160. 1). E. g. "fLga Stmivai, sc. imi, it is time to go. REMARK 3. Other verbs also may be omitted, but only when they can be supplied from the context. NOTE 11. The nominative is often used for the vocative. E.g. tfu'Aoe, for &lfa, friend. ltS8. 1. The SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD is put in the accusative. E. g. Bovha&e GCVTOV tld-slv ; Do you wish him to come? Here the accusative nviov is the subject of the infinitive &&clv. El v on, &tovg fW/itffr, He believed that there arc gods. aolv avTov paatleveiv, They say that he reigns. 108 SYNTAX. [ 158. 2. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed when it is the same with the subject of the pre- ceding proposition. E. g. Olfjui firorjttifqi, I think I have found. Here the sub- ject (fit) of tvQijxbw is not expressed because it refers to the subject (tyw) of o7/*w*. Tv xayu&rp/fflti, naa^eir u\yti- vouaiv, I am afflicted with mffcritigs painful to endure, where the subject of 7iun%fiv (nvu understood) is different from that . (See also 219. N. 3.) 3. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed also when it is the same with the object of the pre- ceding proposition. E. g. *Edt!ro nviwv poy&f'iv fpoi, He prayed them to aid me. Here the subject (uroi'c) is not expressed, because it re- fers to the object (ai/rwr) of tdflio ( 181). awy'/eilev fjfjlv xnfl tvdtiv, He commanded us to sleep. Here the subject (fang) of xn&fvdfiv is omitted because it is the same with the object (t^uiv) of nn^yyedtv ( 196. 2). vtfovopev aAAijAwy nsign&i'jvai, We request 159, 160.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 199 two men to try each other's skill. In such instances the accusative denoting the object of the verb ( 1(53) must not be mistaken for the subject of the infinitive. NOTE 4. A participle agreeing with the omitted subject of the infinitive is very often put in the accusative. E. g. vovg, OTI ovx av ytroiro TOVTOV pflZtnr uyu'n> (.101, I beseech you to condemn Theomnestus, when you consider that I could not have had a severer trial than this. ?rla i]y^iv nay*' yy tils, Infiovrn TOI'V ilrdqag, he requested Xenias to take the men and come. ( 158. 3.) NOTE 5. When the infinitive has the force of a neuter sub- stantive ( 159. 2 : 221), its subject is frequently omitted, in which case the accusative of ilg or i5roc is to be supplied. E. g. JQUV Twurw %qi] t sc. xiva, one must do these things. 1*5O. 1. In general, any word or clause may be the subject of a proposition. E. g. IAO pw euTiv (#>} TOV xwxoi;, The word <1>IAO indeed is the beginning of the evil. 2. Particularly, the subject of a proposition may be an infinitive with the words connected with it. E. . J o IIQOXSIQOV fijnv sjiaiveaoti rt]v (>fr?jv, It is easy to praise virtue. Here tnuLviaat ^r^v uynriv is the subject of the proposition. NOTE 1. The subject of Stt, oviifialvu, %gri, and some others, is generally an infinitive. E.g. z/fi f^u ksysiv, I must say, or It is necessary that I should say. Here fys. \iynv is the subject of del. NOTE 2. Verbs, of wliicli the subject is an infinitive are called IMPERSONAL. Such verbs must not be confounded with those, of which the subject is not expressed ( 157. N. 8). 3. The subject of an infinitive is frequently another infini- tive with the words connected with it. E. g. Ov (pr^i, %Qn~ vai tovg viovg jt t v ylwiwnv (/x7i', he says that young men ought not to exercise the tongue, where jov$ viovq TTJV av is the subject of ^ojjyca ( 159. N. 1, 2). 16O. 1. The PREDICATE, like the subject ($ 156. 2), is either grammatical or logical. 200 SYNTAX. [ 161. The grammatical predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb (commonly a verb signifying to be, to be called), and a sub- stantive, adjective, pronoun, or participle. In the latter case, the verb is called the copula. The logical predicate consists of the grammatical predicate with the words connected with it. E. g. *HV Ktndav'^g tv- Quvvog ^(xydiwv, Candaules was king of Sardes, where yv TVQcxrvog is the grammatical, and ?]> ivqawog 2v.(>diu)v, the logical predicate. 2. A substantive in the predicate is put in the same case as the subject when it refers to the same person or thing. ( 136.) E.g. ' !fi/eJ flfii nlovTog, lam Plutus. Here Ji^oviog agrees in case with tya. *Hv Kav$uvl7\<; rvQcevvog 2aQ8lwv, Candaules was king of Sardes. Here ivqnvvoq in the predicate agrees with the subject Kurdav^g in case. 3. The gender, number, and case of an adjective, standing in the predicate, and referring to the subject, are determined by 137. E. g. a&drmog fifti, I am immortal. avrov ywstf&at aocpov; Do you wish him to be- come wise 1 NOTE 1. When the subject is any word but a nominative ( 159), the adjective or pronoun in the predicate is neuter (commonly neuter singular). E. g. Ov dlxaiov f\m jovg xQfiTTovg IMV rfTTovwv UQ%SIV, it is not right, that the stronger should rule the weaker. NOTE 2. Frequently a neuter adjective in the predicate refers to a masculine or feminine noun. E. g. ftihoixxiatov yvvri eaTi, woman is a very tender-hearted thing. In such cases, the word Tigix/pa is sometimes expressed. E. g, rvvnUxa d' livm nQuyp tcpr) vov flvaTixov , but wo- man, he said, is a prudent thing. 1O1. 1. When the subject of the infinitive is not ex- pressed ( 158. 2, 3), the substantive or adjective, standing in the predicate and referring to the omitted subject, is put in the case, in which the subject has already appeared. E. g. slvai doxng, Thou seem est to be pale. Here the ad- jective is put in the nominative on account of av with which doxug agrees ( 157. N. 5). 162.] OBJECT. 201 KVQOV edtovTO ngo&v poiatov ysvi&ai r They besought Cyrus to be very eager. Jiaxe^tvaopat, io"lq iovaiv flvott, n QO&V J.IOTUTOI g, I will command those icho go to be very eager. NOTE. This construction ( 161. l) may take place also when the infinitive has the article before it ( 221). E. g. *O Ai /SXffrt/, he looks thievish. NOTE 2. Verbs signifying to conquer (as wxw'w) are often followed by the accusative of a noun denoting the place or 165.] ACCUSATIVE. 203 nature of the conquest. E. g. Maxn v vixyv, to gain a battle. 'Olvftnioi vevixrjXMg, having conquered in the. Olympic games. The nouns following verbs of this description are chiefly aytov, jwojffib POT, vai\uaxla, nolf^og. Also the names of the public games, 'Olvpma, nv9ioc, Nipta, %vfy/t. Sometimes an accusative denoting the name of the person conquered is added. E. g. Mdjiddrjg o TJ\V iv MaQndwvi, pd- %rjv Tovg paQfidgovg vixyaug, Miltiades who conquered the barbarians at the battle of Marathon. 165. 1 . VERBS signifying to ask, to teach, to take away, to clothe, to unclothe, to do, to say, and some others, are followed by two accusatives, the one of a person, and the other of a thing. E. g. Tavru fis eQ(*nag, Thou askest me about thrse things. Air fir tov dr^jLov qpvAx, To ask guards of the people. Tor drjpov %h&l,vttv r}fj,nia%ov, I clothed the people with robes. Verbs of this class are txdvvw, et'dvi'w, e^txiQeoficu, sSemfli', f|r^a), i'ydca or ^' ouai, b(jo^int t eganuw, XQVTITW, ^ey&t, Titxidsvo), nel&o), noisw, TiQuaaopoti, aTtcpavoM, avkuw, and a few others. NOTE 1. Sometimes the accusative of the thing denotes the abstract of the Verb ( 164% E. g. 'O Ot>x/o? 7 $uo t equivalent to A/^Ao^sS-* TJV itio/Xo- Wtf*v uV <'2> $y', we divided the art of making images ittto two parts. 166. VERBS signifying, to name or call, to choose, to render or constitute, to esteem or consider, are followed by two accusatives denoting the same person or thing. E. g. ^TQu-iiiyov avTov dndd ti$ev, He appointed him general. Tov vlov Inn ia edidd$ctTO dyct&ov, If e caused his son to be brought up a good horseman. NOTE 1. In the passive such verbs become copulas ( 16O. 1). E. g. S'raTU'x^; a,-7rtbit%&n, he was appointed general. 'O vies &4$;S} l-jfrtvs os, the son was brought up a good horseman. ( 206. 1.) NOTE 2. Frequently the infinitive tUtui is expressed before the second accu- sative. E. g. 2o

j>'<$' anoiv , yrayxcxasv, and the father compelled me to serve with a mortal man as a recom- pense for these. TOJ noude TW orci ^ut'AyLfToy, Toh[iy[A(XT 3 ai'axiaTct, povonuxeiv, thy two sons are about to Jight a duel, a most dis- graceful act, where joA/i^aia qualifies TW nouds TW ow / V, ainfj -froifid-ciov demvg -todl, ngocpa- oiv, l'(jpaxoy, and I, showing to her this garment here, as a pretext said. ^ 168. LA noun denoting DURATION OF TIME is put in the accusative. E. g. Jexa I'TT? xot^wvTt, They sleep ten years. TOVTOV fierce 2iTodxovg tnivov tov XQOVOV, During this time I was feasting with Sitalces. IIolvv XQOVOV vpQixe, He has insulted a long time. 2. Frequently the accusative answers to the question WHEN? E. g. 'jEvTedcxpevog ij]v WQIJV inctyivitiv ocplai tag aiyotg, com- manding (him) to bring the goats to them at the regular time. NOTE 1. When the substantive is accompanied by an ordinal number ( 61), it denotes duration of time past. E. g. 3 JSwa- xr\v fjpegav ysyafirjpEvriv, married nine days ago } or having been married nine days. Also when it is accompanied by cardinal numbers. E. g. 0g Ttdvyxs lavra igla !'T?, who has been dead these three years. NOTE 2. Sometimes the accusative is equivalent to the genitive absolute ( 192), particularly the following neuter accusatives : dtdoyptvov, doxovv, do^av, from doxs'w siQ^ftsvov from C PJSJI ' t$6v from I'^Eifit, 6V from n^iL * TKXQS^OV from net- gtxco ' 7igoaj]xov from 7r^oa?Jxo} " tv^ov from Tvy%arto ' and a few others. E. g. E$ov avTolg anodovatv JElfyip aTtyhcxx&ai TWV TIUQOVTWV xaxwv, Although it was in their power to give up Helen, and be delivered from the impending danger. The con- struction of the clause 3 E$ov umolg ..... xaxwy, in the indicative would be "E&onv avioUg ..... xaxwr, ( 159, 2, N. 1, 2.) 18 206 SYNTAX. [169-172. NOTE 3. Frequently, for the sake of emphasis, a preposition (chiefly ll t about, around. 3 Afi(pl delkrjv, about evening. ' UVTOV, around him. So in connection with numerals. 3 A[i(pl ta exxaldsxa sir] ywopevog, being about sixteen years old. *Ava f on, in, through , throughout, during. 3 Ava TOV noltpov, during the war, throughout the war. 3 Ava OTQV.IOV , in the army. *Ava nvQlxyv, on a tamarisk. With numerals it means at the rate of, a-piece. *Ava nev-rs nctQaadyyag trjg fjfisQtxg, at the rate ofjiveparasangs a day. Jut, through, on account of, in. "A vvv oqpst/w diu as, which I now owe on your account, dia. vvKta, in the night. Elg t to , into. Eig Kilixiav , to Cilicia. 173.] GENITIVE. 207 With numerals it generally means about. Elg iitQa- xiaxihlovg , about four thousand men. Frequently elg is found before a genitive, the noun, to which it properly belongs, being omitted. Elg naido-tyl- fiov, sc. olxoy, to the teacher's house. 'jEnt, upon, against. *Enl &QOVOV, upon a throne. 'En 3 avTov, against him. Komi, according to, in relation to, in, on, near, during. Kara lov C 'O|U??OJ', according to Homer. Kara TO aw^wa, in re- lation to the body. KaTa TOV noXe^ovj during the war. Merci, after. Me TV ds i a v T a , and after these things. Hocga, to, besides, along, contrary to, on account of. Uagtx Kauftvaea, to Cambyses. Haga lav-cu, besides these. After comparatives it means than, revolat* av xal nag a Tijv MVTWV (fvoiv a^iuvovBgy they might become superior to their nature, l, synonymous with apcpl. og, to, in respect to, towards. Hgog ndvTctg, to all men. Kalog TtQog dgojiov, good in running, or a good racer. c TnsQ, over, beyond, against. C TTISQ tovg ahlovg, over the others. e TTIO, under, at. c T n o y rj v, under the earth. c Tnb "lliov , under Ilion. f Jlg, synonymous with elg. It is always placed before nouns denoting intelligent objects. GENITIVE. 173. A SUBSTANTIVE which limits the mean- ing of another substantive, denoting a different person or thing, is put in the genitive. E. g. To Tsperog TOV &eov, The temple of the god. To v C /TT ndq%ov ddvarov , The death of Hipparchus. 2xv&wv paaihtlg, Kings of the Scythians. This rule applies also to the personal, reflexive, and recipro- cal pronouns, and to the indefinite pronoun duva. The genitive thus used has been called the ADNOMINAL GENITIVE. NOTE 1. The adnominal genitive denotes various relations, the most common of which are those of possession, quality, subject, object, material, source, a whole, component parts. 208 SYNTAX. [ 174, 175. NOTE 2. The adnominal genitive is called subjective when it is equivalent to the subject-nominative ( 157. 1). It is called objective when it denotes the object of an action ( 162. 1 ) . E. g. "E Q y o v C H (f a I a T o v , the work of Vulcan, that which Vulcan did, where the genitive is used subjectively. 'H axgo- ctaig TWV keyovjwv, the act of hearing the speakers, where the genitive is used objectively. NOTE 3. A substantive is sometimes followed by two geni- tives denoting different relations. E. g. Tr^v nilonoq una- or t <; nilonovvi]uov xaidteiyw, the taking of the whole of Pctoponnesus by Pelops. IT 4. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS and adjectives implying possession, are frequently followed by a genitive, which is in apposition with the genitive implied in the possessive pronoun or adjective ( 67: 131. 1). E. g. Tov e[j,ov av TOV tov -lakctmw QOV filov, The life of me, a miserable man. Here avrov TOV Takounwgov is in appo- sition with e\uov implied in tfibv. roQ^elrjv xcpa)ir]v, deivolto Tifhugov, The head of Gorgo y a terrible monster. Here rogyd^v is equivalent to the genitive Foyyovg with which jifXwQov is in apposition. NOTE. Under this head belong the adjectives i^/a?, h^of, xotvos, el>cs7os. E. g. ToJf a-vruv i^iois *goffi%nv TOV vouv, to attend to their private affairs. 'legos ya.% OVTOS TUV Kara %&ovos iuv, for he is consecrated to the infernal deities. "E^yov xotvov A^etxt^oujtoviuv re Kai *A$j vet, t u v, a work performed by the Lacedemonians and .Athenians in common. "A oit7et rav XK^US $<*,- ffihivovruv tff-rt, which belong to those who rule well. . The genitive is put after verbs signify- ing to be, to belong, to denote the person or thing to which any thing in any way BELONGS. E. g. C O naiq slaxtdaipov lav tail, The boy belongs to the Laced&monians. *Avoiag earl TO xbjpaa^ca xwa, It is characteristic of folly to be in pursuit of vain things. Elvai Tt5i> iQiuY.ovitt y To be. thirty years old. Verbs of this class are ylyvo[iai, t sipl, XI/^E'W, 7idPary satis two children were born, or Darius and Pary satis had two sons. Ovyrov nscpvxag freer Qog, ihou art the offspring of a mortal father. Sometimes the genitive, in such instances, is preceded by lx. E. g. naxQog x TUVTOV yiywg, being born of the same father. NOTE 3. Frequently the adjective sig or the pronoun fiagfiaQwv, The defeated part of the barbarians. Eig toy TO dvdyxyg, To this degree of necessity. NOTE 4. In some instances the neuter plural is used before this genitive ( 177. 2). E. g. "Affvpu. fions, f or * Affnpov ($0%$, indistinct noise. NOTE 5. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun often follows an adjective of the superlative degree ; in which case the highest degree, to which a person or thing attains, is expressed. E. g. "Oie dstvoToiTog a OIVTOV ivtVTct rja&a, when your skill in these matters was highest. Tfj evgyTaxr) tail ami] ewvTrjg, ivhere it is widest. 178. 1. The genitive maybe put after any VERB, when the action does not refer to the whole object, but to a PART only. E. g. He [i Tie i TWV Av8wv, He sends some of the Lydians. But nipnei jovg jiv8ovg y He sends the Lydians. Tw v XQSUV EX Ism or, I stole some pieces of the meat. AafiovTa TWV TCXIVIWV, Taking some of the fillets. 2. Particularly, the genitive is put after VERBS signifying to partake, to enjoy, to obtain, to inherit, E.g. 7kfT/w &Qciaog, I partake of courage. Tr t g dvvdutwg xoivwvovai, They parta ke of the power. Verbs of this class are avriuw, anolavM, rt^ f w, tnavglaxo- pal, tdrjQovousw, xowwvsw, xi/^tw, ia/yarw, psrcdciyxavw, fldvco, {izTlxo), ovlvauai, ovvaigofiai, Tvy%dvw, and some others. NOTE 1. Sometimes ft'&go;, part, is found after ^TaXa-y^av^ and pirtxa. E. g. Mf9-^s/v rocQou ft 6^0$, about to partake of burial. Mt%eiva, and Jx depends on the subject (expressed or understood) of these verbs. E. g.'ttvfirjdsv psgog iolg nowigoig fisTOTi,in which the wicked do not participate. Ovx MHO ngoayxeiv ovdevl g, he thought that no person ought to rule. NOTE 3. The preposition Sg or U is sometimes used before this genitive ( 178. l). E. g. A.afiuv tx rav atfvrt^uv, taking some (or one) of the shields. ^ 179. 1. VERBS signifying to take hold of, to touch, to feel, to hear, to taste, to smell, are followed by the genitive. E. g. TOVTOV, Take hold of this man. VTWV, To touch them. tivgag, Knock at the door, literally Taste of the door. Verbs of this class are ala&avopai, w, xovco, ttx^oo^ut, WTTTO^at, yevopou, ^aaao/uwt, l^o^uwt, &iyydvw, xhvw, hapfiavopcu, o^w, oacpQalvo^ai, ntigdopai, nvv^avo^ai> y yavw, and some others. 2. Verbs signifying to take hold of are frequently followed by the accusative of the object taken hold of, and the genitive of the part by which it is taken. E. g. ^la^ovi iVy they took Orontes by the girdle. NOTE 1. 'Axovtv and its synonymes, and S-tyyavu and fya.vu) are frequently followed by the accusative. E. g. 'Axovuv, inquire of the travellers about the man. NOTE 3. Ttueu, cause to taste, is followed by the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. Tsvttv O.VTOV nvo$, to make him taste of any thing. Frequently this verb is followed by two accusatives. E. g. Ttvcu ovrtovrccs ra, r o t e&u r a, , caring about such things. NOTE 2. ftltftvfoxu and X>jS-av&; or X^w, and their compounds, are followed by the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. 'Tcrs- ftvno-tv T i vctTgos, and he reminded him of his father. *E x %i f&& vuv- TUV X>j9-avi<, and makes me forget all things. Sometimes piftvnerxtv is followed by tivo accusatives. E. g. OS 'EysjTs T/, as to my son, make no more mention of him* II & gt rcjy lv h.\yv7eru xctt Iv 2/xsX/a Ivv&ff&ati fgovrigstv, to be able to take care of the affairs of Egypt and Sicily. 183. 1. VERBS signifying to accuse, to prose- cute, to convict, are followed by the accusative de- noting the person accused, and the genitive denot- ing the crime. E. g. 214 SYNTAX. [ 184. d i cJ I o fjiul as d e 1 1 1 g , / 0/// prosecute you for cowardice. KKiatvu 8w(ftav kkovtes, Convicting Clean of bribery. Verbs of this class are algim, cuTtdofiai, dixd'w, dunxat, REMARK 1. Qtvyea, am accused, and uXuvai, to be convicted, are followed only by the genitive. E. g. 'Art fit lets Qivyovru,, accused of impiety. *Ev , xTx^tVw, REMARK 2. The accusative is often wanting after these verbs ( 183. 2). E. g. K Begin the fight. g ivdot aiv^i, r c . r .. & XMQCHV %STS ovosv IJTTOV yfiwr svTifior, lor Xw^av c^exs ovdev rjTTov Trjg xwgug r^JLtav WTIJJLOV, you have a country not less valuable than ours. 2. The genitive is put after some positive adjectives and adverbs implying a comparison. E. g. 'Exigovg TMV vvv OVTWV, other than those who now arc. Adjectives of this class are Uo7o?, attog, u duxcpoQog different, eTSQog, t)Uutiuo& TieyiTTog. Also numeral ad- jectives in nkoog or nlaaiog ( 62. 2). REMARK. AwQogos and a\*.oTto$ are sometimes followed by the dative. NOTE 2. 'EvavT/0$, which commonly is followed by the dative, sometimes takes the genitive. The following example shows, that the idea of comparison lies in this adjective : Touvetvriov fyuv t y n-^oirn^ avru vroi&Tv, doing contrary to what he ought to do, (Aristoph. Plut. 14.) NOTE 3. A*a0sas differ, and its derivative $iao iXtvS-s^ins W ai} \y&>, votgoetv&j, sc. aKftK^a, / advise the young who are more vigorous than I am. 'H^wv ciftavov, -h i < 7 f 4| TO (JL'&XOV ffgootJufjii vav, sc. 9Toouvra,t, we foreseeing the future better than they. 187. 1. The genitive is often used to denote that on account of which any thing takes place. E.g. ZT^W os rriq svftovhlag, I admire you for your wisdom. Ttj vjAfTfyct nofai Tijg yijg Trjg vn Jlgtonlwdeftoftivn? (jo^o- vovai, They are jealous of your city, on account of the land given to you by the Oropians. 188.] GENITIVE. 217 2. The genitive, with or without an interjection, is used in exclamations. E. g. y fL Iloasidov, TOV jucxxp-ov?) Neptune, what a length ! Kal Tig side TIOJTIOTS fiovg xgifiavhaq ; TWV aA#w- v v n d i CD v, and who ever saw whole oxen roasted in the oven 1 what tough stories ! 3. The genitive after verbs signifying to entreat denotes the person or thing, for the sake of which the person entreated is to grant the request. E. g. Mv\ pe yovvwr yovvdso, ftsds T o K ri & v, do not entreat me by my knees, nor by my parents. Frequently the preposition vnsg, avTt, or nyog, is placed before this genitive. 4. Sometimes the genitive, in connection with a passive form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g. ill yy elg t#0ff, n&ctg, nhyolov, Tiogyw, TIQOOW, tr^ov, rr^o&tv, and some others. E. g. *Eyyvg Tiros, near any thing. NOTE. "E^ai and yxeu, limited by an adverb, are often followed by the genitive. E. g. '11$ eT#s roi^ov s > as Just as lie could run, E nxti* Giou, to be well advanced in life. 3. The genitive is put after verbs denoting to take aim at, to rush against, to throw at. E.g. *EaTo%d JSTO TOV ^.fi- Qaxlov, he was taking aim at the stripling. 'O' Msvtldov, shoot an arrow at Mcneldus. AvToto TO, he took aim at him. 19 218 SYNTAX. [$139-191. 189. The genitive is used after VERBS and ADJECTIVES to denote the MATERIAL of which any thing is made. E. g. XwAxoi; noitiovicti aydkpaia, Statues are made of brass. 'PLVOV noiTjTqr , Made of ox-hide. NOTE. The prepositions !*, &#o, are often used before the genitive. E. g. a r o l^vXav vrttrom/ttya,, garments made of cotton cloth ^ 19O. 1. The noun denoting the PRICE of any thing is put in the genitive. E. g. J2 v o v T a i rag yvvalxag naga TWV yovewv Awy, They buy their wives of their parents for mucli money. Twv novwv ntohovaiv r^ilv ndvia rayud* ol &sol, The gods sell to us every good thing for labor. NOTE 1. Sometimes the thing bought is in the genitive, in which case the verb of the proposition does not signify to buy or to sell. E. g. 'A gi irx ov, Then w/iat debt came upon me next to Pa sins' s ? Three mince for a little carriage. NOTE 2. The dative ( 198) is sometimes used for this genitive. E. g. Olvi^ovro, aXA.0/ p,tv % at. A. * &J, XXo/ ' m'tS-uvi ffi^ r n^u t they bought wine, some for brass, others for bright iron. 2. "A&og, a&wg, and wvyTo? are followed by the genitive. E. g. ^novSrjg a$ia, deserving serious consideration. NOTE 3. "Afyos is sometimes followed by the dative ( 196. 1), in which case it means^/if, proper, becoming. NOTE 4. The verb |tow, think worthy, is followed by the accusative of a person, and the genitive of a thing. E. g. *A$tovviv avrov [isydlwv, they think him ivorthy of great things. 1. The genitive often answers to the question WHEN 1 E. g. Trig vvxTog v^ovxai, They feed in the night. 2. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question HOW LONG SINCE? E. g. HotOV % f) 6 V O V 7T87T0^5r/Tt 7l6hg ; llOW long since the city has been taken? noilwv ITWV tv&dde ovx eTudsSrjfirjxsv, he has not been at home for many years. 3. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question HOW SOON? E. g. TQlMKOVltt fljJLSQWV 01710 within thirty days from this day. 192.] GENITIVE. 219 Sometimes the adverb Iviog accompanies this genitive. E g. os ov noMov xgovov, within a short time. 193. A substantive with a participle is very often put in the genitive, to denote the TIME or CAUSE of, or any CIRCUMSTANCE connected with, an action. E. g. Taw* tnoax&ii, Kovwvog aTQaiyyovvio g , These things were done when Conon was general. Here the genitive denotes the time when KXVT* enQax&y. TshevTrjoaviog ^Akvdnsco, f$sdt$aro ify (iaadtfl'rjv KQOI- oog, After the death of Alyattes, Croesus received the king- dom. The genitive thus used is called the GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. REMARK 1 . Strictly speaking the genitive absolute is a modification of the genitive of time ( 191). NOTE 1. In some instances the genitive of the participle uv is wanting. E. g. T n,v txpwynrav, who being leaders* where ovruv must be supplied. NOTE 2. Frequently wg, wansg, wars, aie, ola, that, as if, in- asmuch as, on the supposition that, stand before this genitive. fc* c Jlg w' $XQVIW iwvd* enlaiao&al os xgy, Thou must know that these things are so. REMARK 2. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often used in connection with the abovementioned particles. E. g. Qi>% vfysi \iyta &', aXX' iK&7- vav at vetgovree. v$v, I do not say these things out of wantonness, but because I believe that he is near us. 'fig ?ov #j vronlv auro7$, o n &v fiov\onro t inasmuch as they had now the liberty to do what they pleased. (See 168. N. 2.) NOTE 3. When the subject of a proposition is not expressed ( 157. N. 8), the participle alone is put in the genitive abso- lute. E. g."TovTos TroMoJ, it raining heavily, which in the indicative is "Tei TioHw, it rains heavily. NOTE 4. The genitive absolute is used also when the sub- ject is a proposition commencing with OT/, that. ( 159. 1.) E. g. 2acpws dvkw&sviog oil iv ralg vavul JMV 'Ettiyvwv, x. r.h., it being quite apparent, that in the ships of the Greeks, fyc., which in the indicative is 2acpwg edyhw-frr) on iv Tcug, x. i. L, the subject of which is on iv -itxlg, x. r. L In such instances, the genitive plural is sometimes used. E. g. Eiacxyysk&evTwv oil ftolvioaat, vyeg en* nvrovg ejre- nfaov, it being announced that Phoenician ships were sailing against them, where, however, the plural vysg may be said to affect the participle. SYNTAX. [$ 193, 194. NOTE 5. But when the subject of the proposition is an in- Jinitive ( 159. 2), the accusative is used instead of the geni- tive absolute. For examples, see above ( 168. N. 2.) 193. Frequently the genitive answers to the question WHERE? E. g. Ovx "Agyeog rjev ; was he not in Argos ? Aaiag zeigbg olxovat Xalvfteg, on the left hand dwell the Chalybes. 194. The genitive is put after the following PREPOSITIONS. >l, synonymous with *'Avtv, without. "Avev e&ev, without him. *Avrl, instead of, for. *Av&* Ipaxlov tysiv yaxog, to have a rag instead of a garment. *Avi\ no lag a IT: lag; for what reason. It is often used in comparisons with respect to value. rvvatxbg op* avil ICTUJJO, you are now equivalent to a woman. (See also 186. N. 4.) *Ano, from. *Ano c Hkiovn6kiog,from Heliopolis. In general this preposition denotes motion from one place to another. >f AiQ, synonymous with uvsv. "AxQig or &XQ 1 > until. *'A%qi xvscpaog, till evening. did, through, by means of, with the assistance of, in. A ia rr t g nohewg, through the city. Jia vvxiog, in (or during) the night. "jSvsxa, on account of, for the sake of, in respect of, as to. T ov enaivela&ai, Zvexa, for the sake of being praised. Hold a is oov aTirjftova TOV (pvhaaaovTog elvexsv Tigoodoxa IOL aTioroaTrjasiv, so far as his guardian is concerned, expect thy son to return safe. *| or Ix, out of, from, of. !z?x i^g olxlag, from the house. In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to vno, by. Ta lex&ivia e 'Als%dvd QOV, the words spoken by Alexander. jb'Ti/, on, upon, to, during. 'Enl TWV xf(pZwy, upon their heads. 3 nl SaQ^EMv, to Sardes. *Enl aQ%ovTog JKv- &vx)ieovg, during the archonship of Euthycles, or when Euthycles was archon. Kara, against, down from, on, upon. Ka-t spov, against me. oi, with, together with. ME? a TWV nalSwv, ivith my children. fXQig or pexgt, until, as far as. Mi%qi lovvov, until this time. 195.] DATIVE. 221 Haga, from, of. Xgvolov nag a, aov lafiwv, receiving gold from thee. negl, concerning, about, in respect to. Hegl 'A&yvuv, about Athens. JlXyv, except. Ilgo, before, in preference to. Ilgo &vgwv, before the doors. Ilgo TOVTWV TWV x a x w *> r)[uv ys xgsoaov xeu OTLWV oc'AZo na&eeiv earl, it is better for us to suffer any thing else than these evils. ( 186. N. 4.) Hg6g, of, for, on the side of. ngog nongog a tomb-breaker on his father's side. ngog TMV in behalf of the rich. So in protestations, 2s ngog tov oov vexvov I beseech thee by thy child. In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to vno, by. 'E&SJ.WV pa&esiv TO noisvpsvov ngog ^taxedaipovlwv, wishing to know that which was done by the Laccdcemonians. c Tneg, over, above, in behalf of , for the sake of. c Tnsg rj^wv nogevofASVog, passing over us. Ta Itgot T &v6fj,eva vnsg IT\<; nohswg, the victims offered in behalf of the city. ALG- aofi 3 vnsg yv%rjg, I beseech thee by thy life. c 2Vro, under. c T(p* ag pot-tog, under the car. In connection with passive verbs, by. Hgooxvvovfisvog ydy dag ffaaifavg vnb -IMV apy ambv, being now saluted as king by his at- tendants. DATIVE. 195. 1. The dative is used after ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, and VERBS, implying resemblance, union, approach. E. g. 'jfx e A o g d 1 1, Resembling Jupiter. jtaxto'aifiorloig dta^wc^scr #t, To Jight with the Lace- dcemonians. Words of this class are adelyog resembling, axoZovfo'a), xo- hov&og, apa, cnulaviog, 8iaywvl^o^ai t diadfyoiMXi, dials/of^oii, stxo- T(og, lxo> look like, resemble, enofiai, tgi^w, I'xshog, I'aog, I'awg, [uxxopai, opog and its compounds and derivatives, nnlalw, TtngnnliTJoiog, nhyalog, Tsofoftlw, waavTwg, and many others. Add to these the adverbs a/^ou, iyyvg, n&ac, which commonly take the genitive ( 188. 2). 2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accu- sative of the immediate, and the dative of the remote, ob- 19* 222 SYNTAX. [ 196. ject. E. g. Kg art i n Q oa spi^s de07i6fy]v,he led Ms master to victory. Such verbs are elxdw, filyvviii, o/iotow, and some others. NOTE 1. The adjectives op common* which usually takes the dative, is followed by the genitive, when it implies pos- session, ( 174. N.) NOTE 2. When the substantive, which depends on I'aog or ofioioc, is the same as that with which I'aog or opowg agrees, the former is omitted, and the noun which limits it ( 173) is put in the dative. E.g. Kopai XaylTsuaiv opolat,, for Kopai, oinolai foils xofteug iwv X/TWV, hair resembling that of the Graces. Ov pfjsixsg tag i'aag n^yag ipol, thou didst not receive, the same number of stripes with me. NOTE 3. The pronoun o avrog, the same, ( 144. 3,) is often followed by the dative. In general, however, the dative, to which o amog directly refers, is omitted, and the limiting noun (^ 173) is put in the dative, ( 195. N. 2.) E. g. Ovdsv iwv CIVTWV exslroig nQUTTOftsv, we do nothing like the things which they did, where rwr amwv refers to the deeds, and exdvoig to the doers. NOTE 4. ET$ sometimes imitates I etvro's. E. g. n Os IfAo} picis iyivtr' ix fAaTtgos, who proceeded from the same mother as I. ^ 196. 1. The dative is used to denote that to which the quality of an ADJECTIVE is directed. E. g. Tolg (plhoig, Dear to his friends. &eolg, Most hateful to the gods. Adjectives of this class are aya&og, alaxgog, evavrlog svxgr]- oxog, fy&Qog, ydvg, xAo?, no&swog, gadiog, ylkog, ^aA7ro?, and many others. 2. The dative is used after VERBS, to denote the object to or for which any thing is done. E. g. Borj&etv rfl ndrQa, To aid the country. Tolg &avovoi nhomog ovdsv tocpekel, JVealth in no way benefits the dead. Av 11 a iv ofjLsvri TW vexgcp, Abusing the dead body. *Jl%Qu sivai fi 01 doxelg, Thou seemest to me to be pale. This rule applies also to the dative after IMPERSONAL VERBS ( 159. N. 1, 2). E. g. Joxs? /iot, it seems tome. 197.] DATIVE. 223 Verbs of this class are wta'lfw, avddvw, ^ f (/xw, w^'/w, UQ- , fioy&fo, doxeay, el'xw yield, lvo%Mw t xaTctxova), Aai^w, At^uc^Vo^eu, , nixgtyyvoiWj nu&oiioii, nQinw, nQoardaaw, vnaxovto, vndxw, vnomriaow, vnoTl&spai, y&oviw, %a- i, and many others. NOTE 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the accusative ( 163. 1) instead of the dative. 3. The dative is used after verbs signifying to be, to denote that to which any thing belongs. E. g. TeMw ncudsg ^aav xakol IE xuya&ol, Tellus had good and noble children. NOTE 2. The substantive in the dative after eivm, ylytsa&ai, is often accompanied by a participle signifying willing, being pleased, expecting. E. g. Ol KQOTWVICITUI einov, ovx av acpicsi povhofisvotg slvai, the Crotonians said that they should not be willing. o The participles, of which the dative accompanies the sub- stantive, are ^ovlo^voq, eAjro^fvo^ ydopsvog, <&&wv, ngood^o^vog. Add to these the adjective xwv. Verbs signifying to come sometimes imitate slvai. E. g. Jl^waxw * e$ awv fitsv EvroJir) Jiog l^st lilog dy, As to you two, the com- mand of Jupiter is now done. 224 SYNTAX. [ 198. So *Anb *EfacpctVTlvrjg nohog aVw \ovii avavTsg satt TO XWQ'IOV, to a person going up from the city Elephantine the country ap- pears steep. NOTE 1. This dative is often preceded by the particle wg. E. g. 3 JEnsl7iQ ! ysvvaiog wg Idovti, since thou art of noble descent to one who sees thee, or rather, as thy appearance in- dicates. Hence the phrase e Jlg l^ol, or "Jig y' ipol, in my opinion. E. g. KQBCOV yv fylwrbg, wg spot, TTOTC, Creon was once, in my opinion, in an enviable condition. NOTE 2. Frequently the dative of the personal pronoun is apparently superfluous. E. g. Elnipwal poi, Tgwsg, ayavov Ihovr^oq naryl q>ttw xrxi fj.rjTQl yorjftevou, O Trojans, do tell the beloved father and mother of illustrious llioneus to bewail, where poi might have been omitted without any essential in- jury to the sense. ^A^d a' eg 'Hkvaiov nedlov a&avaTOt, nsp^jov- oiv, ovvw' %xig 'Ekevrjv, xal ayiv ya^Qog 4iog eaai, but the immortals will send thee to the Ely sian fields , because thou hast Helen for thy wife, and art son-in-law to Jupiter, where the dative ocplv, referring to #aVTot, implies that the person, to whom as refers, is a favorite of the gods. 2. The dative is often used to limit any word or expression. E. g. dvvoLioi ywoptvoi xal rolg awfj,aGi xal ralg ipvxctlg, Be- coming strong both in body and soul. Here the dative denotes that in which they became strong. l$ sxsxaoTo, He was eminent with the spear. NOTE 3. The dative is put after comparatives to denote the excess of one thing over another. E. g. noli loyl{iw q c Ellnq ysyove aafrsvearsQi], Greece has become weaker by one distinguished city. NOTE 4. Particularly, the dative is often used to limit the meaning of a substantive, in which case it is nearly equiva- lent to the adnominal genitive ( 173). E. g. Oriftaiaiv V|, King of Thebes. Joaig ixv&wnoiaiv, A gift to men. Here the dative is used objectively, (.$ 173. N. 2.) ^198. The dative is used to denote the cause, manner, means, and instrument. E. g. < 199, 200.] DATIVE. 225 To lg nsTigaypsroig alaxvvopevoi, Being ashamed of their past acts. 4 Q op 01 I'evTo eg tovg fiaQpagovg, They went running against the barbarians. TM a co fi aii EQya^6^vog t Working with his body . NOTE 1. The dative after the verb XQULOHUI, avail my self \ use, and its compounds, may be referred to this head. E. g. X QW [is& a avTO), we use it. NOTE 2. This dative sometimes depends on lv, rwv, v#o. E. g. *Dy r' Am'iao $*fttii t that he might fall by the hands ofjEneas. 199. The dative is used to denote that by which any thing is accompanied. E. g. ^Efiori&rioctv idlg dwgievaiv eaviwv 7e nevTotxoaloig xal %ihloig onhliaig xal TWV ^v^t^ioi^wv Hvgloig, they assisted the Dorians with one thousand jive hundred heavy-armed soldiers of their own, and ten thousand of their allies. The nouns, of which the dative may thus be used, are chiefly the following : Innsvg, vavg, onUirig, ne&g, nefaounyg, onlog, NOTE 1. This dative is frequently accompanied by the da- tive of amog. E. g. TQ^^ig avtotg nit] QW paGi die, destroy, olkv[iv.i, perish, oAwAa, have perished. But the first perfect oAwyUxa means have destroyed. rouse, oQWfuxi, rise, oQwga, have arisen. i, persuade, Tiel&ofjiai, am persuaded, ninoi&a, confide in, trust. 'AAI2KSI, capture, am captured, mlowa, have been captured. PQvzdopai,, roar, (tifiQv%a, roar. riFNJL, produce, ylyvo^oa, am produced, become, yeyova, am. dalco (transitive), burn, dnlo^ai (intransitive), burn, deduct, burn. AASl, teach, dedaa, have learn- ed. i, see, dsdogxa, see. , raise, tyslgofieu, raise nrjyvvpi,fix, nyyvvpai, am fix- myself, rise, fygyyoga, am ed, ninriya, stand fast. awake. But the first per- fect tyriyegxa, means have raised. Qel7i(>), demolish, egyQiTtot, am demolished, lattiiju, cause to stand, WTOC pai , cause myself to stand, stand, tOTrjxa, eaTotct, stand. But the later form I'ainxa means have placed, xsv&co (transitive), hide, xsxev- '&a (intransitive), hide. w, afflict, x^opxi, care for, ot, care for. , tear, sygtoya, am torn to pieces. dvvvfu, extinguish, afisvrvftai, am extinguished, la/ft? x, am extinguished. (transitive), to rot, or\nQ- , (intransitive), to rot, , to be rotten. , cause to wither, emTlo- (intransitive), wither, am withered. (transitive), melt, (intransitive), melt, am melted. madden, am cpalva), make appear, cpalvo[iai, t appear, Tii^vu, have ap- peared. cpvw, produce, (fvo^ai, am pro~ duced, nscpvxa, nicpva, am. mad, [ttfiyva, am mad, rave. ^^x0|Ut, bleat, ^g'^xa, bleat. /uvxoeo^wt, bellow, ftifivxa, bel- low. REMARK. Sometimes the perfects * / # X >j y a, , from >. from x, ( 165.) NOTE 1 . The accusative after xeigoftat, nt^ou'oopou, Qoptopoti, and some others, is properly speaking synecdochical ( 167). NOTE 2. Some middle verbs of this class ( 2O7. l) have apparently be- come intransitive. E. g. sXvra, cause to hope, tXvrof&uij cause myself to hope, simply hope ; vXa%&>, cause to wander, vr>.aZ > of*,ou, cause myself to wander, simply wander. 2. Very frequently the middle is equivalent to the active followed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun. In this case the middle is used transitively. E. g. Uoistad- at TTJV elQqvrjv, To make a peace for one's self. But noislv ir\v tlg^vriv, To make a peace for others. Ha()aay.V(xo[ial TL, I prepare something for myself. But UctQctaytsva^o) 11, I prepare something for somebody. $ 207.] VOICES. 231 3. The middle is sometimes used transitively to denote that the object of the action is a thing belonging to the subject of the verb. E. g. Xgvarig ylds Ivaopsvo? &vy argot, Chryses came in order to ransom his own daughter. NOTE 3. Sometimes, for the sake of emphasis, the reflexive pronoun is an- nexed to a middle verb used transitively ( 207. 2, 3). E, g. Tey^a^- IA KI \(jt,cLvr u rccvrXf I have written these things for myself. 4. Sometimes the middle is equivalent to the corresponding active with the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. koidogovfis&a equiva- lent to loidoQovpsv aMftoi?, we are reviling one another ; but loidoQovfte&ot, in the passive, would mean we are reviled by others. 5. Sometimes the middle is used transitively to express an action which takes place at the command of the subject of the proposition. E. g. *Edt,dcxgd[iriv G s, I caused thee to be taught, I have given thee an education. But *dlda$d os, I taught thee. NOTE 4. Frequently the middle does not seem to differ from the active. E. g. idsa&ou, in Homer, is equivalent to idelv, to see. NOTE 5. The future middle is often equivalent to the future active. In such cases the future active is either rare or obsolete. E. g. -d-av[idw t admire, tfavfidaopou,, shall admire, not shall admire myself. Verbs, of which the future middle is equivalent to the future active : ayvoseo, rcflw, axouw, a^wa^Twrw, annvidw, ano'kaiJM, /?a- 5/fw, palvw, (flow, /5AeJaxo), /5oo), ^?Aw, yyQaaxw, yiyvwaxw, dd- xvw, SctQ&dvw, JETfL, didgdaxw, JPAMJL, e/xw/u/w, El A SI, tiftl am, EAETOfL, Inaivim, eniogxsw, &uv[Adw, xHw run, w, yw swim, o^a OIIJl, ovQ(a, nal(a, ndo%(a, nrjddw, nlnno, TrAsw, nvsw, nvlyw, Q8Q)JIOW, Oiyd(0, (JLWTldM, (7XOJ7TTW, iff, [j,i]xoioiicu, /j^uj^axco, /uvxao^toM, nel&cj (only the 2 perf.), QTiyvv^jLi, fy&rvjU, tglw t yvta. NOTE 5. The perfect is sometimes used for the present to express a cus- tomary action. E. g. *O xgotruv ?/* vrxvra. f9t${frm*t t the conqueror takes possession of every thing. NOTE 6. The perfect is sometimes used for thefuture to express the rapidity or certainty of an action. E. g. "OXa;Xy, ? ft TKVT' igjo-oftai vreiXif, thou shalt certainly perish, if I ask thee again the same question. NOTE 7. The second person of the perfect imperative is rarely used, except in verbs of which the perfect has the signification of the present ( 209. N. 4). E. g. Kgd(a f member thou. NOTE 8. The third person of the perfect passive imperative of any verb may be used to denote the complete termination of an action. E. g. Tama fiev ovv nsnala&G) vfuv, now you have had sport enough, or let there be no more joking about this. 3. The PLUPERFECT expresses an action which was com- pleted in past time. E. g. tytppaqptiv, I had written, implying that there was a time when I could say " I have written." NOTE 9. In the old writers (as Homer), the pluperfect sometimes has the force of the aorist, and sometimes of the imperfect. E. g. (II. 5, 66) s/3Xj- xti for ?/3aAi, from j8aAA.c, Ivu p ixdiday$, wv niQ ovvtx* ehrjhv&a. 2SIK. 'Hh&eg ds xotxa il / Come aown to me, to teach me those things for which I have come. Soc. What have you come for ? where ?)l&s$ is parallel with NOTE 2. The aorist indicative is often used for the present to express a customary action. E. g. 3 A& an ty$$&v drj TroMtt ptpfrawovew ol aoyol. Ilaga, fisv ovv ^6? svdvg surety xotaev, But the wise learn many things from their enemies. Now from a friend you might not learn this ; but the enemy (as a common thing) com- pels you to learn it. NOTE 3. The aorist is used for the future to denote the rapidity or certainty of an action. E. g. 'Anwlopead* ay 3 , el xaxbv nQoaolaopev vsov nahaiw, then we are undone, if we add a new evil to an old one. NOTE 4. The aorist of the verbs araW# t despise, and a few others, is, in conversation, often used for the present, in order to express a decided feeling of admiration, contempt, or pleasure. E. g. "H.7icrt r* thou doing ? olds tl povyUia^ he knows what (it) wants. C avriQ, og TOVT* tnolrjos, the man who made this. 3. The indicative may be put after the following particles : d, if, whether ; ind, eneidij, after, when ; on, that, because ; tag, that ; wars, so that. REMARK. In a sentence containing a condition and con- sequence or conclusion, the former is called PROTASIS, and the latter APODOSIS. The protasis begins with the particle el, if. 4. The indicative may be used in conditional propositions. E. g. Jsiva Ttsiaofiea&a, si oiyy aopsv, If we shall keep silence we shall suffer terrible things, where ti oiyr^oo^v is the protasis and dswa nsiaofiw&a the apodosis. ( 213. R.) 5. When the condition and the consequence are both past actions, the indicative is used both in the protasis and in the apodosis. In this case the apodosis contains the particle av. E. g. Ovroi el Tjaav avdgeg aya&ol, ovx av TIOTS lavxoi 7iaa%ov f If they had been good men, they would never have suffered these things. OVK civ TtQoeheyer , si firj enlaTevaev ahrj&evasiv, Had he believed that he should prove a false prophet, he would not have predicted. NOTE 1. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis, especially in the epic writers. E. g. Kai vu xtv ev9-' at-ro^atro av| oivSguv Alvstetg, 6t p.* eig ' o%v vovtrt A/ej S-wyoirvg 'AQgoSirv, and now jEneas, king of men, had perished, had not Venus, daughter of Jove, quickly perceived. NOTE 2. Sometimes av is omitted in the apodosis. E.g. "El yat,^ %v avrotffi trgeid'/iXoi TO. pixi.ovra. 'ytvvfftirS'Ct.i, ovb % ovrug avroffrariov etvys ffoQvi, I fear lest you prove to be very artful, NOTE 3. Instead of p*, lest, with the subjunctive, on, o*e*s, or us, with the indicative, is sometimes used. NOTE 4. Sometimes the verb, upon which pi, lest, depends, is omitted. E. g. (II. 22, 123 : Plat. Grit. 9.) NOTE 5. Sometimes the subjunctive is put after the particles /, imi t Irs^j, ex-ors, on, unaccompanied by v, ( 214. 1, 4.) 915. 1. The first person plural of the subjunctive is often used in exhortations. E. g. Toy Mev&wv let us imitate Meneldus. 216.] MOODS. 239 2. The first person singular also of the subjunctive, pre- ceded by the imperative aye or g)%, is often used in exhorta- tions. E. g. <2>6g ccxovao), let me hear. NOTE 1. Homer uses the first person singular of the subjunctive in exhorta- tions without & xwt no&sv I'A^ot, Then he asked who he was, and whence he came. NOTE 1. The optative often depends on a proposition which contains a verb expressing present or future time. In this case it generally denotes uncertainty or probability. E. g. Kaleaov igoybv Evgvxfaiav, ofpg 3 snog ei'noipi,, call nurse Euryclea, that I may say a word to her. NOTE 2. When the present is used for the aorist ( 209. N. 1), it is regularly followed by the optative. This is no ex- ception to the rule ( 216. 3). E. g. Bovtip Intiexvarat, onus py alia&Elev 3 A&yvcuoi, he contrives a plan which should prevent the Athenians from assembling. NOTE 3. Sometimes the particle v accompanies the words which precede the optative ( 216, 1, 2). Thus the optative is sometimes found after Uv, IVs^av, 'tva. av, /u,vi civ, of us %>*> oTorctv, oretv, otpgct, eiv, us civ. 4. Particularly the optative is used when any thing that has been said or thought by another is quoted, but not in the words of the speaker. The action denoted by the optative may refer to present, past, or future time. E. g. on pav&avoisv ol [lav&dvovTeg, a OVK , He answered that those, who learn, learn what they do not know. Einov OIL &uvfia(ji:a)g anovdu Jo^^sv, / said that we were wonderfully in earnest. *HiSri pug, on | avrwv xedof ti avaxvyono twv SQWTI]- paTwv, For I knew that something good would come out of these questions. NOTE 4. Sometimes on or u$ is omitted before this optative ( 216. 4). E. g. Xat/r* acray y s/Xav vrbffii ..... yvveiijtot vfifrriv ^' Iv oo/u-ot; tugoi, announce these things to my husband ; and that he will find his wife faithful in the house. "Or/ may be omitted also when it has already been expressed. E. g. TLgurov fji\v 9f^os TLetgiKvous vivas ihtyiv, oj^oxoy (JL\V cLvu tin ^efitxot wfttgav airo S-aXoia-ffvis o$6v ' 2s vS-*? $i &%uv f trot TO, and first he said to some l*arians t that Medocus was up twelve days' Journey from the sea ; and (that ) Seuthes would be the leader. 217.] MOODS. 241 NOTE 5. Instead of the optative after i/, on, u;, the indicative is often used. E.g. Upon* OVTUV 071 TW 'EAXa^a tX svStgovo-t, having proclaimed that they liberate Greece, where iAu/& might have been used. ^ 1 T'. 1. The optative is used in the expression of a wish. E. g. Sol Ss &ol Toaa Solsr, oace cpQfol afjOi pfrdnac, ^7 /Ae gods give thee as many things as tlwu longest for. NOTE 1. Frequently the particles ft, d yuQ, d'&e, w?, O are placed before this optative. E. g. Ei */OLQ tyuv dibs nlyioxoio ei'rjv, O that I were a son of agis- bearing Jove! Homer sometimes adds xiv to these particles. NOTE 2. If the wish refers to past time, the aorist indicative is used after the abovementioned particles ( 217. N. 1). E.g. Ei'$' i%sxovw, that I had been cut off! NOTE 3. Frequently the aorist wfpsXov ^froni oQtfaoa) with the infinitive follows the particles i"9i, tl ydt.fr us* E.g. Ei'S-' &cX0y with the infinitive is not accompanied by any particle. E. g. "H

anooiav civ xaiaoj cxlrjV, should any one ask me, which of the deeds of Evagoras I con- sider greatest, I should find myself in great perplexity. NOTE 4. Frequently the indicative is used in the protasis, and the optative with civ, in the apodosis. E. g. E/ ya fy$l ravrx 7, xai o-t ro7s faytiyfif 01 xvutyw} %Xetivets, vr)*iv(H, JT will however follow thee, and I will not be left behind, where follows 4. Frequently the optative (with or without V) has the force of the imperative. E. g. El ds fir], Xeiglaoyog fisv yyolTO, iwv ds TiktvQtov exonegwv dvo iwv nQEo^vxaiMv aTQairiyw in^ [islola&rjv, and if not, let Ckirisophus take the lead, and let two of the oldest generals take charge of both wings, where yyeladw, tnin&da&wv, would be less polite. AiyQiq V, you may speak, softer than Uye, speak thou. IMPERATIVE. ^1 8. 1. The imperative is used to express a command, an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g. (ptvys, begone ! (pevytTco, let him depart, qpaJ/m, depart ye, qpsv/e'iaxjwj', let them depart. 2. In prohibitions the present imperative is used after ^ and its compounds. E. g. My yU/e Ta^ra, say not these things. NOTE 1 . Sometimes p,j is followed by the aorist imperative, particularly by the third person. E. g. M j $ i trot (jt,i\ntra.Tia, and care not. NOTE 2. The second person of the imperative is sometimes used for the third person, when the speaker is in great haste. E. g. Xwg/ Stvgo vcis vvvpTVis ' ro%tue KS rif let every servant come hither ; shoot, every one ! NOTE 3. The imperative in connection with a relative pro- noun or relative adverb, is sometimes found in a dependent proposition after ota#a (from oldu, know). E. g. OtW ovv o ; knowest thou what thou must now do ? o!a#' we v / dost thou know how thou must do? Oia&a vvv a ; do you know what I desire to be done to me 1 INFINITIVE. ^ 319. 1. The infinitive depends on a VERB, PARTICIPLE, Or ADJECTIVE. E. g. * Tptt<; Povhso&s ysvEV&ai, aviov aoqpoV / Do you wish him to become wise ? 219.] MOODS. 243 *A&riVttluvg nocvTitg {ifra TOV &flov vopl^tig dvrijaea&ni, n o if] a a i n e 1 & e a & a I ooi ; Do you think that you will be able to make all the Athenians, together with your uncle, follow your advice 1 Here nd&tv&ai depends on noirjoou, noiriGKi on dvvqaea&ai, and dvvrjaea&at on vopl&ig. deivog vo(Ai6fAevog uvai hs'yeiv, Being considered an eloquent speaker. The infinitive may depend on the verbs mH^ofuu, axotw, avayxa^w, environ, avwyco, a|toa>, unayoyeva), threaten, unwitiv, aga> begin, povhoftai, Siv^im, diotv didauxd), doxe'w, dvva^tcxi, ca, f^f'Aw, I'^w, il'do^KXi seem, ayyeMofiai, Inttyopcu, M can, ixrrcJw, Moaopat, pay & drat, ofivvpi, o^o^oysa), oQfidw, OTQVVW, ol'<5t xara/uc/>arra$ r/^uwar av- tdtav fnifiskri&fjvai, for the present, remaining in Greece, let us take care of ourselves. NOTE 9. Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish, in which case dog may be supplied. E. g. Ztv ndrfg, ?? Alavia lv.%*1v , y Tvdiog viov, Father Jove, grant that the lot may fall upon Ajax, or upon the son of Tydeus, 22O. 1. The infinitive is frequently put after words and phrases signifying 50 that, so as; especially when its connec- tion with the preceding clause is not very obvious. E. g. AvToxFiyfg Mxodofirjanv, wars -&(xv^a^siv e^is, They built it with their own hands, so that I wondered. Ov yuQ inndG -toi's Xlovg, WOT* Ewvry 8 ovv a i viag t For he could not persuade the Chians to give him vessels, The words and phrases, after which the infinitive is put, are tqp' w, 9' MTS, on condition that, ooov, COM, , / remember that you both profess this. rvovg f}a7iTiopvov ib ptiQaxtav, Perceiving that the stripling was overwhelmed. Verbs of this class are aiadnvoftcxL, alaj(Vt'O^ni, axouw, yiyvw- oxw, dnxvvni, drjlow (also dylcs wp), diauvrjfiovEvo), diaaaysM, psQM relate, Iv&vpsopai, e|Tw prove^ endav&uvopai , eniaia- , tvQiaxw, Idtiv, XTT?/O^W denote, xAvw, unv&dvw, filfiv^fittt t s'w, ol8a % o^aw, nvv&avonat, (palrw, x Apa xccTahapovT sg , as soon as they had overtaken (them). 6. The participle with the particle V has the force of the indicative, subjunctive, or optative, with V, ( 213. 5 : 214 : 217.) E. g. Ta dixalwg av gy&evTa xr trig nofawg, those things which might justly be said against the state, where T dixatiwg oiv Qij&evia is equivalent to sxslva a dtxalfog av QijO-ilij' but T dixalwg $r f &dvTa would mean those things which were justly said. ADVERB. !j 23. Adverbs limit the meaning of VERBS, PARTICIPLES, ADJECTIVES, and other ADVERBS. Kg. O v i ft) 7t o i w , / do so. Kulug Trotwv, Doing well. TI IT ij d s iog navv , Very convenient. Haw xoiJiwg, Very well. 394:. 1. The Greek has two simple negative particles, ov y no, not, and py, not. ( 15. 4.) 2. Oj; expresses a direct and independent negation. E. g. Ov as xQvyw, I will not conceal it from thee. Ovx olda, I do not know. oi>% olog x sipl, I am not able. So in direct interrogations, v nuQupivEig ; wilt thou not wait 1 oi>% TJ/OQCVOV / did not I say 1 3. Mij regularly expresses a dependant negation. Conse- quently it is put after the particles IW, onmg, MOTS, aig, oygn, fdv, si, imxv, eneidrxv. Also it is put after all relative words, when they do not refer to definite antecedents. E. g. Oux av nQOsfoys, el py sTilarsvasv o&ti&svasiv, had he not believed that he should prove a true prophet, he would not have predicted. *Eav de Tig Q&avvri Tovg a^fovrac, xt far] dsxyTou, and if any one shall drive away the, magistrates, and shall not receive them* 224.] ADVERB. 249 4. Mr) is used also in propositions containing a wish, an entreaty, or a prohibition. E. g. f/avaaviris xrjgvypu Tioirjodns- vog, (irjdsva ajiTsa&ou rfg Irj'Cris, Pausanias proclaiming that no one should touch the booty. In prohibitions , the present imperative or the aorist subjunc- tive is used with pj. ( 215. 5 : 218. 2.) 5. My, after verbs imply ing fear or anxiety, signifies lest; in which case it is followed by the subjunctive, optative, and some- times by the future indicative. ( 214 : 216 : 213. N. 4.) 6. My has also the force of an interrogative particle. E. g. Mr) nr) doxovpsv aoi ; do we not seem to thee ? where the per- son asked is commonly expected to say no. But Ov nr\ doxov- Hbv aoi ; expects or presupposes the answer yes. NOTE 1. The negative particles very often correspond to each other. The following are the negative formulas : OVTS ..... OVTS neither ..... nor ovds ..... ovds neither . . * . . nor ov ..... OVTS not ..... nor OVTOI ..... ovds neither ..... nor OVTOI ..... OVTS neither ..... nor ov ..... ovds ..... OVTS not ..... nor ..... nor OVTS ..... ov neither ..... nor OVTS ..... ovds neither ..... nor even OVTS ..... ov ..... ovds neither ..... nor ..... nor OVTS ..... TS ov neither ..... nor U.YITS neither ..... nor n^ds neither ..... nor fiy neither ..... nor r]ds neither ..... nor NOTE 2. The formulas ov ..... TS, OVTS ..... TS, (sometimes TS ov ..... TS, OVTS ..... xal, OVTS ..... <$,) are equivalent to OVTS ..... OVTS, when both clauses have the same verb. E. g. (II. 1, 603 4) Ov fjLiv (poapiyyoc Tif^txrcAAs'o?, r t v s%' 3 AnoM.wv t Movnnwv #', V asidov, neither of the harp of surpassing beauty, which Apollo had, nor of the Muses, who icere singing. But if the verb of the second clause is different from that of the first, the second member (TS) of the formula has an affir- mative meaning. E. g. OVTS TIQOTSQOV f^ing rj^ctftsv noli^iov nQog vpag ' vvv -t s&slofiev anovdag noisla&iu, we never began the war against you ; and now we are willing to make a treaty , where the verb of the first clause is aisv, and that of the second 250 SYNTAX. [ 225, 226. NOTE 3. The first negative particle of a negative formula is sometimes omitted. E. g. T^a.; oi>' 'EAxWs, for OvVg T^waj oi'S-' 'ExXnv/f, neither a Trojan woman nor a Grecian woman. S*>. 1. TW or more negatives, in Greek, strengthen the negation. E. g. "Oiuv fir) (pfjTf xctVov ihai urjdsv, When you say that nothing is beautiful, or When you deny that there is any thing beautiful. 2. The double negative ov py is put either with the future indicative or with the subjunctive. ( 213. N. 5 : 215. N. 3.) The double negative ^ ov is commonly put with the infini- tive. E. g. Ovx tvayjiwo&ptu TO furj ov yiywvtlv, I shall not object to saying. NOTE. Two negatives destroy each other in the formula Ovdttf oaTig ov, no one icho (does) not. E. g. Ovdev o ti ovx ijQWTa, nothing which he did not ask. Ovdtli; ov TWV nayov- iwv vnfQfTif^Eos ibv "koyov, there was no one of those who were present who did not much praise the discourse. In this case both negatives belong to the same clause. 3. Verbs and expressions, which contain a negation, are often followed by the particle ^ with the infinitive. E. g. Tov T rOjUOV tdtixrviTji' OCVTW y.nl jolt; vsotg ansiTieTrjv pr] dia- leyfa&ui, they showed him the law, and told him not to hold any conversation with young men. 3 E^^QV(ja^t]v fiyojovg tov fir} di$aie&*vtet$ tig "Aidov /noltlv, I delivered the mortal race from being utterly destroyed and sent to Hades. Verbs of this class are anavdctw, anayoQfvu, anfyoficu, am- a, agvsoftau (also the expression tT-aqvog elfji), tl'gyto, ini%w, vw, Qvoftat, and a few others. PREPOSITION. 22G. 1. The following eighteen prepositions are called the primitive prepositions : >i, about, around, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. vvi, upon, on, in, through, with Dative or Accusative. instead of, with Genitive. 3 An6,from, with Genitive. did, through, for, on account of, for the sake of, with Geni- tive or Accusative* Elg or *Eg t to, into, with Accusative. 226.] PREPOSITION. 251 *Ev, in, at, with Dative. !# or '.Zi'x, from, of, out of, with Genitive. *Mnl, on, upon, to, towards, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- sative. Kara, down from, against, according to, in, in respect to, with Genitive or Accusative. Msid, with, among, after, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- sative. natqd,from, by, with, to, besides, along, with Genitive, Da- tive, or Accusative. i, about, around, concerning, of, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. o, before, in the presence of, in behalf of, in preference to, with (jfenitive. Jlgo?, to, towards, by, in addition to, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 2\)v and vv, with, together with, by means of, with Dative. 'TTISQ, over, beyond, in bthalfof, with Genitive or Accusative. c Tn6, under, by, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. NOTE 1. Most of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the ac- cent back on the penult, when they are placed after the nouns to which they belong. This is called anastrophe. E. g. Neuv a no, for *Ano v s tav, from the ships. *E%&Qiov vnsg, for C T n s Q e%&Qwr, for the enemies . NOTE 2. Some of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the accent back on the penult also when they stand for dpi, am, compounded with themselves. In this case, the Attics use the old l ivi for iv ( 226. N. 6). E. g. W^ for TUXQWTI, from 7id(jst[*i,, IV* for wear i from tveiui. NOTE 3. In the early writers (as Homer and Herodotus), the preposition is often separated from the verb, with which it is compounded, by other words belonging to the same propo- sition. This is called tm.esis. E. g. 3 Ano ph e&avs o OTQM- iriyoq, for 3 Ane&avt fiiv o aTgaiyyog, on the one hand, the gen- eral died. NOTE 4. In case of tmc.sis ( 226. N. 3), the preposition is sometimes put after the verb. E. g. 'Jlas <$' onto QIVOV U&og t and the stone knocked off the shield. NOTE 5. In case of tmesis, when the same compound word is to be repeated several times, after the first time the preposition alone is sometimes used. E. g. Kara p*v tXsutrav U.UTOU rv>v fyuva.7a, xetroi $1 ra, vixvet, for Ka r i X t/- ffxv fitlv etlfou fx or'^Vfxcv, on account of, in respect to, so far as con- cerns, with Genitive. Mt/Qig or MixQi* until, as long as, with Genitive. /7>Uj', except, with Genitive. *Jlg, to, with Accusative. NOTE 6. The old language has a feet for aura' $;/ for $/, nnc/ m Memphis. NOTE 9. Sometimes the preposition, with which a verb is compounded, is repeated. E. g. *Av $' 'O$uff v f OTTOTOl, OTOVOl, OTTOTOTOl, OY OTOTOTOTOA, OI SOrrOW. oval, woe ! used only by the later writers. Followed by the dative ( 196. 5). nanal, nanaid$, of pain, sorrow, joy, wonder. nonaZ, nonoi, or o5 nonoi, O gods! of complaint. nvna$ or nvnnat;, of wonder or admiration. qvTtanal, a cry used by rowers. v v, expresses the sound made by a person smelling of any thing. (psv, alas! Followed by the genitive ( 187.2). cpv, = (ptv. w (with the acute accent), oh ! of wonder or grief. Fol- lowed by the nominative, genitive, or dative, ( 187. 2 : 196. 5.) w (circumflexed), O! Followed by the vocative ( 204. 2) WO'TT, used in encouraging rowers. 230, 231.] IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTlJfcy vr T *T -Tf T^Wt H* ^J IRREGULAR 23O. 1. Frequently a NOMINATIVE stands without a verb. E. g. (Xen. Hier. 6, 6) "Jlaneg ol a & li\ ia\ 0!)%, ojav ldiWTLot lo- | ^trat, || rovgyov \ 011% I- | xa$ to- \ ds. Judges, jurymen, and pleaders, || ye whose soul is in your fee. IAMBIC VERSE. 24:1* The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the iambus. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the iambus. The spondee or the dactyle can stand in the odd places (1st, 3d, 5th, 7th). The anapest can stand in all the places except the last. The tragedians admit an anapest in an even place only when it is contained in a. proper name. 242. The IAMBIC MONOMETER consists of two feet. It is found chiefly in systems of iambic dimeters. E. g. Kai roig | xokotg. 243. 1. The IAMBIC DIMETER acatalectic consists of four feet. E. g. , 244.] IAMBIC VERSE. 263 r I nQoasi,- I noV) eg Tov a- Trot??- I oapsvog \ tyav- xeu TW, TlQCt- Trust not for freedom to the Franks, They have a king who buys and sells. 2. The IAMBIC DIMETER catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. It is found among iambic dimeters acatalec- tic. E. g. 11 -wig 2nov8(uoLV 77 dv ' xovx cot JKsv ov- | devi> [is- \ totdco- \ osiv. That Sylvia is excelling, Upon this dull earth dwelling. 244. 1. The IAMBIC TRIMETER acatalectic consists of six feet. It never has a tribrach in the last place. Its verse-caBsura occurs after the second foot ; sometimes after the third foot. Sometimes the verse-caesura is entirely neglected. E. g. e Oact 8r] | dedrj- \ ypai \\ Tt]V l^ictv- \ tov KUQ- | ds fiou- | , || navv \ ds fiai- \ a, IST- \ it 'i- | oyag- | NOTE. The tragedians admit a dactyle only in the jrs and third places. E. g. xov yis, ov Trig OQ&ofiov- \ Aov Oegu- \ dog alnvprjioi nai. They admit an anapest only in the first place. E. g. adaftav- \ TIVWV dsafjuav ev agQ But in proper names they admit an anapest in any place except the last ; in which case the anapest is contained in the proper name. E. g. 3 fL navrot vatfitov, Tsi- \ Qsaifll, dtdotxra is. per ovdsig fiv&og, *Av- \ riyovij, cpdwv. 2. The scazon or choliambus is the iambic trimeter acatalectic with a spondee or trochee in the last place. E. g. *Eyw ftdaivlg, \\ rj 'jilfitoTog av&gwnoig, Eviav&a 264 VERSIFICATION. 245 - 249. 24F. The IAMBIC TETRAMETER catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura is at the end of the fourth foot; but this caesura is often neglected by the comedians.. E. g. Ovxovv | na.l.u.1 \ drjnov \ ta/w/ || av d' av- \ rog ovx \ axov- \ eig, *G ds- | anoxyg \ yag > dia- | (tsipofie- \ va. 250, 251.] DACTYLIC VERSE. 265 3. The TETRAMETER catolectic on two syllables consists of three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or trochee. E.g. OovQiog | oovig \ TevxgiS' in \ ctiuv. vno- ] xAwiw^, | ov& vno- 555O. 1. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER dcdtdlectic con- sists of five feet, the last of which is a dactyle. E. g. i- | VLI fiotgv- 2. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER cdtdlectic on one syllable consists of four feet and a syllable. E. g. Ttav fisya- \ Xwv Aava.- \ wv vno- \ x 3. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER catalectic on two syllables consists of four feet and two syllables. E. g. 'AJQFI- | dug paxi- \ ftovg, Ida- \ ^ kayo- \ danag. 4. The ELEGIAC PENTAMETER consists of two trimeters cata- lectic on one syllable ( 248. 1). The first hemistich almost always ends in a long syllable. The verse-caesura occurs after the second foot. This kind of verse is customarily subjoined to the heroic hexameter. E. g. Bovkso d' ivatfietav okiyoig ovv xgynaaiv olxtiv, 3 II nlov- | TSIV, adi~ \ xwg \\ XQrjpaTa \ naaups- \ vog. 2tll. 1. The DACTYLIC HEXAMETER acataUctic consists of six feet, the last of which is a dactyle. It is used by the tragedians in systems of tetrameters. E. g. * ag ydo- \ Tyrog a- | (JLU^O^- \ ra 2. The DACTYLIC HEXAMETER (or heroic hexameter] cata- lectic on two syllables, consists of six feet, the last of which is a spondee or trochee. The fifth foot is commonly a dactyle. The predominant verse-casura is that in the middle of the third foot ; either directly after the arsis, or in the middle of the thesis of a dactyle. E. g. \ evvEns, \ [JIOVGOI, \\ no- \ hvTQonov, \ og fiaka \ nokka i- \ net TQOI- \ yg \\le- \ QOV moh- \ e&gov e- | ntgatv. Sometimes the verse-casura occurs immediately after the arsis of the fourth foot. E. g. 7]v xs yv%yv, xa VOOTOV 23 266 VERSIFICATION. [< 252-255. ANAPESTIC VERSE. * The fundamental foot of the anapestic verse is the anapest. The spondee, the dactyle, or the proceleusmatic, may stand for the anapest. A dactyle very seldom precedes an anapest in the same dipody. 2t>3 The ANAPESTIC MONOMETER consists of two feet. E. g. rbov o- I vfioav. 254L* I- The ANAPESTIC DIMETER acatalectic consists of four feet, the last of which is either an anapest, a spondee, or a trochee. The legitimate verse-caesura is in the second arsis. It is often made, however, in the short syllable immediately after the second arsis. E. g. av ngog \ n&u&goig / || 11 ov iy- \ ds noheig, t- | xsig av, || 11 fiag \ eregwv tt- navwv. Tabourgi, tabourgi, || thy larum afar Gives nope to the valiant || and promise of war. 2. The ANAPESTIC DIMETER catdlectic consists of three feet and a syllable. It has no caesura. E. g. JIOf.fflOV | OTl(f)Og | 7l(XQ8%OV- \ Ttg. NOTE. Anapestic dimeters consisting wholly of spondees are not uncommon. E. g. dedalov tag ov . The ANAPESTIC TETRAMETER catolectic (called also Aristophanean) consists of seven feet and a syllable. The verse-caesura comes after the fourth foot ; in some in- stances, after the short syllable immediately following the fourth foot. E. g. OUTTO) | naos/Sr] \ ngogTO&s- \ UTQOV \\ As|wv, | wg de- \ &og e- \ (JTl. AiafioLk- \ lo[ievo [ d* vno TMV \ fy&Qwv \\ \v *A&rj- \ vaioig \ v- | hoig, [tojdsi, | trjv nohv \ yf GREEK INDEX. In the following indexes, the figures designate the sections () and their divisions : N. stands for NOTE, and R. for REMARK. A. a, 1. 2. changes of, 2. N. 3. quantity of, 2: 17. N. 3: 31. N. 1 : 33. N. 2 : 35. N. 1:36. N. 5:49. N. 3. privative, 135. 4. - pure, nouns in, 31. 3. 2 aor. act. in, 85. N. 2. -, voc. sing, in, 31.4. nom. sing. masc. in, 31. N. 3. -a, gen. sing, in, 31. N. 3. voc. sing, of the third declen- sion in, 38. N. 1. ays or yeas followed by the subj., 215. 2. adelyog, with dat., 195. 1. with gen., 195. N. 1. -adrjv, see -drjv. -adriq, patronymics in, 127. 1. contracted into ??, 23. N. 1. -'#w, -s#w, -v&w, verbs in, 96. 12. a. for , 2. N. 3. -cu permits the accent to be on the antepenult, 20. N. 1. elided, 25. N. 1. alvaghrig, voc. sing, of, 31. R. 1. -/*>, area, verbs in, 96. 7. -ctiog, adjectives in, 62. 3 : 131. 1: 138. N. 1. -aig, -aiaa, aor. part, in, 90. N. i, dat. plur. in, 31. N. 3. with ace. and gen., 183. 1. with two accusa- tives, 183. R. 1. -axig, adverbs in, 120. axovu with gen., 179. 1. with ace., 179. N. 1. with ace. and gen.. 179, N. % -aUoq, adjectives in, 131. 3. aModunog, 73. 2. aUolog, with gen , 186. 2. 73. 2. neuter of, 33. N. 1. with a plural verb, 157. 4. with gen., 186.2. o-iQios with gen., 186. 2. with dat., 186. R. g, 36. N. 1. with gen., 183. R. 1. |, inflection of, 36. 2. , 73. 2. , 73. 2. agrees with a plural substantive, 137. N. 8. -j>, gen. plur. in, 31. N. 3. -av, perf. act. 3d pers. plur. in, 85. N. 1. c, WQOC, followed by the inf., 221. N. 4. Vff|, 36. N. 1. voc. sing, of, 38. N. 4. JQ, inflection of, 40. 2. ac- cent of, 40. N. 3. sub- joined to certain nouns, 136. R. 268 GREEK INDEX. -uvog, national appellatives in, 127. 3. urT/0T(joqpo?, see erotrilog. G&O?, 3 /w?, with gen., 190. 2. withdat., 190. N. 3. |tow with ace. and gen., 190. N.4. do and ww changed into w, 2. N. 3. -ao, -aw?, gen. in, 31. N. 3. anokavw with gen., 178. 2. with ace., 178. N. 1. '^TioUwv, ace. sing, of, 37. N. 2. voc. sing, of, 38. N. 2. anoo-ceQsa), with two accusa- tives, 165. 1. with ace. and gen., 165. R. -ap, accent of the contracted forms of some nouns in, 36. N. 3. APIIN, inflection of, 40. 3. -agiovy diminutives in, 127. 2. -, neuters in, 42. adjec- tives in, 53. 1, R. 1. nu- merals in, 62. 1. fern, pa- tronymics in, 127. 1. -acrxoy, -aaxopyv, see -saxov, ^, dat. plur. of, 40. N. 2. T6 with gen. absolute, 192. N. 2. -air,?, national appellatives in, 127. 3. -avg, inflection of nouns in, 43. 2. amog, inflection of, 65. 1. Ionic forms of, 65. N. neuter of, 33. N. 1. com- parison of, 57. N. 5. how used, 144. superfluous, 144. N. 1. subjoined to the relative pronoun, 144. R. 1. signifies self, very, 144. 2. has the appearance of syw, av, f^ng, vpug, 144. N. 2. signifies poi-cg, 144. N. 3. used in cases of contrast, 144. R. 2. de- notes the principal person, 144. R. 3. - in connection with eavTov, 144. N. 4. with ordinal numbers, 144. N. 5, equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun, 144. N. 6. with the article be- fore it, 65. 2: 144. 3. ouQeofiou, with two accusa- tives, 165. 1. with ace. and gen., 165. R. vrj, accent of the gen. plur. of, 31. N. 2 ^ see -77.^ ^oVj see ov. u/Qig or &XQI, 15. 3. with gen., 194. aw, see ao. B. ftav, 1. N. 3. '/#} with apart., 222. N. 2. /Svl, a short vowel before, 17. 4. augment of verbs begin- ning with, 76. N. 2. , contraction of, 32. N. T or &tteig with subj., 215. 3, N. 2. fiovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. ace. sing, of, 37. N. 1. inflection of, 43. 2. r. ila, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 7, inflection of, 40- 1. accent of, 30. N. 3. , compounds of, 55. N. 3. with ace. and gen., 179. N. 3. with two accusa- tives, ibid. 77 omitted after the article, 140. N. 5. />l, yv, a short vowel before, 17. GREEK INDEX. 269 4. augment of verbs be- ginning with, 76. N. 2. ,, a short vowel before, 17. 4. omitted after the article, 140. N. 5. >, nominative of, 36. 2. inflection of, 43. 2. Q, inflection of, 36. N. 2. -de, -as, -s, adverbs in, 121. 3. -de appended to what, 121. N. 2. del, subject of, 159. N. 1. with gen. and ace., or with gen. and dat., 181. N. 1, 2. Ssiv omitted in certain phrases, 220. N. 3. delva, 69. 2. with the article, 140. N. 10. deanoTrjg, accent of the voc. sing, of, 31. R. 2. demagog, 61. with gen., 186. 2. drjfniTrjQ, inflection of, 40. 1. accent of, 40. N. 3. -dyv, -adrjv, adverbs in, 119. 2. diOKpeoa}, dioupeaovicog, with gen., 186. N. 3. didyoQog with gen., 186. 2. with dat., 186. R. dl/a^pa, 1. N. 3. da, dv, a short vowel before, 17.4. -dov, -??<5oV, adverbs in, 119. 3. dovQs and oaae take plural ad- jectives, 137. N. 7. dvo, 60. 1. agrees with a plu- ral substantive, 137, N. 8. dva- 9 see ev. E. e, why called i//doV, 1. N. 1. changes of, 2. N. 3. -, ace. sing, in, 46. N. 3. pluperf. act. in, 85. N. 4. 23* -itiv, 2 aor. act. infin. in, 89. N. 3. i, see for e, 2. N. 3. augment of verbs beginning with, 80. N. 4. -el, see -/. eta, aor. act. opt. in, 87. N. 3. ipl, am, omitted, 157. N. 10. with gen., 175. with dat, 196. 3, N. 2. infin. of, 221, N. 3. eivai, apparently superfluous, 221. N. 3. -eivog, adjectives in, 131. 2. -eig, adjectives in, 53. 2; ' dat. plur. of adjectives in, 53. R. 2. participles in, 53. 3. , 60. 1. omitted before the gen., 175. N. 3. with dat, 195. N. 4. ex in composition, 5. N. 1 : 7. N. : 9. N. before a con- sonant, 15. 4. i'xaaTog, 73. 2. with the ar- ticle, 140. N. 7. with a plural verb, 157. 4. exdregog, 73. 2. sxelvog, inflection of, 70. dia- lects of, 70. N. 1. neuter of, 33. N. 1. how used, 149. 2. corresponds to the English he, 149. N. 2. epov, epol, ii*iy more emphatic than pay, pol, fie, 143. N. 4. after prepositions, ibid. /, infin. in, 89. N. 2. before Q , a, 12. N. 3. evavxlog and nvilaTgocpog with gen., 186. N. 2. &o X og with gen., 183. N. 3. ' becomes ex, when, 15. 4. leo contracted into tv, 23. N. 1. 270 GREEK INDEX. a^w, augment of, 80. R. 2. -0, adjectives in, 49.3: 131.2. inlartpa, 1 N. 3. -egos, adjectives in, 131. 3. -s$, neuters in, 42. 2d pers. sing, in, 85. N. 3. -taxov, -eoxoprp't -otaxov, -aaxo- [irir, see -axov, -axoprjv. -sat, or -saai, dat. plur. in, 35. N. 3. tuQog, 73. 2. with gen., 186. 2. eirjalai, accent of the gen. plur. _of, 31. N. 2. tv and 8va-, augment of verbs beginning with, 82. 3. fv and xaxwc with certain verbs, 165. N. 2. -evg inflection of nouns in, 44. ace. sing, of nouns in, 44. N. 1. nom. plur. of nouns in, 44. N. 3. Ionic inflection of nouns in, 44. N. 4. appellatives in, 127. 3,6. V w, eV WT, with infin., 220. 1. <* with* gen., 188. N. 1. with part., 222. N. 2. -so), tar, gen. in, 31. N. 3. -'w, contraction of dissyllabic verbs in, 116. N. 1, R. Z. , power of, 5. 2, N, 2. at the beginning of a word does not always make posi- tion, 17. N. 2. -fg, see -de. -, verbs in, 96. 4, N. 5, 6, 7. H. ri, original power of, 1. N. 1. changes of, 2. N. 3. -^ or -(x%r), adverbs in, 121. 4. becomes -y t 121. N. 4. 77, tJian, 228. 1. after com- paratives, 186. N. 5, 6. between two comparatives, 228. N. 2. 77 for at, 3. N. 3. -rjdov, see -<5oV. , 152. -iff*?, adjectives in, 131.5. contraction of adjectives in, 53. N. 1. vi for a, 3. N. 3. rjxw with gen., 188. N. pres- ent of, 209. N. 2. /xo, 73. 1. attracted by the antecedent, 151. R. 5. og, adjectives in, 131. 3. of, 73. 2. with gen., 186. 2. -TJV, adjectives in, 53. 4. in- fin. in, 89. N. 2. optat. in, 87. N. 2. -?^o / , national appellatives in, 127. 3. -770, syncopated nouns in, 40. 1,2. -W g en - ?> inflection of nouns in, 42. - ace. sing, of proper names in, 46. N. 1. ad- jectives in, 52. 1. -5?, nom. plur. in, 44. N. 3. e or -yai, dat. plur. in, 31. N. 3. ' -r\Tr\<;, national appellatives in, 127. 3. cpi, gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3. -riwg, perf. act. part, in, 99. N. 0. &CITSQOV, 14. N. 1. , see fiovtei. , see dvayxr]. >, adverbs in, 121. 2. -#t, 2d pers. sing, imperat. in, 88. N. 1. becomes it, 14. N. 4. -&i, -ai, adverbs in, 121. 1. &iyydvw with gen., 179. 1. with ace., 179. N. 1. GREEK INDEX. 271 V, 14. N. 1. Q, inflection of, 40. 1. accent of, 40. N. 3. I. -i, inflection of neuters in, 43. -/ annexed to the demonstra- tive pronouns, 70. N. 2. annexed to the demonstrative pronominal adjectives, 73. N. 2. annexed to demon- strative adverbs, 123. N. 2, 3. -i y -/, adverbs in, 119. 4. -/a, nouns in, 128. 1. -i>ddyg, see -Idyg. -Idyg, -iddyg, patronymics in, 127. 1. -Idiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. rtooff, 73. 2. with gen., 174. N. -Isig, adjectives in, 131. 5. hgog with gen., 174. N. -txoV, adjectives in, 131. 2. -ifii, verbs in, 117. N. 14. -ipog, adjectives in, 131. 4. -Ivdyv, adverbs in, 119. 6. -Ivy, -iwvy, patronymics in, 127. 1. -ivog, adjectives in, 131. 2. national appellatives in, 127. 3. -tov, diminutives in, 127. 2. -to?, adjectives in, 131. 1. national appellatives in, 127. 3. -ig gen. tog, sag, inflections of nouns in, 43. 1, 3. -ig, gen. idog or tog, 46. N. 2. -ig, adjectives in, 52. 2. pa- tronymics in, 127. 1. di- minutives in, 127. 2. na- tional appellatives in, 127. 3 ?, -laxy, diminutives in 127. 2. ), verbs in, 96. 8. I'aog with dat., 195. 1. with gen., 195. N. 1. refers to the limiting noun, 195. N. 2. jTog, see -Iwv. -hyg, -uaryg, nouns in, 127, 3, 5. -(5, fut. in, 102. N. 1. -low, -WTog, comparison by, 58. , patronymics in, 127. 1. -iwvy, see -Ivy. OTyg, see -hyg. K. I 3$, 152. xw, see sv. XT, changes of, in composi- tion, 10. N. 2. :'w with gen. and ace., 183.' 2. with two geni- tives, 183. N. 1. with part., 222. 2. , inflection of, 42. N. 3. compounds of, 55. N. 3. -xMyg, contraction of nouns in, 42. N. 1. ygovopito with gen., 178. 2. with ace. of the thing, 178. N. 1. with ace. of the person, ibid. xoivog with gen., 174. N. with dat., 195. N. 1. XOTTTTtt, 1. N. 3. xoeag, Ttoag, inflection of, 42. N. 3. xvxscov, ace. sing, of, 37. N. 2. , inflection of, 40. 3. A. with gen., 178. 2. with ace., 178. N. 1. &w, hy&dvw, with ace. and gen., 182. N. 2. ->Uw, verbs in, 96. 6. M. -pa, nouns in, 129. 4. :, vy, with ace., 171 differ- ence between, 171. N. 1. pd omitted, 171. N. 2.- the 272 GREEK INDEX. name of the god omitted after, 171. N. 3. and id^ag y inflection of, 53. R. 1. comparison of, 57. 3. sAst with gen. and dat., 182, N.3. ish, inflection of, 36. N. 2. with infin., 219. N. I. u, -pev, infin. in, 89. N. 1. with gen., 178. 2. with ace., 178. N.I. USTSOTI and Tioocnjxet with gen., 178. N. 2. /iST6>w with gen., 178. 2. with ace , 178. N. 1. fisXQig or ^XQ L > 15. 3. with gen., 194. -p7, nouns in, 129. 5. jj, 224. 3, 4, 5, 6. after negative expressions, 225. 3. Wdtis, plural of, 60. N. 1. pfarjQ, inflection of, 40. 1. accent of, 40. N. 3. com- pounds of, 55. N. 2. -^ut, 1st pers. ind. act. in, 84 1, N. 1. subj. in, 86. N. 2. verbs in, 117. liilivyaxw, with ace. and gen., 182. N. 2. with two accu- satives, ibid. (JLV, augment of verbs beginning with, 76. N. 2. -pog, nouns in, 129 3. pov, pot, fis, see ipoi), Ifiol, epe. -jjiwv, adjectives in, 132. 5. N. v before a labial, 12. 1. before a palatal, 12. 2. before a liquid, 12. 3. before a or , 12. 4, 5, N. 2, 4. in the preposition ev. movable, 15. 1, 2. vavg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. in- flection of, 43. 2. vv\, see ^u. _J_ with ace., 164. N. 2. with ace. and gen., 184. 2. -vrvw, see -vvo. u$, inflection of, 36. N. 1. -j>uw, verbs in, 96. 9. -|, adverbs in, 119. 5. O. o, why called pixgov, 1. N. 1. -o, neuters in, 33. N. 1. o for off, 19. R. 3. o'5, inflection of, 70. dialects of, 70. N. 1. how used, 149. 1. as an adverb, 149. N. 1. de, see o piv. odog omitted after the article, 140. N. 5. -oeig, adjectives in, 131. 5. 01 for o, 2, N. 3. for ov, 3. N. 3. -01 permits the accent to be on the antepenult, 20. N. 1. -o7, adverbs in, 121. 1. ola with gen. absolute, 192. N. 2. V, opt. in, 87. N. 2. -ouv, gen. and dat. dual in, 33. N. 4 : 35. N. 3. ol'x5s, yvyade, 121. N. 3. txao? with gen., 174. N. Ixot, accent of, 121. N. 1 : 20. N. 1. -oio, gen. in, 33. N. 4. -o), adjectives in, 131. 1 . oloc, 73. 1. attracted by its antecedent, 151. R. 3, 4. with infin., 219. N. 2. oi'ff, inflection of, 43. 2. olcrtf' o d(To*>, 218. N. 3. ',, dat. plur. in, 33. N. 4. GREEK INDEX. 273 , with part., 222. N. 2. with the article, 140. N. 7. 6 tiiv 6 &', 142. 1. the proper name subjoined to o fiiv, 142. N. 2. are not always opposed to each other, 142. N. 3. o Pre- fers to something different from that to which 6 n&v re- fers, 142. N. 4. opotog with dat., 195. 1. with gen., 195. N. 1. refers to the limiting noun, 195. N. 2. opov, compounds of, with gen., 195. N. 1. -oo?, inflection of nouns in, 34 : 49. 3. accent of the con- tracted gen. and dat. of polysyllabic nouns in, 34. N. 2. comparison of ad- jectives in, 57. R. 2. -og, ace. pi. in, 33. N. 4. -oc, inflection of neuters in, 42. adjectives in, 49. ab- stract nouns in, 128. N. 4. og pep og de, 152. oaov, ociw, with inf., 220. 1. oaas, see dovoe. oaTig, inflection of, 71. 2. has the force of the inter- rogative pronoun, 153. N. o'ffw, see oaov. ov for o, 2. N. 3. -ov, or -axov, adverbs in, 121. 1. ov, ovx, ovx, 15. 4. how used, 224. 1. ov, augment of verbs beginning with, 80. N. 4. ovdslg, nom. plur. of, 60. N. 1. ovStlg oaTig ov, 225. N. -ovc, participles in, 53. 5. ovrog, inflection of, 70. Ionic forms of, 70. N. 1. how used, 149. I. , OVTW, 15. 3. -o, -TTWV, comparatives in, 58. N. 1. 5- for en, 1. R. avyyiyvwaxw, see ovvotda. -avvrj, nouns in, 128. N. 3. avvoidot and ovyyiyvwaxw with part., 222. N. 1. -crept, gen. and dat. in, 35. N. 3. awTfJo, voc. sing, of, 33. N. 2. accent of the voc. sing, of, 38. N. 3. T. l for , 63. N. 1. T>la, see pslag. li&gmnov, 14. N. 1. -Tfiga, -TQHX, -rolg, feminines in, 129. 2. -TS'OS, verbal adjectives in, 132. 2. neuter of verbal adjec- tives in, 162. 2, N. 1, 2: 200. N. 2. with dat., 200. 2. , -raws, comparison by, 57. , 73. 1. inflection of, 73. N. 1. *7, -Tyg, -TWO, verbal nouns in, 129. 2. -T^, voc. sing, of nouns in, 31. 4. abstract nouns in, 128. N. 2. , inflection of, 68. dialects of, 68. N. with the article, 140. N. 9. how used, 147. does not always stand at the beginning of a proposi- tion, 147. N. 1. for nolog, 147. N. 2. tig, inflection of, 69. 1. dia- lects of, 69. N. 1. how used, 148. forexaazo?, 148. N. 1. refers to the speak- er, or to the person addressed, 148. N. 2. with adjectives of quality or quantity, 148. N. 3. denotes importance, 148. N. 4. doubled, 148. N. 4. TO/ for ol, 63. N. 1. roi6ade, 73. 1. with inf. 219. N. 2. iovrog, 73. 1. inflection of, 73. N. 1. with the article, 140. N. 8. -Tog, verbal adjectives in, 132. 1. with dat., 200. 2. TO2, 63. N. 2. derivatives of, 73. 1 : 123. roaovTog, 73. 1. inflection of, 73. N. 1. -TO/, 866 -T61QCC- TT for ffff, 6. N. VW, with gen., 178. 2. with ace., 178. N. 1. -TWO, see -TTJQ. T. v, why called j//doV, 1. N. 1. GREEK INDEX. 275 breathing of, 4. N. 1. quantity of, 17. N. 3: 36. N. 5. -v, contracts in, 43. 3. -vdgiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. -v&w, see -&&(*) vt, improper diphthong, 3. 1, N. 1. vlos, omitted after the article, 140. N. 5. -vUiov, -vttog, diminutives in, 127. 2. vpedanog, 73. 2. -vfu, subj. of verbs in, 117. 4, N. 4. optat. of verbs in, 117. 5, 6, N. 7. 2 aor. of verbs in, 117. N. 16. vnsv&vvog, with gen., 183. N. 3. -vg, contracts in, 43. 1,3. adjectives in, 51. parti- ciples in, 53. 6. ixpiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. see ays. with gen., 183. R. 1. -yi, gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3: 33. N. 4 : 35. N. 3. ygrtv, compounds of, 55. N. 2. qigovdog, 14. N. 1. f, see ol'xnds. X. %ovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. Xodonou with dat., 198. N. 1. Xgj, with gen. and ace. 181. N. 1. subject of, 159.2. XO^oirjg, accent of the gen. plur. of, 31. N. 2. omitted after the article, 140. N. 5. V. uw with gen., 179. 1. with ace., 179. N. 1. J2. CD, why called /u/, 1. N. 1. changes of, 2. N. 3. for ov, 3. N. 3. -w, ace. sing, in, 33. R. 1. gen. sing, in, 33. N. 4. inflection of nouns in, 42. dual and plural of nouns in, 42. N. 4. Ionic ace. sing, of nouns in, 42. N. 6. accent of the contracted ace. sing, of nouns in, 42. N. 7. -wdrjg, adjectives in, 131. 6. -WTJV, opt. act. in, 117. N. 6. -tokos, adjectives in, 131. 3. -wj>, gen. and dat. dual in, 43. * N. 3. -tav, -und, nouns in, 127. 4. -w>, adjectives in, 53. 7, 8. inflection of comparatives in, 58.2. 6g with gen., 190. 2, , see -tov. -wo, gen. in, 33. N. 4. WQct, see ctvctyxr^ -cos, ace. pi. in, 33. N. 4. fern, in, 42 gen. sing, in, 43. 3: 44. adjectives in, 50. participles in, 53. 9. adverbs in, 119. 1. 164. N. 2. two accusatives after verbs sig- nifying to ask, fyc. 165. 1, N. 1. to do, to say, 165. N. 2. to divide, 165.2. to name, fyc. 166. synec- dochical, 167. in paren- thetical phrases, 167. N. 2. subjoined to a clause, 167. N. 4. denotes duration of time, 168. 1,N. 1. of time when, 168. 2. for the gen. absolute, 168. N. 2. -de- notes extent of space, 169. of place whither, 170. after pd, vt] t 171. omitted after ^, MJ, 171. N. 3. with prepositions, 72. af- ter adjectives, 185. N. 1. Active Voice, 74. 1. forma- tion of the tenses of, 94- 105. how used, 205. as passive, 205. N. 2, 3, R. Acute Accent, 19. 1,2. on the antepenult, 20. 2, 3, N. 1, 2, 3. becomes grave, 20.4. Adjective, 30. 1. inflection of, 48-59. of three end- ings, 48. 1. of two endings, 48. 2. of one ending, 48. 3:54. in og, 49. in &?? gen. ft>, 50. in vg gen. 8og, 51. in r\g, ig, 52. in ag, e'tg, ovg, tig, (ov, wg gen. OTO?, 53. compound, 55. anomalous and defective, 56. com- parison of, 57-59. deriva- tion of, 130-133. derived from other adjectives, 130. ENGLISH INDEX. 277 from subst., 131. from verbs, 132. from adverbs, 133. agreement of, 137. mas. adj. with fern, subst., 137. N. 1. referring to two or more substantives, 137. 2, N. 5. agrees with one of the substantives to which it refers, 137. N. 4. referring to a collective noun, 137. 3. plural agrees with a dual subst., and vice versa, 137. N. 6. used substantively, 138. 1. neuter, 138.2. used adverbially, 138. N. 1. Admiration, Mark of, 27. N.2. Adverb, 29. 2. of manner, 119. of quantity, 120. of place, 121. of time, 122. derived from IIO2, 123. comparison of, 125. an- omalous comparison of, 125. N.3. with the article, 141. 1,2, N.I. with gen., 177: 181 : 186: 188.2, N. 1. with dat., 195. 1. limits what, 223. negative, 224 : 225. Alphabet, 1. 1. division of the letters of, 1. 2. Alpha Privative, 135. 4. Anapestic Verse, 252 - 255. Anastrophe, 226. N. 1. Antecedent, 150. 1. Antepenult, 16. 3. Aorist, 74. 3. augment of, 78. reduplication of, 78. N. 2. 1st pers. sing, of 1 aor. act., 84. N. 2. in erxov, axo- fjHjv, 85. N. 5. inflection of aor. pass., 92. 2 aor. mid. syncopated, 92. N. 4. formation of, 104: 105: 109: 110: 115. 2 aor. act. of verbs in p, 117. 12. 24 how used, 212. for the perfect or pluperfect, 212. N. |._for the present, 212. N. 2, 4. for the future, 212. N. 3. Aphaeresis, 26. 3. Apodosis, 213. R. Apostrophe, 27. Arsis, 233. 2. Article, 29. 1. inflection of, 63. quantity, accent, and dialects of, 63. N. ]. old form of, 63. N. 2. how used, 139 - 142. with proper names, 139. 3. ac- companies the leading char- acter of a story, 139. N. 1. with the second accusative after verbs signifying to call, 139. N. 2. separated from its noun, 140. 1, N. 1, R. 2. two or three articles stand- ing together, 140. R. 1. re- peated, 140. 2. with the part., 140. '3, N. 3. adjec- tive standing before or after the substantive and its article, 140. N. 4. alone, 140.5. without a noun, 140. N. 5. with pronouns, 140. 5. with o'Aoc and X(JTOC, 140. N. 7. - with Toiovxog, 140, N. 8. with ilg and THHOC, 140. N. 9. with del, 140. N. 10. before adverbs, 141. 1, 2, N. 1 . before a proposi- tion, 141. 3. before any word, 141. 4, N. 2, 3. as demonstrative, 142. 1. be- fore oc, ooog, olo?, 142. N. 1. as relative, 142. 2. neu- ter with gen., 176. Atona, 19. N. 1. Attraction with the Relative, 151. 278 ENGLISH INDEX. Augment, 75. kinds of, 75. 2. syllabic, 75.2: 76-79. of theperf, 76. of the pluperf., 77. of the imperf. and aor., 78, of verbs be- ginning with Q, 79. tern poral, 80 : 81. of compound verbs, 8*2. omitted, 78. N. 3 : 80. N. 4, 5. B. Barytone, 19. 4. Breathings, 4. of v y 4. N. 1. of Q, 4. 2, 3. place of, 4. 4. _ power of, 4. 5, N. 2. rough changed into smooth, 14. N. 5. C. Caesura, 235. Cases, 30. 4. how used, 162 -204. Catalectic verse, 234. 2. Causative, see Verbs. Circumflex, 19. 1, 3: 21. on the penult, 21.. 2. Collective Nouns, 137.3: 157. 4. Colon, 27. Comma, 27. Comparison by ifgog, jctto?, 57 of substantives, 57. N. 4. of pronouns, 57. N. 5. by lav, taxog, 58. anoma- lous and defective, 59. of adverbs, 125. Composition of Words, 135. Concrete, see Abstract. Conjunction, 29. 2. how used, 228. Connecting Vowel, 85. 1. Consonants, 1.2. division of, 5: 6. final, 5. N. 3. eu- phonic changes of, 7 - 14. movable, 15. Contraction, 23. accent in, 23. N. 3. Copula, 160. 1. Coronis, 27. Crasis, 24. left to pronun- ciation, 24. N. 2. D. Dactylic Verse, 246-251. Dative, 30. 4. plural of the third declension, 39. how used, 195-203. after words implying resemblance, fyc. 195. after adjectives, 198. 1. after verbs, 192.2. after impersonal verbs, ibid. after verbs signify- ing to be, 196. 3, N. 2. with interjections, 196. 5. denotes with regard to, 197. 1. preceded by ug t 197. N. 1. apparently su- perfluous, 197. N.2. limits words, 197. 2. with com- paratives, 197. N 3. with substantives, 197. N. 4. of cause, 4*c. 198. with /oo- juat, 198..N. 1. of accom- paniment, 199 of tturo'c, 199. N. 1," denotes the sub- ject, 200 : 206. 2. with verbal adjectives in TO? and Tto?, 200. 2. of time, 201. for the gen. absolute, 201 . N. 2. of place, 202. with prepositions, 203. Declensions, 30. 3. Defective, see Noun, Adjective, Comparison. Demonstrative Pronoun, 70. dialects of, 70. N. 1. with /, 70. N.2. pronominal ad- jectives, 73. 1. how used, 149. _ as adverb, 1 49. N.I. subjoined to a noun in the same proposition, 149. N. 3. subjoined to a relative, 149. N. 4. ENGLISH INDEX. 279 Deponent Verbs, 208. perf. and pluperf. of, 208. N. 2. aor. pass, of, 208. N. 3. Derivation of Words, 126-134. Desideratives, 134. N. 2. Diaeresis, 27. N. 1. Digamma, 1. N. 3. Diminutives, 127. 2. Diphthongs, 3. improper, 3. N. 2. commutation of, 3. N. 3. improper, in capitals, 4. 4. Dipody, 234. 3. Dissyllables, 16. 2. Dual, 29. 3 : 30. N.2: 137. N. 1,5,6,7,8: 150. N.I: 157. N. 1, 4, R. 1. E. Elision, 25. before a conso- nant, 25. N. 2. Enclitics, 22. retain their ac- cent, 22. 4, N. 1. suc- ceeding each other, 22. N. 2. Euphonic Changes, see Conso- nants. F. Feet, 233. 1. Final, see Consonants, Syllable. First Declension, endings of, 31. 1. gender of, 31.2. voc. sing, of, 31. 4. quan- tity of, 31. N. 1. accent of, 31. N. 2. dialects of, 31. N. 3. contracts of, 32. Future, 74. 3. augment of the third, 75. 1. formation of, 102:103:111: 112: 114. how used, 209. 4, N. 10 : 211. periphrastic, 209. N. 1. G. Gender, 30. 2. how distin- guished in grammar, ibid. masc. for fern., 137. N. 1. implied, 137. N. 2, 3 : 150. N. 2. Genitive, 30. 4. of the third declension, 36. 1. how used , 1 73 1 94. adnomin- al, 173. relations denoted by the adnominal, 173. N. 1. subjective and objective, 173. N. 2. two adnominal genitives, 173. N. 3. sub- joined to possessive words, 174. with i'dioc, &c. 178. N. with verbs signifying to be, fyc. 175. after the neuter article, 176. denot- ing a whole, 177. after a participle with the article, 177. N. 1. after dcti{i6viog, &c. 177. N. 3. after neu- ter adjectives, 177. 2, N. 4. of the reflexive pronoun, 177. N. 5. after verbs re- ferring to a part., 178. 1. after verbs signifying to par- take, fyc. 178. 2. to take liold of, fyc. 179. to let go, fyc. 180. after words denoting fulness, fyc. 181. after verbs signifying to remember, fyc. 182. to accuse, fyc. 183. to be- gin fyc. 184. after verbal adjectives, 185. after com- paratives, 186. denoting on account of, 187. 1. after exclamations, 187. 2. after verbs signifying to entreat, 187. 3. denoting the subject, 187. 4. of in- strument, 187. 5. denot- ing in respect of. 188. af- ter adverbs, 188. 2. after verbs signifying to take aim at, $c. 188. 3. of mate- 280 ENGLISH INDEX. rial, 189. of price, 190. of time, 191. absolute, 192. of place, 193. with prepositions, 194. Grave Accent, 19. 1, N. 2. for the acute, 20. 4. H. Historical, see Secondary Tens- es. I. Iambic Verse, 241 - 245. Imperative, 74. 2. termina- tions and connecting vowels, 88. how used, 218. in prohibitions, 218. 2. se- cond person of, for the third, 218. N. 2. in connection with the relative, 218. N. 3. perf. of, 209. N. 7, 8. Imperfect, 74. 3. - augment of, 78. in axov, axo^uj?*', 85. N. 5. formation of, 97 : 100. 2: 113. how used, 210. denotes an attempt, 210. N. 1. denotes a cus- tomary action, 210. N. 2. for aor., 210. N. 3. for pres., 210. N. 4. Impersonal Verbs, 159. N. 1, 2. with dat., 192. 2. Indefinite, Pronoun, 69. pro- nominal adjectives, 73. 1. adverbs, 123. how used, 148. Indicative, 74. 2. termina- tions and connecting vowels of, 84 : 85. of verbs in pi, 117. 2, 3. how used, 213. in independent proposi- tions, 213. 1. after inter- rogative and relative words, 213. 2. - after particles, 213, 3, N 4,5, 6. in con- ditional propositions, 213. 4, 5. with V, 213. N. 3. Infinitive. 74. 2. termina- tions and connecting vowels of, 89. of verbs in p, 117. 8, 9. subject of, 158. after verbs, participles, and adjectives, 119. 1 . denotes a cause, 119. 2. for the indie., 1 19. N. 4. omitted, 119. N. 5. for the im- perat., 119. N. 6, 7. for the subj., 119. N. 8. ex- presses a wish, 119. N. 9. with wW, &c. 220. 1. with TIQIV, &,c. 220. 1. in parenthetical phrases, 220. N. 1 , 2, 3. with Zv, 220. 3. as a neuter substantive, 221. for the gen. of cause, 221. N. 1. in exclama- tions of surprise, 221. N. 2. superfluous, 221. N. 3. after avdyxr}, &c. 221. N. 4. Inflection of words, 29-135. Interjection, 29. 2. how used, 229. Interrogation, 27. Interrogative, Pronoun, 68. dialects of, 68. N. pro- nominal adjectives, 73. 1. adverbs, 123. how used, 147. Intransitive, see Verbs. Iota Subscript, 3. 1. Irregular Construction, 230. K. Koppa, 1. N. 3. L. Labials, 6. before linguals, 7. before ^ and a, 8. Leading, see Primary Tenses. Letters and Syllables, 1 - 28. Linguals, 6. before ^u, a, and before palatals and other linguals, 10. Liquids, 5. 1. ENGLISH INDEX. 281 M. Metathesis, 26. 2. Middle Mutes, 5. 3. Middle Voice, 74. 1. tenses of, 113-115. how used, 207. as active, 207. N. 4, 5. as passive, 207. N. 6. 7. Moods, 74. 2. terminations and connecting vowels of, 84 - 90. how used, 213-221. Movable, see Consonants. Monosyllables, 16. 2. N. National Appellatives, 127. 3. Negative, Particles, 224. formulas, 224. N. 1, 2, 3. two negatives, 225. Neuter, 30. 2. has three cases alike, 30. N. 1. ad- jectives with the article, 138. 2. plural with a sing, verb, 157. 2. adjective in the predicate, 160. N. 1, 2. Nominative, 30. 4. sing, of the third declension, 36. how used, 157. for the voc., 157. N. 11. without a verb, 230. 1 . Noun, 30. indeclinable, 45.-*- anomalous, 46.- defective, 47. Numbers, 29. 3. commuta- tion of, 137. N. 6, 7, 8: 157. N. 4. Numerals, Marks of, 1. N. 3, 5, 6. cardinal, 60. or- dinal, 61. substantives, adjectives, and adverbs, 62. O. Object, 162. immediate, 163. Optative, 74. 2. terminations and connecting vowels of, 87. periphrastic perf., 87. N. 1. perf. pass., 91. 3, 5. of verbs in pi, 117. 5, 6. of verbs in vju, 1 17. N. 7. how used, 216: 217. after particles, 216. 1. after interrogative and rela- tive words, 216. 2. after the past tenses, 216. 3, 4. after the present or future, 216. N. 1,2. expresses a wish, 217. 1, N. 1. in in- dependent propositions, 217. 2. for the ind., 217. 3. for the imperat., 217. 4. Oxytone, 19. 2. P. Palatals, 6. before linguals, 7. before ^ and a, 9. Parenthesis, Marks of, 27. Participle, formation of, 90. of verbs in /ui, 117. 10, 11. with the article, 140. 3, N. 3. followed by the case of its verb, 162. 2. how used, 222. with verbs sig- nifying to know, fyc. 222. 2, N. 1. to endure, fyc. 222. 3. with dtccylyvofiai, x. i. A. 222. 4. with %o>, x. t. L 222. N. 2. fut., 222. 5. pres., 222. N. 3. with ad- verbs, 222. N. 4. with V, 222. 6. Parts of Speech, declinable, 29. 1. indeclinable, 29. 2. Passive Voice, 74. 1. tenses of, 106-112. how used, 206. subject of, 206. 1, 2. N. 1. retains the latter case, 206. 3. as middle, 206. N. 2. Patronymics, 127. 1. Penult, 16. 3. Perfect, 74. 3. augment of, 76. syncopated, 91. N. 6, 7, 8, 9. formation of, 98 : 99: 107: 113. how used, 282 ENGLISH INDEX. 209. 2. aspres., 209. N. 4. expresses a customary action, 209. N. 5. - for the fut, 209. N. 6. imperat., 209. N. 7, 8. Period, 27. Perispomenon, 19. 3. Person, 74. 4. Personal Pronoun, 64. dia- lects of, 64. N. 2 . how used, 143 : 144. of the third person, 143. N. 1, 2. repeated, 143. N. 3. tyov and pou, 143. N. 4. Pluperfect, 74. 3. augment of, 77. in , 85. N. 4. passive, 91. 1. syncopated, 91. N. 6, 7, 8. formation of, 100: 101: 108: 113. how used, 209. 4. as im- perf. 209. N. 4, 9. as aor., 209. N. 9. Polysyllables, 16. 2. Possessive Pronoun, 67. dia- lects of, 67. N. 1. how used, 146. used objective- ly, 146. N. 1. third pers. of, 146. N. 2, 3. Predicate, 156: 160. noun in, 160. 2, 3. Preposition, 29. 2. how used, 226 : 227. primitive, 226. 1. after the noun, 226. N. 1. for dpi, 226. N. 2. separated by tmesis, 226. N. 3, 4, 5. in composition, 135. 3, N. 6, 7, 8. with ace., 172. with gen., 194. with dat., 203. Present, 74. 3. formation of, 94 - 96. simple or original, 96. how used, 209. 1. for the aor., 209. N. 1. for the peril, 209. N. 2. for the fut., 209. N. 3. Primary or Leading Tenses, 74. 3 terminations of, 84. 1. Privative , 135. 4. Pronominal Adjectives, 73. Pronoun, 64-72. how used, 143 - 155. Pronunciation, 28. Modern Greek, 28. 2. Proparoxytone, 19. 2. Protasis, 213. R. Punctuation Marks, 27. Pure Syllable, 16. 4. a. Quantity, 17 : 18. of , *, v, 17. N. 3. Marks of, 2:27: of the first declension, 31. N. 1 . of the second de- clension, 33. N. 2. of the third declension, 35. N. 1 : 36. N. 5. R. Reciprocal Pronoun, 72. how used, 155. for the re- flexive, 155. N. Reduplication, 76. 1. of the 2 aor., 78. N. 2. Attic, 81. Reflexive Pronoun, 66. dia- lects of, 66. N. 4, 5. how used, 145. of the third person, 145. N. 1. for the reciprocal, 145. N. 2. Relative Pronoun, 71. dia- lects of, 71. N. 1. how used, 150 - 154. referring to two or more nouns, 150. 2. - referring to a collective noun, 150. 3. before its antecedent, 150. 4 : 151. 3. refers to an omitted ante- cedent, 150. 5. refers to a possessive pronoun, 150. N. 7. attracted, 151. 1. attracts its antecedent, 151. 2. as demonstrative, 152. ENGLISH INDEX. 283 as interrogative, 153. for IW, 154. verb of, 157. N. 6. Relative Adverb, 123. be- fore its antecedent, 150. N. 6. attracted, 151. N. 2. attracts its antecedent, 151. N. 3. as demonstrative, 152. N. 2. Root, of nouns of the third declension, 36. R. 1. of verbs and tenses, 83. tive words, 214. 2, 4. afte* pres. or fut., 214. 3. aftei past tenses, 214. N. 1. in exhortations, 215. for the fut. ind. , 215. N. 3. in pro- hibitions, 215. 5. Substantive, 30. 1. deriva- tion of, 127- 129. in ap- position, 136. as an adjec- tive, 136. N. 3. Syllables, 16. Syncope, 26. 1. Rough Consonants, 5. 3. in.Synecdochical, see Accusative, two successive syllables, 14. Synecphonesis or Synizesis, 3, N. 2, 3, 4. not doubled, | 23. N. 2. 14. 4. Syntax, 136-232. S. T. Tenses, 74. 3. root of, 83. 2. terminations of, 84. how used, 209 -212. | Thesis, 233.2. San or Sampi, 1. N. 3. Secondary or Historical Tens- es, 74. 3. terminations of, 84.2. Second Declension, endings of, 33. 1. gender of, 33. 2. quantity of, 33. N. 2 ac- cent of, 33. N. 3. dialects of, 33. N . 4. contracts of, 34. Smooth Breathing, see Breath- ings. Smooth Consonants, 5. 3. be- Third Declension, endings of, 35. 1. gender of, 35. 2. quantity of, 35. N. 1. ac- cent of, 35. N. 2. dialects of, 35. N. 3. formation of the cases of, 36-39. syn- copated nouns of, 40. con- tracts of, 42 - 44. Tmesis, 226. N. 3, 4, 5. fore the rough breathing, 14. Trochaic Verse, 237-239. 1,2. V. Subject, 156-159. of a fi- Vau, 1. N. 3. nite verb, 157. omitted, Verbal Roots and Termina- 157. N. 8. of the inf., 158. | tions, 83-92. of impersonal verbs, 159.1 Verb, 74- 118. accent of, N. 1, 2. Subjunctive, 74. 2. termina- tions and connecting vowels of, 86. periphrastic perf, 86. N.I. perf. pass., 91. 3,4. of verbs in p, 117. 4, N. 4. how used, 214 : 215. after particles, 214. 2. after interroative and rela- 93. division of, 94. 2. penult of pure, 95. con- tract, 116. in pi, 117. anomalous, 118. subject of a finite, 157. transitive and intransitive, ^05. 1. causative, 205 2. passive, 206. middle, 207. de- . ponent, 203. 284 ENGLISH INDEX. Verse, final syllable of, 236. Versification, 233. -255. Vocative, 30. 4. of the first declension, 31. 4. of the third declension, 38. how used, 204. Voices, 74. 1 . how used, 205-208. Vowels, 1. 2: 2. doubtful, 2. N. 1, R. commutation of, 2. N. 3. short, before a mute and liquid, 17. 3. , long made short and vice ver- sa, 18. connecting, 85. 1. Z. Zeugma, 231. cu CUJ X D et 4 Q4C ABBREVIATIONS ai 3? Ini & djto <&> *i- %> av dj V or 7*9 Zw v\v g 77 yv ** \ KCUl Se A^; jttfv r SL (^ o? ^ Sia ^ ov TP 1 <5&f T^ 6 ?' 8T r Ix ex e^ ^ Ir e? t e 15SJ rat rav TlfV tijs TO TOV 1&V vv VTtO UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY BERKELEY Return to desk from which borrowed. This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. . LD 21-100m-ll,'49(B7146sl6)476 U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY